Spring RM

Research Methods,
Statistics, & Evaluation
2011
sagepub.com
SAGE is revolutionizing statistics!
What is
STATLAB Online?
STATLAB Online is an interactive laboratory
that allows students to conduct psychological
experiments from start to finish.
What does
STATLAB Online do?
Students and instructors are able to track and

analyze data for their own experiment results as well
as those of the entire class.
How will your students

benefit from STATLAB Online?
Because students are evaluating their own data,
STATLAB Online emphasizes the relevance of
statistical analysis in understanding human behavior.
How can you be among the

first to experience STATLAB
Online?
Email us at statlab@sagepub.com to join our
exclusive Usability Lab.
Table of Contents
textbooks
General Research Methods / Research Design
Introduction to Statistics / Quantitative
Methods
Intermediate / Advanced Statistics and
Quantitative Methods
Introduction to Qualitative Methods
Intermediate / Advanced Qualitative Methods
Action Research
Case Study & Narrative Analysis
Ethnography
Focus Groups
Interviewing
Survey Research Methods
Mixed Methods Research
Evaluation
Research Methods in Business and Marketing
Research Methods in Communication
Research Methods in Counseling
Research Methods in Criminology /
Criminal Justice
Research Methods in Education
Research Methods in Health
Research Methods in PoliticsOfferings
from CQ Press
Research Methods in Psychology
Research Methods in Social Work
Social Research Methods
2
2
7
11
16
22
28
29
32
34
35
37
38
40
45
47
49
49
51
55
56
58
62
64
titles for purchase 72

Quantitative Applications in the
Social Sciences
The Needs Assessment Kit
For Your Bookshelf
Recommend to Your Students
Recommend to Your Librarian
Index
72
74
75
84
91
98
Explanation of symbols
accompanying books in this catalog
All books in this catalog are available for instructors to review on a
complimentary review basis, unless indicated by the following symbols:
60-day examination COPIES

Books with this symbol are available on a 60-day examination basis.
Visit www.sagepub.com/policy for details on our examination copy
policies.
purchase only COPIES

Books with this symbol are not available on a complimentary or
60-day exam basis for adoption consideration. These books are for
purchase only.
Titles displaying this symbol are available online through

CourseSmart. Receive instant access to the entire text before it
publishes and help the environment by saving trees at the same time!
Visit: www.coursesmart.com
Titles displaying this symbol have book specific content available for
Blackboard. For more information, to access a demo, or to get your
instructor key, please contact us: Phone: 1 (800) 818-7243
Email: textsales@sagepub.com
Network cover photo Dejan Brkic | Dreamstime.com
Two easy ways to order!

ONLINE: For FASTEST delivery, go to: www.sagepub.com
CALL: (800) 818-7243 or (805) 499-9774 Monday-Friday: 6 am-5 pm PT
SAGE texts now comply with the Higher Education

Opportunity Act (HEOA). Find HEOA information for
each title at www.sagepub.com or by emailing
sageheoa@sagepub.com or calling (800) 818-7243.
Prices displayed are in US Dollars and are subject to change.
Textbooks
TEXTBOOKS
Pages 2-74


Research Methods in Practice

Strategies for Description and Causation
Dahlia K. Remler, Baruch College, CUNY
Gregg G. Van Ryzin, Rutgers University, Newark
With their deep commitment to making methods accessible and meaningful, authors Dahlia K. Remler
and Gregg G. Van Ryzin compel students to truly grasp the logicand limitsof the latest research
appearing in academic journals, government reports, and the media. The authors make the coverage spark,
emphasizing the critical interpretation and practical application of research findings throughout the text by
focusing on causation and real-life data.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6467-8

2011, 616 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site,
www.sagepub.com/remler
Key Features
Reflects current methodological techniques used in interdisciplinary research, as illustrated with many
policy-relevant research examples
The realistic trade-offs, uncertainties, habits, and excitement of the research experience come through
on every page
Covers strategies for both description and causal estimationand emphasizes the distinction
CONTENTS
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
1. Research in the Real World
2. Theory and Models
3. Qualitative Research
PART II. STRATEGIES FOR DESCRIPTION
4. Measurement
5. Sampling
6. Secondary Data
7. Collecting Primary Data: Surveys and
Observation
8. Making Sense of the Numbers
9. Making Sense of Multivariate Statistics
PART III. STRATEGIES FOR CAUSATION
10. Causation
11. Observational Studies With Control
Variables
12. Randomized Field Experiments
13. Natural and Quasi Experiments
PART IV. APPLICATIONS
14. The Politics, Production, and Ethics of
Research
15. How to Find, Focus, and Present
Research
A password-protected Instructor Teaching Site and open-access Student Study Site at www.sagepub.
com/remler includes chapter outlines, chapter summaries, PowerPoint slides for each chapter, classroom
assignments/exercises, sample syllabi, links to relevant SAGE journal articles, testbank, flashcards, data
sets, and online quizzes.
About the Authors

Dahlia K. Remler is an Associate Professor
at the School of Public Affairs, Baruch College
and the Department of Economics, Graduate
Center, both of the City University of New York.
She is also a Faculty Research Fellow at the
National Bureau of Economic Research. She
has published widely in a variety of areas in
health care policy, including health care cost
containment, information technology in health
care, cigarette tax regressivity, simulation
methods for health insurance take-up, health
care cost growth and health insurance and
health care markets.
Gregg G. Van Ryzin, PhD, is an Associate

Professor in the School of Public Affairs and
Administration, Rutgers University, Newark, NJ.
Dr. Van Ryzins research focuses on the use of
surveys and other social science methods to
measure the performance of government and
nonprofit organizations and to evaluate program
outcomes. He also conducts research on citizen
satisfaction with public services and other public
attitudes toward government.
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Evaluating Research
Research Design
Methodology for People Who Need to Read

Research
Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods

Approaches
Third Edition
Designed for anyone who needs to learn to read

and understand empirical reports in the social
and behavioral sciences, this multidisciplinary
book provides individuals with the knowledge
necessary to understand research without
overwhelming them with information about
how to conduct research. His enthusiasm for
methods present on every page, author Francis C. Dane wants readers to have the
necessary skills to evaluate research and critically use empirical results.
Key Features
Every facet of evaluating research is coveredfrom key terms and concepts to
communicating the final results
The author pairs statistical concepts and procedures with appropriate research
methods
Strong pedagogy such as chapter overviews, summaries, key terms, and
application exercises allows readers to check their understanding of the
material
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. The Scientific Approach
3. Reading a Research Report
4. Conceptual Overview of Statistical
Analyses
5. Sampling
6. Measurement
7. Experimental Research
8. Quasi-Experimental Research
9. Survey Research
10. Field Research
11. Archival Research
12. Evaluation Research
John W. Creswell, University of Nebraska-Lincoln

This is the ONLYbook across the social and
behavioral sciences that enables readers to
compare three approaches to research
qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methodsin
a single research methods text. Written in a
user-friendly manner, Creswells text cuts to the
core of what a reader needs to know to read and design research by showcasing
ideas in a scaffold approach to allow readers to approach ideas from the simple to
the complex.
CONTENTS
PART I. PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS
1. Selection of Research Design
2. Review of the Literature
3. The Use of Theory
4. Writing Strategies and Ethical Considerations
PART II. DESIGNING RESEARCH
5. The Introduction
6. The Purpose Statement
7. Research Questions and Hypotheses
8. Quantitative Methods
9. Qualitative Procedures
10. Mixed Methods Procedures
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6557-6
2009, 296 pages
Instructor Teaching Site, www.sagepub.com/creswell3einstr
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/creswellstudy
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7853-8

2010, 392 pages
New Edition!
Evaluating Research
Articles From Start to
Finish
Third Edition
Ellen R. Girden, Nova University, Miami

Robert Kabacoff
Although research design courses emphasize
designs and appropriate statistical analyses, the
stress is on conducting good designs. As a result,
students may be able to apply their knowledge of originating research. But most
consumers of research read articles based on original research and may be unable
to apply that same knowledge to evaluating the article in terms of soundness of the
design and appropriateness of the statistical analyses. This book fills the void.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Case Studies
3. Narrative Analysis
4. Surveys
5. Correlation Studies
6. Regression Analysis Studies
7. Factor-Analytic Studies
8. Discriminant Analysis Studies

9. Two-Condition Experimental Studies
10. Single Classification Studies
11. Factorial Studies
12. Quasi-Experimental Studies
13. Longitudinal Studies
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7446-2

2011, 416 pages
To review our complete catalog, please visit www.sagepub.com
Also from John W. Creswell...

Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods Research (p. 38)
The Mixed Methods Reader (p. 38)
Textbooks
Francis C. Dane
New!
New!
Textbooks
Case Studies in
Interdisciplinary
Research
Visualizing Social Science Research

Maps, Methods & Meaning
Johannes Wheeldon and Mauri K. Ahlberg
Allen F. Repko, The University of Texas at Arlington

William H. Newell, Miami University of Ohio
Rick Szostak, University of Alberta - Edmonton,
Canada
This text is intended as a stand alone volume
that demonstrates the need for using an explicitly
interdisciplinary approach to problems that span multiple disciplines, applies
interdisciplinary theory and best practices to a particular set of problems, shows
the importance of first creating common ground among conflicting expert views
before performing integration, and produces new understandings of these problems
that are practical, purposeful, and deeply informed by disciplinary expertise.
CONTENTS
1. The Interdisciplinary Research Process
2. Jewish Marriage as an Expression of Israels Conflicted Identity
3. The Metropolitan Problem in Interdisciplinary Perspective
4. Mektoub: When Art Meets History, Philosophy, and Linguistics
5. Integrating Theory-based Insights on the Causes of Suicide Terrorism
6. An Interdisciplinary Analysis of the Causes of Economic Growth
7. Why We Talk: An Interdisciplinary Approach to the Evolutionary Origins of Language.
8. Understanding Human Action: Integrating Meanings, Mechanisms, Causes, and Contexts
9. Integrative Theory in Criminology Applied to the Complex Social Problem of School
Violence
10. Research Integration: A Comparative Knowledge Base
This introductory text presents basic principles of social science research through
maps, graphs, and diagrams. The authors show how concept maps and mind
maps can be used in quantitative, qualitative and mixed methods research, using
student-focused examples and classroom based activities. Chapters explore how
these tools can be used to plan research projects, see analysis strategies, and
assist in the compilation and development of written research papers. The book
integrates theory and practice of concept mapping in a concise and readable
format, with easy to follow examples and activities.
CONTENTS
1. Visualizing Social Science Research
2. Concept Maps and Mind Maps: Theory, Definitions and Utility
3. Using Concept Maps in Quantitative Social Science Research
4. Using Mind Maps in Qualitative Research
5. Using Maps in Mixed Methods Research
6. Putting It All Together: Using Maps and Diagrams to Write Up and Reflect Upon Your
Project
7. Limitations, Considerations and New Directions in Social Science Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-9104-9
August 2011, 192 pages
New!
Glossary of 1001 Commonly Used

Research Terms
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8248-1

February 2011, 368 pages
A Pocket Guide for Social and Behavioral Sciences
Interdisciplinary
Research
Michael J. Holosko, University of Georgia College of Social Work

Bruce A. Thyer, Florida State University College of Social Work
Process and Theory

Allen F. Repko, The University of Texas at Arlington
Interdisciplinary Research: Process and
Theory is the first book that systematically guides
students in how to approach and follow through
on research projects that straddle disciplines.
Featuring an easy-to-follow approach that is
grounded in theory, it is packed with examples of
interdisciplinary research from the natural sciences, the social sciences, and the
humanities.
The text contains over 1000 research and statistical terms, written in jargonfree, easy-to-understand terminology. It will be a quick guide for students who
are taking research methods courses as well as those who are working on
their research projects. This pocket guide is in an ideal supplement to the many
discipline-specific texts on research methods and statistics. The authors are
prominent researchers and have years of writing and research experience. The
book also contains a fully searchable CD.
Paperback with CD ISBN: 978-1-4129-9513-9
June 2011, 200 pages
CONTENTS
1. Defining Interdisciplinary Studies
2. Tracing the Origins of Interdisciplinary Studies
3. Operationalizing Disciplinary Perspective
4. Defining the Elements of Disciplines
5. Explaining the Importance of Integration
6. Beginning the Research Process
7. Identifying Relevant Disciplines
8. Developing Adequacy in Relevant Disciplines
9. Analyzing the Problem and Evaluating Each Insight Into It
10. Identifying Conflicts in Insights
11. Creating Common Ground
12. Integrating Insights and Producing an Interdisciplinary Understanding
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5915-5
2008, 416 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Synthesis
and Meta-Analysis
Harris Cooper, Duke University
Robert F. Belli, University of Nebraska
Offering practical advice on how to conduct a

synthesis of research in the social, behavioral,
and medical sciences, this text is invaluable to
both first-time literature reviewers and experts
looking for lucid discussions of complex issues.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Step 1: Formulating the Problem
3. Step 2: Searching the Literature
4. Step 3: Gathering Information from Studies
5. Step 4: Evaluating the Quality of Studies
6. Step 5: Analyzing and Integrating the Outcomes of Studies
7. Step 6: Interpreting the Evidence
8. Step 7: Presenting the Results
9. Conclusion: Threats to the Validity of Research Synthesis Conclusions
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-3705-4
Frank P. Stafford, University of Michigan

Duane F. Alwin, Pennsylvania State University
The first book to provide a road map to using
both calendar and diary methods in research. An
ideal tool for examining issues related to these
up-and-coming approaches to data collection, the book is also a helpful resource
for readers who interpret literature based on calendar and diary research.
CONTENTS
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
PART II. VARIATIONS IN THE COLLECTION AND APPLICATION OF CALENDAR, DIARY, AND
TIME-USE DATA
PART III. DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENTS OF CALENDAR AND DIARY INSTRUMENTS
PART IV. METHODOLOGICAL ISSUES IN THE RELIABILITY, VALIDITY, AND COLLECTION OF
TIME-BASED DATA
PART V. LOOKING AHEAD
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4063-4
2010, 280 pages
2009, 360 pages
The Tao of Research
Understanding the
Research Process
A Path to Validity
Dana K. Keller and Mary Lou Casadevall-Keller,
Halcyon Research, Inc.
Paul Oliver, University of Huddersfield, U.K.
Dana K. Keller and Mary Lou Casadevall-Keller

provide readers with a highly accessible
introduction to the fundamental concepts of
research methods in this text. They approach
the topic of research through an exploration of
the issues that threaten validity in the process of
knowledge generation.
CONTENTS
1. The Propositions Restrictions
2. Ethical Restrictions
3. Structural (Methodological) Restrictions
4. Functional Restrictions
5. Technical Restrictions
6. Epilogue
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6468-5
2010, 160 pages
This text fills the gap in most research

books,helping students understand the use
of specialist vocabulary and terminology of
educational and social science research.
CONTENTS
1. The Idea of Research
2. The Conceptual Range of a Research Study
3. Introducing Research Questions and Aims
4. Analysing Previous Research
5. The Scientific Method
6. The Research Design
7. Data Collection Methods
8. Questions of Ethics
9. Presenting a Conclusion and Disseminating Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0112-4
2010, 160 pages
Textbooks
A Step-by-Step Approach
Fourth Edition
Calendar and Time

Diary Methods in Life
Course Research
Doing Work Based

Research
New EDITION!
Research Methodology
A Step-by-Step Guide for Beginners
Third Edition
Textbooks
Approaches to Enquiry for Insider-Researchers

Carol Costley, University of Middlesex, U.K.
Ranjit Kumar, University of Western Australia,

Australia
Geoffrey C. Elliott, University of Worcester, U.K.

Paul Gibbs, University of Middlesex, U.K.
With the growth of practitioner research, this book
leads the way by addressing key issues faced
by insider-researchersthose doing research
projects in the organizations and communities in
which they themselves work, or where they are already familiar with the setting.
CONTENTS
1. Key Concepts for the Insider-Researcher
2. Search and Review of Relevant Knowledge and Information
3. Research Ethics and Insider-Researchers
4. Privilege, Power, and Politics in Work Based Research
5. Gaining Access for the Insider-Researcher: Issues, Practices, Audiences, Ethics and
Gratitude
6. Learning Contracts/Agreements and Intellectual Capital
7. Developing a Methodology
8. Collaborative Research
9. A Reflection on Professional Practice
10. Work Based Research in Action
11. The Development of A Research Proposal
12. Preparing and Evaluating Project Outcomes and then Assessing the Learning Achieved
13. Recommendations and Presentations Arising from the Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0678-4
Written specifically for students with no

previous experience of research and research
methodology, this Third Editionintegrates
various quantitative and qualitative methodologies
into eight practice-based-steps, providing lots
of examples throughout to link theory with
practice. The book has been revised and updated to include extended coverage of
qualitative research methods in addition to existing comprehensive coverage of
quantitative methods.
CONTENTS
PART I. STEP ONE: FORMULATING A RESEARCH PROBLEM
PART II. STEP TWO: CONCEPTUALISING A RESEARCH DESIGN
PART III. STEP THREE: CONSTRUCTING AN INSTRUMENT FOR DATA COLLECTION
PART IV. STEP FOUR: SELECTING A SAMPLE
PART V. STEP FIVE: WRITING A RESEARCH PROPOSAL
PART VI. STEP SIX: COLLECTING DATA
PART VII. STEP SEVEN: PROCESSING DATA
PART VIII. STEP EIGHT: WRITING A RESEARCH REPORT
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0301-2
2011, 448 pages
2010, 224 pages
Introducing Research
Methodology
A Beginners Guide to Doing a Research Project
Uwe Flick, Alice-Salomon University of Applied
Sciences, Berlin
In this new book, specifically written for first time
researchers, Uwe Flick focuses on the process of
producing an undergraduate research project. He
gives readers the fundamental data collection and
analysis skills that they need for their first project,
as well as a good understanding of the research process as a whole. The book
covers both quantitative and qualitative methods, and contains real life examples
from the authors own research.
CONTENTS
PART I. ORIENTATION
PART II. PLANNING AND DESIGN
PART III. WORKING WITH DATA
PART IV. REFLECTION AND WRITING
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0781-2
April 2011, 288 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Introduction to Statistics / Quantitative Methods
Integrative Statistics for the Social and Behavioral Sciences

Renee Ha and James Ha, University of Washington
Designed to engage students and lower their fear factor, this concise, user-friendly text prepares students for the real-world applications of statistics.
Students will learn the full range of statistical tests available to them, the skills to choose the appropriate statistical analysis when faced with a dataset,
and the skills to interpret the output from the wide variety of statistical software packages available (including Excel and SPSS).
Key Features
This text has been class-tested with thousands of students and the
results are clear: the use of examples of statistics and statistical
analysis from everyday life and an easy-to-read narrative style engage
students.
Broader coverage is provided than in most concise statistics texts.
Basic descriptive statistics, t-tests, Anova, regression and correlation
are covered, along with non-parametric tests, general linear modeling,
and non-traditional options such as re-sampling statistics. This
breadth and depth of coverage gives students the preparation they
need to be able to use statistics in the real world.
The General Linear Model is explained early in Chapter 7s discussion
of inferential statistics and then explained more fully in Chapter 13
(General Linear Model) allowing students to analyze data that contain
multiple variables collected in different ways.
Choosing the appropriate statistical test is emphasized, including
conceptual material, assumptions of tests, homework exercises, and a
decision flowchart. A Choose-the-appropriate-test Flowchart builds
from simple (Chapter 8) to complex (Chapter 15) improving conceptual
understanding.
Greater focus on the interpretation of results from both Excel and SPSS
and less on hand calculations helps students better learn to interpret
and analyze statistics.
CONTENTS
PART I. DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS
1. Introduction to Statistics
2. Definitions
3. Frequency Distributions and Graphing
4. Central Tendency and Variability
5. The Normal Distribution, Standardized Scores and Probability
Part II. INTRODUCTION TO HYPOTHESIS TESTING
6. Sampling Distribution of the Mean and the Single Sample Z-Statistic
7. Introduction to Inferential Statistics
8. Single Sample Tests
9. Two Sample Tests
PART III. Additional Hypothesis Tests
10. ANOVA
11. Complex ANOVA Designs
12. Correlation and Regression
13. General Linear Model
14. Nonparametric Tests
15. Review
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8744-8
May 2011, 312 pages
Instructor Teaching Site, www.sagepub.com/hainstr
End-of-chapter Homework Exercises provide students with 15-30

problems for both Excel and SPSS.
Author-created ancillary materials, including an Instructor Resource
Guide, PowerPoint, Test Bank, and a Student Study Guide, provide a
seamless connection between text and supplements.
About the Authors

Renee Ha received her Ph.D. in Psychology with a
specialization in animal behavior from the University
of Washington in 1999. She is currently on the faculty
of the U.W. Department of Psychology. She has taught
courses on statistics, introductory psychology, human
development, and various animal behavior courses.
She received a Distinguished Teaching Award from the
Psychology Department in 1999. Her research interests
primarily involve wild birds, including social behavior,
foraging, and conservation.
James Ha has a 1989 Ph.D. in Zoology/Animal Behavior

from Colorado State University and has been on the
faculty of the University of Washington since 1992,
where he is a Research Associate Professor in the
Psychology Department (Animal Behavior Area). He
consults extensively in statistics at U.W. and around
the world, while his own research examines the social
behavior of Old World monkeys and their management
in captivity, Pacific Northwest killer whales, local and
Pacific island crows, and domestic dogs.
Textbooks
New!
New EDITION!
New!
Statistics Alive!
Sampling Essentials
Textbooks
Second Edition
Practical Guidelines for Making Sampling Choices
Wendy J. Steinberg, University at Albany, SUNY

Based on years of first-hand teaching
experience, Wendy J. Steinberg has created
Statistics Alive!, the most user-friendly
statistics text for students in the social and
behavioral sciences, now in its Second Edition.
She believes that this audience can master
basic statisticsespecially the mechanics
and the underlying logic of hypothesis
testingby employing a conceptual, modular approach without dumbing down
the presentation. While this textbook includes must-have topics such as frequency
distributions, hypothesis formation, and inferential statistics and bivariate
regression, it also includes concepts of sampling error, significant differences, and
Type 1 and Type 2 errors throughout.
CONTENTS
PART I. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION: FIRST THINGS FIRST
PART II. TABLES AND GRAPHS: ON DISPLAY
PART III. CENTRAL TENDENCY: BULLS-EYE
PART IV. DISPERSION: FROM HERE TO ETERNITY
PART V. THE NORMAL CURVE AND STANDARD SCORES: WHATS THE SCORE?
PART VI. PROBABILITY: ODDS ARE
PART VII. INFERENTIAL THEORY: OF TRUTH AND RELATIVITY
PART VIII. THE ONE-SAMPLE TEST: ARE THEY FROM OUR PART OF TOWN?
PART IX. THE TWO-SAMPLE TEST: OURS IS BETTER THAN YOURS
PART X. THE MULTISAMPLE TEST: OURS IS BETTER THAN YOURS OR THEIRS
PART XI. POST HOC TESTS: SO WHOS RESPONSIBLE?
PART XII. MORE THAN ONE INDEPENDENT VARIABLE: DOUBLE DUTCH JUMP ROPE
PART XIII. NONPARAMETRIC STATISTICS: WITHOUT FORM OR VOID
PART XIV. EFFECT SIZE AND POWER: HOW MUCH IS ENOUGH?
PART XV. CORRELATION: WHITHER THOU GOEST, I WILL GO
PART XVI. LINEAR PREDICTION: YOURE SO PREDICTABLE
PART XVII. REVIEW: SAY IT AGAIN, SAM
Johnnie Daniel, Howard University

Designed for the nontechnical researcher or generalist, this text provides the
reader with a good understanding of sampling principles. The author gives a
detailed, nontechnical description and guidelines with limited presentation of
formulas to help reach basic research decisions, such as when to choose a sample
vs. census and nonprobability vs. probability sampling as well as how to select
sample size and sample type. Intended for the social and behavioral sciences,
Sampling Essentials is appropriate for undergraduate students, graduate
students, and research practitioners.
CONTENTS
1. Preparing to Make Sampling Choices
2. Choosing Between Taking a Census and Sampling
3. Choosing Between Nonprobability Sampling and Probability Sampling
4. Choosing the Type of Nonprobability Sampling
5. Choosing the Type of Probability Sampling
6. Sampling Based on the Nature of the Sampling Unit and Mixed-Methods Sample Designs
7. Choosing the Size of the Sample
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5221-7
May 2011, 264 pages
Statistical Persuasion
How to Collect, Analyze, and Present Data...
Accurately, Honestly, and Persuasively
Robert W. Pearson, University of Pennsylvania
This textbook focuses attention on the conceptual
understanding of statistics, the signposts of
(in)appropriate research design and quality
measurement, the selection of the right statistical
tools under different conditions, and the
presentation of substantive and technical results.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7950-4

Paperback w/ CD ISBN: 978-1-4129-7951-1
2011, 656 pages
CONTENTS
Student Study Guide ISBN: 978-1-4129-9428-6, 424 pages
1. Introduction
2. Research Design and Data Collection
3. Measurement
4. Data Editing, Transformation, Index Construction, and Weights
5. Statistics as Description
6. Charts and Graphs
7. Percentages and Contingency Tables
8. Samples and Statistical Inference
9. Statistics as Group Differences
10. Statistics as Relationships
11. Regression Analysis
12. Detecting and Correcting Violations of Regression Assumptions
13. Time Series Analysis, Program Assessment, and Forecasting
14. Presenting Persuasive Statistical Analyses
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/steinberg2e
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7496-7

2010, 424 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/pearsonsp/
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291

New Edition!
Also by this author
Fourth Edition
Neil J. Salkind, University of Kansas

Utilizing the personable and clear approach that
made Statistics for People Who (Think They) Hate
Statistics a bestseller, Salkind walks readers
through various statistical procedures, beginning
with correlations and graphical representation of
data and ending with inferential techniques and analysis of variance.
Excel Statistics
A Quick Guide
Designed for users already familiar with basic
computer operations, this book shows readers
how to utilize the features of Microsoft Excel
to answer both simple and complex questions
about data analysis. Part I explores thirty Excel
functions, each one of which is detailed on a twopage spread.Part II of the text contains fifteen
Analysis Toolpak tools, each explained using the
same two-page spread designed used for functions.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. YIPPEE! IM IN STATISTICS

PART II. SIGMA FREUD AND DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS
PART III. TAKING CHANCES FOR FUN AND PROFIT
PART IV. SIGNIFICANTLY DIFFERENT: USING INFERENTIAL STATISTICS
PART V. TEN THINGS YOULL WANT TO KNOW AND REMEMBER
PART I. EXCEL FUNCTIONS

PART II. USING THE ANALYSIS TOOLPAK
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7963-4
2011, 128 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7959-7

2011, 416 pages
Tests & Measurement

for People Who (Think
They) Hate Tests &
Measurement
Student Study Guide ISBN: 978-1-4129-0476-6, 128 pages

Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/salkind4e
|
Also available in an edition
featuring Excel 2007
Bestseller!
Statistics for People

Who (Think They) Hate
Statistics
Excel 2007 Edition
Second Edition
Second Edition

This book provides an overview of the many
different facets of testing including the design
of tests, the use of tests, and some of the basic
social, political, and legal issues that the process of testing involves. This engaging
text introduces students to advanced issues and explains why those topics are
important.
CONTENTS
PART I. IN THE BEGINNING . . .
PART II. THE PSYCHOLOGY OF PSYCHOMETRICS
PART III. THE TAO AND HOW OF TESTING
PART IV. WHAT TO TEST AND HOW TO TEST IT
PART V. ITS NOT ALWAYS AS YOU THINK: ISSUES IN TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7102-7
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-1364-5
Instructor Resources on CD, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7403-5
2006, 432 pages
2010, 424 pages

Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/salkind2study
Instructor Teaching Site, www.sagepub.com/salkind2einstr
About the Author

Neil J. Salkind has been teaching at the University of Kansas for 30 years in the Department of Psychology and Research in Education.
He has taught courses in developmental theories, life-span development, statistics, and research methods and received his PhD in human
development from the University of Maryland. Salkind has published more than 80 professional papers and is the author of several collegelevel textbooks, including Statistics for People Who (Think They) Hate Statistics (now in its Fourth Edition), Excel Statistics, Child
Development, Exploring Research, and Introduction to Theories of Human Development (SAGE 2004). He was editor of Child Development
Abstracts and Bibliography from 1989 through 2002 and is active in the Society for Research in Child Development.
Textbooks
Statistics for People

Who (Think They) Hate
Statistics
10 Introduction to Statistics / Quantitative Methods
Textbooks
A Conceptual Guide to Statistics Using

SPSS
Making Sense of
Statistical Methods in
Social Research
Elliot T. Berkman
Steven P. Reise, University of California, Los Angeles
Keming Yang, Reading University, U.K.
This book helps students develop a conceptual understanding of a variety of

statistical tests by linking the statistics with the computational steps and output
from SPSS. Learning how statistical ideas map onto computation in SPSS will help
students build a better understanding of both. For example, seeing exactly how
the concept of variance is used in SPSS-how it is converted into a number based
on real data, which other concepts it is associated with, and where it appears
in various statistical tests-will not only help students understand how to use
statistical tests in SPSS and how to interpret their output, but will also teach them
about the concept of variance itself.
This book aims to improve students statistical

literacy, with the ultimate goal of turning them
into competent researchers.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Descriptive Statistics
3. Chi-Squared Test
4. Linear Correlation
5. One- and Two Sample T-Tests
6. One-way ANOVA
7. Two- and Higher-way ANOVA
8. Within-subject ANOVA
9. Mixed-model ANOVA
10. MANOVA
11. Regression
12. ANCOVA
13. Factor and Components Analysis
14. Psychometrics
15. Non-parametric Tests
16. Matrix Algebra
17. Appendix on the General Formulation of Custom Contrasts using Syntax
CONTENTS
1. The Position of Statistical Methods in Social Research
2. Introduction
3. The Use of Statistical Methods in Social Research
4. Cases and Variables
5. The Logic of Sampling
6. Estimating and Measuring One Important Thing
7. Studying the Relationship Between Two Variables
8. Linear Regression Models and Their Generalizations
9. Time Matters
10. Statistical Case-Oriented Methods
11. Methods for Analyzing Latent Variables
12. Causal Analysis
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7287-6
2010, 216 pages
Starting Statistics
A Short, Clear Guide
Neil Burdess, Deakin University, Australia
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7406-6
This textaims to help students make sense of the

logic of statistics and to decide how best to use
statistics to analyze their own data.
New edition!
Statistics for Research

With a Guide to SPSS
Third Edition
CONTENTS
George Argyrous
This fully updated edition of Statistics for Research explains statistical concepts
in a straight-forward and accessible way using practical examples from a variety
of disciplines. If youre looking for an easy-to-read, comprehensive introduction to
statistics with a guide to SPSS, this is the book for you!
CONTENTS
PART I. AN INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICAL ANALYSIS
PART II. DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS: GRAPHS AND TABLES
PART III. DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS: NUMERICAL MEASURES
PART IV. INFERENTIAL STATISTICS: TESTS FOR A MEAN
PART V. INFERENTIAL STATISTICS: TESTS FOR FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS
PART VI. INFERENTIAL STATISTICS: OTHER TESTS OF SIGNIFICANCE
PART VII. ADVANCED TOPICS
1. Welcome to Starting Statistics

PART I. MEASUREMENT
2. Introducing Measurement
3. Measuring Numbers
4. Measuring Categories
PART II. STANDARDISATION
5. Introducing Standardisation
6. Standardising Categories
7. Standardising Numbers
PART III. CORRELATIONS
8. Introducing Correlations
9. Correlations Between Categories
10. Correlations Between Numbers

PART IV. SAMPLING AND ESTIMATION
11. Introducing Sampling
12. Estimating Numbers
13. Estimating Categories
PART V. HYPOTHESIS TESTING
14. Introducing Hypothesis Testing
15. Hypotheses About Categories
16. Hypotheses About Numbers
17. Hypotheses About Categories and
Numbers
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0098-1

2010, 200 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0595-5

January 2011, 608 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Intermediate / Advanced Statistics and Quantitative Methods 11
First (and Second)

Steps in Statistics
Intermediate / Advanced Statistics

and Quantitative Methods
Second Edition
Kamala London, University of Toledo
New edition!
Dictionary of Statistics
& Methodology
This textprovides a clear and concise introduction

to the main statistical procedures used in the
social and behavioral sciences. The authors
present the rationale and methods for analyzing
data using engaging examples with an emphasis
on understanding rather than computation.
CONTENTS
1. Univariate Statistics 1: Histograms and Boxplots
2. Univariate Statistics 2: The Mean and Standard Deviation
3. Univariate Statistics 3: Proportions and Bar Charts
4. Sampling and Allocation
5. Inference and Confidence Intervals
6. Hypothesis Testing: t tests and Alternatives
7. Comparing More than Two Groups or More than Two Variables
8. Regression and Correlation
9. Factorial ANOVAs and Multiple Regression
10. Categorical Data Analysis
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-1142-9
2010, 248 pages
A Nontechnical Guide for the Social Sciences

Fourth Edition
W. Paul Vogt
Burke Johnson, University of South Alabama
Written in a clear, readable style with a wide
range of explanations and examples, the
Fourth Edition of this must-have reference
guide for every social scientists bookshelf
has been updated throughout to reflect recent changes in the fields of statistics
and methodology. Packed with new terms, new synonyms, and new graphics,
this best-selling dictionary provides readers with everything they need to read
and understand a research report, including elementary terms and concepts,
methodology and design terms relating to statistical analysis and measurement,
as well as concepts from qualitative research methods and the more qualitative
traditions in research, plus terms from theory and philosophy, and much more.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7109-6
March 2011, 408 pages
Using IBM SPSS Statistics for

Social Statistics and Research
Methods
Models for Social

Networks With
Statistical Applications
Third Edition
William E. Wagner III, California State University, Channel Islands

Ideal as a companion to a statistics or research methods text or as a stand-alone
guide, this text uses images and directions drawn directly from SPSS/PASW
Version 18.0 (for both PC and Mac computers) to teach undergraduate students
how to use the software to manage data or to conduct statistical data analysis.
This fully updated pocket-size guide addresses a wide variety of data analysis
topics, making it useful for the classroom or for independent study, and offers a
number of useful insider tips and hints for students.
CONTENTS
1. Overview
2. Transforming Variables
3. Selecting and Sampling Cases
4. Organization and Presentation of Information
5. Charts and Graphs
6. Cross-Tabulations and Measures of Association for Nominal and Ordinal Variables
7. Correlations and Regression Analysis
8. Logistic Regression Analysis
9. Testing Hypothesis using Means and Crosstabulation
10. Analysis of Variance
11. Editing Output
12. Advanced Applications
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7333-5
2010, 128 pages
Suraj Bandyopadhyay, A. R. Rao, and Bikas K.

Sinha, Indian Statistical Institute, India
Written by a sociologist, a graph theorist, and
a statistician, this title provides social network
analysts and students with a solid statistical
foundation from which to analyze network data.
The authors use real life village-level social
networks to illustrate the practicalities, potentials, and constraints of social network
analysis (SNA). They also offer relevant sampling and inferential aspects of the
techniques while dealing with potentially large networks.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Social Network Analysis
2. Introduction to Digraphs
3. Graph-theoretic and Statistical Models
4. Validation of Statistical Models
5. Graph-theoretic and Statistical Measures and Methods
6. Graph-theoretic Case Studies
7. Sampling and Inference in a Social Network
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-4168-6
2010, 256 pages
Textbooks
Daniel B. Wright, Florida International University
12 Intermediate / Advanced Statistics and Quantitative Methods
Bare-Bones R
An R Companion to
Applied Regression
A Brief Introductory Guide
Textbooks
Thomas P. Hogan, University of Scranton
Second Edition
John Fox, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario,

Canada
This text provides a practical, hands-on

introduction to the elements of R and R
Commander. Assuming no background in
computer programming, author Thomas P. Hogan
guides the novice in using these valuable tools
for statistical analysis. The book walks the reader
through steps for downloading and then works
through examples of basic statistical processing.
CONTENTS
Sanford Weisberg
Intended as a companion to a text or course
on modern applied regression analysis, this
completely rewritten Second Edition provides
an extensive introduction to the R statistical
environment in the context of applied regression.
CONTENTS
PART I. BASE R
PART II. R COMMANDER?
PART III. SOME OTHER STUFF
1. Getting Started With R

2. Reading and Manipulating Data
3. Exploring and Transforming Data
4. Fitting Linear Models
5. Fitting Generalized Linear Models
6. Diagnosing Problems in Linear and Generalized Linear Models
7. Drawing Graphs
8. Writing Programs
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8041-8

2010, 96 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/bare-bonesR
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7514-8
Applied Regression
Analysis and
Generalized Linear
Models
2011, 472 pages
Practical Statistics
A Quick and Easy Guide to IBM SPSS
Statistics, STATA, and Other Statistical Software
Second Edition
John Fox, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario,

Canada
Combining a modern, data-analytic perspective
with a focus on applications in the social
sciences, this text provides in-depth coverage of regression analysis, generalized
linear models, and closely related methods.
CONTENTS
PARTI. DATA CRAFT
PART II. LINEAR MODELS AND LEAST SQUARES
PART III. LINEAR-MODEL DIAGNOSTICS
PART IV. GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS
PART V. EXTENDING LINEAR AND GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS
David Kremelberg, University of Connecticut, Storrs

This book provides readers with step-by-step
guidance on running a wide variety of statistical
analyses in IBM SPSS Statistics, Stata, and
other programs. Author David Kremelberg begins
his user-friendly text by covering charts and
graphs through regression, time-series analysis,
and factor analysis. He provides a background of
the method, then explains how to run these tests in IBM SPSS and Stata. He then
progresses to more advanced kinds of statistics such as HLM and SEM, where
he describes the tests and explains how to run these tests in their appropriate
software including HLM and AMOS.
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-7619-3042-6
CONTENTS
2008, 688 pages
1. An Introduction to Statistics & Quantitative Methods

2. An Introduction to IBM SPSS Statistics and Stata
4. Pearsons r, Chi-square, t-Test, and ANOVA
5. Linear Regression
6. Logistic, Ordered, Multinomial, Negative Binomial, and Poisson Regression
7. Factor Analysis
8. Time-Series Analysis
9. Hierarchical Linear Modeling
10. Structural Equation Modeling
New!
Introducing Survival and Event History

Analysis
Melinda Mills, University of Groningen, The Netherlands
Written for accessibility, this book will appeal to students and researchers who
want to understand the basics of survival and event history analysis and apply
these methods without getting entangled in mathematical and theoretical
technicalities. Inside, readers are offered a blueprint for their entire research
project from data preparation to model selection and diagnostics.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7494-3

2011, 528 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0102-4

January 2011, 288 pages pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Propensity Score
Analysis
Applied Statistics
From Bivariate Through Multivariate Techniques
Rebecca M. Warner, University of New Hampshire
Shenyang Guo and Mark W. Fraser, University of

North Carolina at Chapel Hill
This text provides a clear introduction to widely

used topics in bivariate and multivariate statistics,
including multiple regression, discriminant
analysis, MANOVA, factor analysis, and binary
logistic regression. The approach is applied and
does not require formal mathematics as equations
are accompanied by verbal explanations.
This text provides readers with a systematic

review of the origins, history, and statistical
foundations of PSA and illustrates how it can be
used for solving evaluation problems.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Counterfactual Framework and Assumptions
3. Conventional Methods for Data Balancing
4. Sample Selection and Related Methods
5. Propensity Score Matching and Related Methods
6. Matching Estimators
7. Propensity Score Analysis with Nonparametric Regression
8. Selection Bias and Sensitivity Analysis
9. Concluding Remarks
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-5356-6

2010, 392 pages
Applied Multivariate
Research
CONTENTS
1. Review of Basic Concepts
2. Introduction to SPSS: Basic Statistics, Sampling Error, and Confidence Intervals
3. Statistical Significance Testing
4. Preliminary Data Screening
5. Comparing Group Means Using the Independent Samples t Test
6. One-Way Between-Subjects Analysis of Variance
7. Bivariate Pearson Correlation
8. Alternative Correlation Coefficients
9. Bivariate Regression
10. Adding a Third Variable: Preliminary Exploratory Analyses
11. Multiple Regression With Two Predictor Variables
12. Dummy Predictor Variables and Interaction Terms in Multiple Regression
13. Factorial Analysis of Variance
14. Multiple Regression With More Than Two Predictors
15. Analysis of Covariance
16. Discriminant Analysis
17. Multivariate Analysis of Variance
18. Principal Components and Factor Analysis
19. Reliability, Validity, and Multiple-Item Scales
20. Analysis of Repeated Measures
21. Binary Logistic Regression
Design and Interpretation
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-7619-2772-3
Lawrence S. Meyers, Sacramento State University
2007, 1128 pages
Glenn Gamst, University of La Verne
Instructor Resource Site, www.sagepub.com/warnerstudy
A. J. Guarino, Auburn University

This book provides full coverage of the wide
range of multivariate topics in a conceptual rather
than mathematical approach. The authors gear
the text toward the needs, level of sophistication,
and interest in multivariate methodology of students in these applied programs
who need to focus on design and interpretation rather than the intricacies of
specific computations.
CONTENTS
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
PART II. THE INDEPENDENT VARIABLE VARIATE
PART III. THE DEPENDENT VARIABLE VARIATE
PART IV. THE EMERGENT VARIATE
PART V. MODEL FITTING
Multiple Regression
A Primer
Paul D. Allison, University of Pennsylvania
Presenting topics in the form of questions and
answers, this popular supplemental text offers
a brief introduction on multiple regression on a
conceptual level. The author answers the most
essential questions (such as how to read and
interpret multiple regression tables and how to
critique multiple regression results) in the early
chapters, and then tackles the less important
question (for instance, those arising from multicollinearity) in the later chapters.
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-0412-4
CONTENTS
2006, 760 pages
1. What Is Multiple Regression?

2. How Do I Interpret Multiple Regression Results?
3. What Can Go Wrong with Multiple Regression?
4. How Do I Run a Multiple Regression?
5. How Does Bivariate Regression Work?
6. What Are the Assumptions of Multiple Regression?
7. What Can Be Done about Multicollinearity?
8. How Can Multiple Regression Handle Nonlinear Relationships?
9. How Is Multiple Regression Related to Other Statistical Techniques?
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/amrStudy
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-8533-4

1998, 224 pages
Textbooks
Statistical Methods and Applications
14 Intermediate / Advanced Statistics and Quantitative Methods
Textbooks
About the Author

Andy Field is Professor of Child Psychopathology at the University of Sussex, U.K.. His ability to make
statistics accessible and fun has been recognized with teaching awards from the University of Sussex
(2001), the British Psychological Society (2007) and in 2010 he was awarded a prestigious National
Teaching Fellowship.
Discovering Statistics
Using SPSS
Also available in an
edition featuring SAS
Discovering Statistics
Using SAS
Third Edition
Professor Andy Field, University of Sussex, U.K.

Written in his vivid and entertaining style, Andy
Field provides students with everything they
need to understand, use and report statisticsat
every levelin the Third Edition of Discovering
Statistics Using SPSS. Retaining the strong
pedagogy from previous editions, he makes
statistics meaningful by including playful examples from everyday student life
(among other places), creating a gateway into the often intimidating world of
statistics. In the process, he presents an opportunity for students to ground their
knowledge of statistics through the use of SPSS.
Ancillaries
A password-protected Instructor Teaching Site at www.sagepub.co.uk/field3e
offers a test bank with over 300 multiple choice questions ready to upload to
WebCT, Blackboard or other virtual learning environments, electronic charts and
diagrams for classroom use, and PowerPoint slides written by the author.
A Student Study Site at www.sagepub.co.uk/field3e includes animated SPSS
walk-through videos clearly demonstrating how to use the latest SPSS
modules, self-checking multiple choice questions, datasets for Psychology,
Business & Management and Health Sciences, a flash-card glossary for testing
knowledge of key concepts, and access to support material from SAGE study
skills books.
In addition, students can purchase the text as a bundle that includes a copy of
SPSS Student Version 17.0 (ISBN: 978-1-4129-7752-4).
Andy Field, University of Sussex, U.K.

Jeremy Miles, RAND Corporation
Hot on the heels of Andy Fields best-selling
Discovering Statistics Using SPSS, Third Edition
(2009), the author has teamed up with a coauthor, Jeremy Miles, to adapt this textbook for
SAS using the most up-to-date commands
and programming language available in latest
release 9.2. As with its sister textbook, this book takes the entry level student from
first principles right through to advanced level statistical concepts all the while
grounding knowledge through the use of SAS.
Key Features
Starts with introductory statistical theory and methods and finishes with
advanced level methods the book for any research problem, and any level of
course use
Provides features and characters that support the learning process throughout
the book, from providing tips on how to enter data in SAS properly to testing
knowledge covered in chapters interactively
Employs a combination of invented and real published research datasets for
students. Found on the Companion Website, along with a host of other materials
for lecturers and students (www.sagepub.co.uk/fieldandmilesSAS)
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. WHY IS MY EVIL LECTURER FORCING ME TO LEARN STATISTICS?
PART II. EVERYTHING YOU EVER WANTED TO KNOW ABOUT STATISTICS (WELL, SORT OF)
PART III. THE SPSS ENVIRONMENT
PART IV. EXPLORING DATA WITH GRAPHS
PART V. EXPLORING ASSUMPTIONS
PART VI. CORRELATION
PART VII. REGRESSION
PART VIII. LOGISTIC REGRESSION
PART IX. COMPARING TWO MEANS
PART X. COMPARING SEVERAL MEANS: ANOVA (GLM 1)
PART XI. ANALYSIS OF COVARIANCE, ANCOVA (GLM 2)
PART XII. FACTORIAL ANOVA (GLM 3)
PART XIII. REPEATED MEASURES DESIGNS (GLM 4)
PART XIV. FIXED DESIGN ANOVA (GLM 5)
PART XV. NONPARAMETRIC TESTS
PART XVI. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE (MANOVA)
PART XVII. EXPLORATORY FACTOR ANALYSIS
PART I. WHY IS MY EVIL LECTURER FORCING ME TO LEARN STATISTICS?

PART II. EVERYTHING YOU EVER WANTED TO KNOW ABOUT STATISTICS (WELL, SORT OF)
PART III. THE SAS ENVIRONMENT
PART IV. EXPLORING DATA WITH GRAPHS
PART V. EXPLORING ASSUMPTIONS
PART VI. CORRELATION
PART VII. REGRESSION
PART VIII. LOGISTIC REGRESSION
PART IX. COMPARING TWO MEANS
PART X. COMPARING SEVERAL MEANS: ANOVA (GLM 1)
PART XI. ANALYSIS OF COVARIANCE, ANCOVA (GLM 2)
PART XII. FACTORIAL ANOVA (GLM 3)
PART XIII. REPEATED MEASURES DESIGNS (GLM 4)
PART XIV. FIXED DESIGN ANOVA (GLM 5)
PART XV. NONPARAMETRIC TESTS
PART XVI. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE (MANOVA)
PART XVII. EXPLORATORY FACTOR ANALYSIS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0092-9
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7907-3
2010, 752 pages
2009, 856 pages
|
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Using SPSS Syntax
Modern Regression
Techniques Using R
A Beginners Guide
Jacqueline Collier, University of Nottingham, U.K.
A Practical Guide
Kamala London, University of Toledo
In an engaging and readable format, the authors
describe the most useful statistical techniques
and provide step-by-step instructions, using the
freeware R, to analyze datasets that can be located
on the books webpage via the SAGE homepage.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Syntax for Data Entry
3. Increasing the Usability of the Datafile
4. Amending the Datafile
5. Syntax Involving String Variables
6. Syntax Involving Date and Time Variables
7. Syntax for Manipulating Numeric Variables
8. Syntax for Data Exploration
9. Syntax to Enable the Use of Only Sub-Sections of the Data
10. Syntax for Graphs
11. Syntax for Univariate Analysis
12. Syntax for Linear and Logistic Regression Analysis
13. Understanding Error Messages and Warnings
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2218-0
2010, 216 pages
CONTENTS
1. Very Brief Introduction to R
2. Very Brief Introduction to R
3. The Basic Regression
4. ANOVA as Regression
5. ANCOVA: Lords Paradox and Mediation Analysis
6. Model Selection and Shrinkage
7. Generalized Linear Models (GLMs)
8. Regression Splines and Generalized Additive Models (GAMs)
9. Multilevel Models
10. Robust Regression
11. Conclusion - Make Your Data Cool
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7903-5
2010, 216 pages
Psychometrics
Handbook of Data
Analysis
An Introduction
R. Michael Furr, Wake Forest University
Paperback Edition
Melissa A. Hardy, The Pennsylvania State University

Alan Bryman, University of Leicester, U.K.
No other book provides a better one-stop survey
of the field of data analysis. In 30 specially
commissioned chapters the editors aim to
encourage readers to develop an appreciation of
the range of analytic options available, so they
can choose a research problem and then develop a suitable approach to data
analysis.
CONTENTS
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
PART II. THE GENERAL LINEAR MODEL AND EXTENSIONS
PART III. LONGITUDINAL MODELS
PART IV. NEW DEVELOPMENTS IN MODELING
PART V. ANALYZING QUALITATIVE DATA
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0116-1

2010, 728 pages
Verne R. Bacharach, Appalachian State University

Focusing on a conceptual understanding of
psychometric issues such as validity and
reliability and on purpose rather than procedure,
this book explores the why rather than the how
to. By emphasizing practical significance and
conceptsrather thanmathematical proofs, the
book helps students appreciate how to address
measurement problems and why it is important to address them.
CONTENTS
1. Psychometrics and the Importance of Psychological Measurement
2. Scaling
3. Individual Differences and Correlations
4. Test Dimensionality and Factor Analysis
5. Reliability: Conceptual Basis
6. Empirical Estimates of Reliability
7. Importance of Reliability
8. Validity: The Conceptual Basis
9. Validity: Estimating and Evaluating Convergent and Discriminant Validity
10. Response Biases
11. Test Bias
12. Generalizability Theory
13. Item Response Theory and Rasch Models
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-2760-4
2008, 368 pages
Textbooks
Daniel B. Wright, Florida International University
The book is written in such a way as to enable

you to pick and choose how much you rely on one
method over the other, encouraging you to use
them side-by-side, with a gradual increase in use
of syntax as the knowledge, skills and confidence
develop.
16 Introduction to Qualitative Methods

Bestseller!
Introduction to Qualitative
Methods
Textbooks
Hierarchical Linear
Models
Designing Qualitative
Research
Applications and Data Analysis Methods

Second Edition
Stephen W. Raudenbush, University of Michigan,
Emeritus
Fifth Edition
Anthony S. Bryk, University of Chicago

This is a first-class book dealing with one of
the most important areas of current research in
applied statisticsthe methods described are widely
applicable,the standard of exposition is extremely high.
International Statistical Institute
Popular in the First Edition for its rich, illustrative examples and lucid explanations
of the theory and use of hierarchical linear models (HLM), the book has been
reorganized into four parts with four completely new chapters. The first two
parts, Part I on The Logic of Hierarchical Linear Modeling and Part II on Basic
Applications closely parallel the first nine chapters of the previous edition with
significant expansions and technical clarifications.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE LOGIC OF HIERARCHICAL LINEAR MODELING
PART II. BASIC APPLICATIONS
PART III. ADVANCED APPLICATIONS
PART IV. ESTIMATION THEORY AND COMPUTATIONS
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-7619-1904-9
2002, 512 pages
Catherine Marshall, University of North Carolina at

Chapel Hill
Gretchen B. Rossman, University of
Massachusetts, Amherst
This popular text provides useful and pragmatic
guidance for developing and successfully
defending proposals for qualitative inquiry. The
Fifth Edition addresses the advances and challenges presented by developments
and new applications while providing clear and direct guidance.
Key Features
This version of the book addresses recent thinking on the researcher in the
research setting
This edition includes updated references and Further Reading sections
The end of each chapter features a post script that consists of a dialogue
between a student and an advisor and which illustrates design dilemmas in real
time
The text walks readers through the crafting of a research project from start to
finish in a step-by-step fashion
CONTENTS
Regression Models for

Categorical and
Limited Dependent
Variables
J. Scott Long, Indiana University, Bloomington
1. Introduction
2. Qualitative Research Genres
3. Trustworthiness and Ethics
4. The What of the Study: Building the Conceptual Framework
5. The How of the Study: Building the Research Design
6. Primary Data Collection Methods
7. Secondary and Specialized Methods
8. Managing, Analyzing, and Interpreting Data
9. Planning Time and Resources
10. Revisiting Proposal as Argument and Forecasting Final Representations
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7044-0
Class-tested at two major universities and written

by an award-winning teacher, this text gives
readers unified treatment of the most useful
models for categorical and limited dependent
variables (CLDVs). Throughout the book, the links among models are made explicit,
and common methods of derivation, interpretation, and testing are applied.
2010, 344 pages
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Continuous Outcomes
3. Binary Outcomes
4. Testing and Fit
5. Ordinal Outcomes
6. Nominal Outcomes
7. Limited Outcomes
8. Count Outcomes
9. Conclusions
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-8039-7374-9

1997, 328 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Introduction to Qualitative Methods 17
The Practice of
Qualitative Research
Second Edition
Patricia Leavy, Stonehill College

This engaging student-centered text presents
invaluable insights into the practice of qualitative
and mixed methods research. In this thoroughly
updated edition, authors Sharlene Nagy HesseBiber and Patricia Leavy offer a mix of theoretical
approaches for qualitative methods practice that ranges from the interpretive
tradition to critical perspectives.
Key Features
NEW! Chapters on the case study approach and how to write up qualitative
research
NEW! Enhanced coverage of ethics woven throughout each chapter
NEW! Exemplary research studies designed to engage students in hands-on
research practice
In-depth example, carried throughout the chapter, so that students have a
clear understanding of how each concept explained can be used during actual
qualitative practice.
Two types of exercise sets: to give students the opportunity to review the
chapters concepts and out-of-class exercises that can provide opportunities for
students to do actual research
Learning in the Field

An Introduction to Qualitative Research
Third Edition
Gretchen B. Rossman and Sharon F. Rallis, University of Massachusetts, Amherst
The popular text that helped readers better understand and practice qualitative
research has been completely updated and revised. To help readers better visualize
and grasp the concepts, issues, and complexities of qualitative inquiry, the authors
introduce each chapter with discussions among three charactersstudents
whose research projects demonstrate the challenges and excitement of qualitative
research.
CONTENTS
1. Qualitative Research as Learning
2. The Researcher as Learner
3. The Researcher as Competent and Ethical
4. Major Qualitative Research Genres
5. Planning the Research
6. Entering the Field
7. Gathering Data in the Field
8. Our Characters Data
9. Issues That Arise in the Field
10. Analyzing and Interpreting Data
11. Our Characters Analyses
12. Presenting the Learnings
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8048-7
July 2011, 420 pages
CONTENTS
PART I. QUALITATIVE PRACTICE
1. An Invitation to Qualitative Research
2. Approaches to Qualitative Research
3. Designing Qualitative Approaches to Research
4. Ethics of Social Research
PART II. METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION
5. In-Depth Interview
6. Oral History
7. Focus Group Interviews
8. Ethnography
9. Content Analysis and Unobtrusive Methods
10. Case Study
11. Mixed Methods
PART III. ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION
12. Analysis and Interpretation
13. The Writing and Representation of Qualitative Research
14. The Research Nexus
Third Edition
David Silverman, Goldsmiths College, University of

London, U.K.
This book assembles a team of internationallyrenowned researchers who share a commitment
to rigorous qualitative research concerned
with how social worlds are constructed. The
contributors reflect on the analysis of various
types of qualtiative data observations,
interviews, focus groups, documents, talk, visual
data and the internet using helpful case-studies.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7457-8
CONTENTS
2010, 424 pages
PART I. INTRODUCTION
PART II. OBSERVATION
PART III. TEXTS
PART IV. INTERVIEWS AND FOCUS GROUPS
PART V. TALK
PART VI. VISUAL DATA
PART VII. QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
PART VIII. THE WIDER COMMUNITY
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/hessebiber2e
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0417-0

2011, 464 pages
Textbooks
Sharlene Nagy Hesse-Biber, Boston College
NEW EDITION!
A Practical Guide
Engaging
Crystallization in
Melanie Birks, Monash University, Australia
An Introduction
Jane Mills, Deputy Head of School Cairns Campus,

James Cook University, Australia
Laura L. Ellingson, Santa Clara University
New!
Textbooks
Grounded Theory
Unlike most existing books in this area, which are

written from a particular philosophical standpoint,
this text provides a comprehensive description
of the strategies and techniques employed in
this methodology. Birks and Mills accessible and
highly-readable text is driven by practical case
examples throughout to help the reader get to grips with the process of doing
grounded theory analysis for themselves. The book deploys a variety of educational
resources to guide readers through both the principles and the application of
grounded theory, making this an ideal starter text for those new to the approach.
The first how-to book to both explain and

demonstrate crystallization methodology,
this text provides a framework for blending
grounded theory and other social scientific
analyses with creative representations of data,
such as narratives, poetry, and film. Author Laura L. Ellingson explores relevant
epistemological questions that arise when crossing methodological boundaries,
provides detailed steps for design and planning, offers guidelines for improving
both social scientific and creative/artistic writing, and suggests strategies for
targeting publication outlets for multigenre representations.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Crystallization
2. Ethics and Epistemology: Assumptions Underlying Crystallization
3. Illuminating Options for Analysis and Representation Across the Continuum
4. Strategies for Design: Putting Crystallization Into Practice
5. Bringing It All Together: Integrated Crystallization
6. All Apart: Dendritic Crystallization
7. Writing Across the Continuum
8. Publishing and Promoting Crystallization
CONTENTS
1. Essentials of Grounded Theory
2. Planning a Grounded Theory Study
3. Quality Processes in Grounded Theory Research
4. Positioning the Researcher in a Grounded Theory Study
5. Data Generation and Collection
6. Data Analysis in Grounded Theory
7. Theoretical Integration
8. Presenting a Grounded Theory
9. Evaluation and Application of Grounded Theory
10. Situating Grounded Theory in the Context of Current Debate
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5907-0

2009, 240 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0993-8

New!
A Realist Approach to Qualitative

Research
Recording Culture
Audio Documentary and the Ethnographic
Experience
Joseph Maxwell, George Mason University
Daniel Makagon, DePaul University
Gretchen B. Rossman and Sharon F. Rallis, University of Massachusetts Amherst
Mark Neumann, Northern Arizona University

This volume not only explores the methodological
issues related to audio documentary, it also
provides readers with practical guidance on how
to produce their own audio projects.
CONTENTS
1. Writing Culture and Recording Culture
2. Sonic Compositions
3. The Citizen Storyteller
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5493-8
Are cultural and material phenomena equally real? How can one study the
relationships between cultural constructions, social behavior and material
conditions and draw a valid conclusion from the data? In contrast to interpretive or
constructivist positions, realism supports the insights of critical theory in social and
educational research regarding the relationships between actors perspectives and
their actual situations, while avoiding the epistemological objectivism associated
with positivism and some forms of post-positivist empiricism. This book will explain
how readers can use realism to conceptualize and conduct their qualitative study
to get results with greater validity.
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2923-9
2009, 104 pages

Companion Web Site, recordingculture.org
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Collecting and
Interpreting Qualitative
Materials
The Landscape of
Third Edition
Norman K. Denzin, University of Illinois, UrbanaChampaign

Yvonna S. Lincoln, Texas A&M University
In its Third Edition, this edited text introduces the
researcher to basic methods of gathering, analyzing
and interpreting qualitative empirical materials.
CONTENTS
PART I. METHODS OF COLLECTING AND ANALYZING EMPIRICAL MATERIALS
PART II. THE ART AND PRACTICES OF INTERPRETATION, EVALUATION, AND
REPRESENTATION
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5757-1
2008, 712 pages

This edited book puts the field of qualitative
research in context. Part I provides background
on the field, Part II isolates the major historical
and contemporary paradigms now structuring
and influencing qualitative research (chapters move from competing paradigms
such as positivist, post positivist, constructivist, and critical theory) to specific
interpretive perspectives, and finally Part III considers the future of qualitative
research.
CONTENTS
PART I. LOCATING THE FIELD
PART II. PARADIGMS AND PERSPECTIVES IN CONTENTION
PART III. THE FUTURE OF QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5758-8
Strategies of
Qualitative Inquiry
Third Edition
2008, 632 pages
Also from Norman K. Denzin and Yvonna S. Lincoln...

The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Research (p. 75)
Read about Denzin and Lincoln on p. 75.

In this edited text, readers are presented with
the major tacticshistorically, the research
methodsthat researchers can utilize in
conducting concrete qualitative studies. The
chapter topics range from performance ethnography to case studies, issues
of ethnographic representation, grounded theory strategies, testimonies,
participatory action research, and clinical research.
Writing Up Qualitative
Research
Third Edition
Harry F. Wolcott, University of Oregon
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: The Discipline and Practice of Qualitative Research
2. The Practice and Politics of Funded Qualitative Research
3. Performance Ethnography: The Reenacting and Inciting of Culture
4. Qualitative Case Studies
5. The Observation of Participation and the Emergence of Public Ethnography
6. Interpretive Practice and Social Action
7. Grounded Theory in the 21st Century: Applications for Advancing Social Justice Studies
8. Critical Ethnography as Street Performance: Reflections of Home, Race, Murder, and
Justice
9. Testimonio, Subalternity, and Narrative Authority
10. Participatory Action Research: Communicative Action and the Public Sphere
11. Clinical Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5756-4
2008, 440 pages
In this new edition, author Harry Wolcott continues

to offer time-tested suggestions on every aspect
of the process, while incorporating new features
such as guidelines on how and where to use
theory.
CONTENTS
1. On Your Mark . . .
2. Get Going
3. Keep Going
4. Linking Up
5. Tightening Up
6. Finishing Up
7. Getting Published
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7011-2
2009, 208 pages
Textbooks
Third Edition
Textbooks
Basics of Qualitative
Research
Foundations of
Techniques and Procedures for Developing

Grounded Theory
Third Edition
Interpretive and Critical Approaches

Jerry W. Willis
Juliet Corbin, International Institute for Qualitative

Methodology
Anselm Strauss
The Third Edition of the best-seller continues to
offer immensely practical advice and technical
expertise to aid researchers in making sense of their collected data. Full of
definitions and illustrative examples, this book concludes with chapters that
present criteria for evaluating a study, as well as responses to common questions
posed by students of qualitative research.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Practical Considerations
3. Prelude to Analysis
4. Strategies for Qualitative Data Analysis
5. Introduction to Context, Process and Theoretical Integration
6. Memos and Diagrams
7. Theoretical Sampling
8. Analyzing Data for Concepts
9. Elaborating the Analysis
10. Analyzing Data for Context
11. Bringing Process into the Analysis
12. Integrating Around a Concept
13. Writing Theses, Monographs, and Giving Talks
14. Criterion for Evaluation
15. Student Questions and Answers
This book introduces key theoretical and

epistemological concepts replete with historical
and current real-world examples. Author Jerry W.
Willis provides an invaluable resource to guide
the critical and qualitative inquiry process written
in an accessible and non-intimidating style that
brings these otherwise difficult concepts to life.
CONTENTS
1. World Views, Paradigms, and the Practice of Social Science Research
2. History and Context of Paradigm Development
3. Foundational Issues: Postpositivist and Critical Perspectives
4. History and Foundations of Interpretivist Research
5. Frameworks for Qualitative Research
6. General Guidelines for Qualitative Research
7. Methods of Qualitative Research
8. Approaches to Data Analysis and Interpretation
9. 21st Century Social Science: Peering into the Future
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2741-3
2007, 392 pages
New!
Arts Based Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-0644-9
Tom Barone, Arizona State University
2008, 400 pages
Elliot W. Eisner, Stanford University
The SAGE Dictionary of

Qualitative Inquiry
Third Edition
Thomas A. Schwandt, University of Illinois at

Urbana-Champaign
Intended as a guide to the terms and phrases
that partially shape the origins, purpose, logic,
meaning, and methods of the practices known
as qualitative inquiry, students and teachers will
find this Third Edition a very useful resource for
navigating various perspectives on qualitative inquiry and as a starting point for
launching their own investigations into the issues covered in this guide.
Designed to be used as both a class text and a resource for researchers and
practitioners, Arts Based Research provides a framework for those who seek to
broaden the domain of qualitative inquiry in the social sciences by incorporating
the arts as forms that represent human knowing.
CONTENTS
1. What is and What is Not Arts Based Research?
2. Why Do Arts-Based Research?
3. Yes, But is it Research?
4. Who Can Do Arts Based Research?
5. Who Can Be the Audience for Arts-Based Research?
6. Can Arts Based Research Be Fictive?
7. How Might Arts Based Research Be Both Political and Ethical?
8. What are Some Criteria for Assessing Arts Based Research?
9. Is there a Place for Theory in Arts Based Research?
10. What Are Some Fundamental Ideas from Arts-Based Research?
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8247-4
CONTENTS
1. Conventions
2. Readers Guide
3. Preface
4. About the Author
5. List of Terms
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-0927-3

2007, 376 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Handling Qualitative
Data
Choosing Among Five Approaches

Second Edition
A Practical Guide
Second Edition
John W. Creswell, University of Nebraska-Lincoln
Lyn Richards, Royal Melbourne Institute of

Technology University, Australia
Like the best-selling First Edition, this new version

explores the philosophical underpinnings, history,
and key elements of each of five qualitative inquiry
approaches: narrative research, phenomenology,
grounded theory, ethnography, and case study. Using
an accessible and engaging writing style, Creswell compares theoretical frameworks,
ways to employ standards of quality, and strategies for writing introductions to studies,
collecting data, analyzing data, writing a narrative, and verifying results.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Philosophical, Paradigmatic, and Interpretive Frameworks
3. Designing a Qualitative Study
4. Five Qualitative Approaches to Inquiry
5. Five Different Qualitative Studies
7. Data Collection
8. Data Analysis and Representation
9. Writing a Qualitative Study
10. Standards of Validation and Evaluation
11. Turning the Story and Conclusions
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-1607-3
2007, 416 pages
This new edition of Lyn Richards popular book

provides an accessible introduction to qualitative
research for students and practitioners. The book
helps novice researchers to acquire the skills and
understanding of methodological issues that they need as they work through their
research project.
CONTENTS
PART I. SETTING UP
1. Setting Up Your Project
2. Making Qualitative Data
3. Data Records
PART II. WORKING WITH THE DATA
4. Up From The Data
5. Coding
6. Handling Ideas
PART III. MAKING SENSE OF YOUR DATA
7. What Are You Aiming For?
8. Searching The Data
9. Seeing A Whole
10. Telling It
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0218-2
2010, 232 pages
New!
Methods
Monique Hennink, Emory University
Working with
Qualitative Data
Inge Hutter and Ajay Bailey, University of

Groningen, The Netherlands
William Gibson and Andrew Brown, University of

London, U.K.
This comprehensive text takes a practical

approach that mirrors the path that students follow
in conducting a research project. The book is based
on the authors highly successful multidisciplinary
qualitative methods workshops, which have been
conducted for over a decade. They introduce a qualitative research cycle that
leads students through the selection of appropriate methods, the collection of data,
and the transformation of findings into a finished project. The book provides a clear
explanation of the nature of qualitative research and its key concepts.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to the Book
2. The Nature of Qualitative Research
PART I. THE DESIGN CYCLE
3. The Design Cycle
4. Ethical Issues in Qualitative Research
PART II. THE ETHNOGRAPHIC CYCLE
5. Participant Recruitment
6. In-Depth Interviews
7. Focus Group Discussions
8. Observation
PART III. THE ANALYTIC CYCLE
9. Data Preparation and Developing Codes
10. Textual Data Analysis
11. Writing Qualitative Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2226-5
2011, 300 pages
In this highly accessible text,Gibsonand Brown

offer practical advice on introducing an analytical
component to every stage of doing research, from
designing a project through the write-up.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Qualitative Data Analysis in Context
2. Theory, Grounded Theory and Analysis
3. Engaging with Literature
4. Research Design
5. Using Documents in Research
6. Generating Data through Questions and Observation
7. Transcribing and Representing Data
8. Identifying Themes, Codes and Hypotheses
9. Images and Texts
10. Video and Audio Data
11. Using Technology
12. Writing and Presenting Analysis
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4572-1
2010, 232 pages
Textbooks
Qualitative Inquiry and

Research Design
22 Introduction to Qualitative Methods | Intermediate / Advanced Qualitative Methods
Textbooks
The Coding Manual for

Qualitative
Researchers
Johnny Saldana, Arizona State University
This text provides, in one volume, an in-depth
guide to each of the multiple approaches to
coding qualitative researchingranging in
complexity from beginner to advanced leveland
covering everything from interview transcripts to
field notes.
CONTENTS
PART I. AN INTRODUCTION TO CODES AND CODING
PART II. WRITING ANALYTIC MEMOS
PART III. FIRST CYCLE CODING METHODS
PART IV. SECOND CYCLE CODING METHODS
PART V. POST-CODING AND PRE-WRITING
New!
Indigenous Research Methodologies

Bagele Chilisa, University of Botswana
Following the increasing emphasis in the classroom and in the field to sensitize
researchers and students to diverse epistemologies, methods, and methodologies especially those of women, minority groups, former colonized societies, indigenous
people, historically oppressed communities, and people with disabilities, author
Bagele Chilisa has written the first research methods textbook that situates
research in a larger, historical, cultural, and global context with case studies
from around the globe to make very visible the specific methodologies that are
commensurate with the transformative paradigm of research and the historical and
cultural traditions of indigenous peoples.
CONTENTS
1. Situating Knowledge Systems
2. Discovery and Recovery: Reading and Conducting Research Responsibly
3. Whose Reality Counts? Research Methods in Question
4. Postcolonial Indigenous Paradigms
5. Community Centred Methods
6. culturally Responsive Indigenous Research Methodologies
7. Indigenous Interview Strategies
8. Participatory-Transformative Indigenous Research Methods
9. Postcolonial Indigenous Feminist Research Methodologies
10. Building Partnerships to Promote a Mosaic of Research Knowledge
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7549-5

2010, 240 pages
An Introduction to
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5882-0

May 2011, 288 pages
Fourth Edition

Sciences, Berlin, Germany
Guidingstudents step-by-step through the
qualitative research process, this classic text
provides unmatched coverage of the full range
of qualitative methods and approaches available,
including a new chapter on Grounded Theory.
Intermediate / Advanced
Qualitative Methods
New!
Doing Visual Research
CONTENTS
PART I. FRAMEWORK
PART II. FROM THEORY TO TEXT
PART III. RESEARCH DESIGN
PART IV. VERBAL DATA
PART V. OBSERVATION AND MEDIATED DATA
PART VI. FROM TEXT TO THEORY
PART VII. GROUNDING AND WRITING QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
PART VIII. QUALITATIVE RESEARCH: INTEGRATION AND OUTLOOK
Claudia Mitchell, McGill University

Visual methods are becoming more popular
across many subject areas in the social sciences,
since the technology necessary is now so
accessible. Mitchell is a known name in visual
methods, and this book is a good introduction for
anyone new to using visual methods.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7324-8

2010, 528 pages
CONTENTS
PART I. GETTING STARTED
1. Introduction: Why Visual Studies for Social Change?
2. Ethical Issues in Visual Research
PART II. VISUAL METHODS FOR SOCIAL CHANGE: TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES
3. Photographs and Memory Work Studies
4. Seeing for Ourselves through Photo-Voice
5. Participatory Video
6. Drawing as a Participatory Visual Methodology
7. Objects-in-Inquiry: Things, Artifacts, Objects, Documents and Texts
PART III. ON INTERPRETING AND USING IMAGES
8. Working with Images/Writing about Images
9. The Politics of Display: Aesthetics and Technicalities
10. Can Visual Methods Make a Difference? From Practice to Policy
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4583-7
May 2011, 256 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Intermediate / Advanced Qualitative Methods 23
Design
New!
Applied Thematic Analysis

This book provides step-by-step instructions on how to analyze text generated
from in-depth interviews and focus groups. The book is primarily designed for
research studies with an applied focus, but is also useful for theoretically oriented
qualitative research. The book covers all aspects of the qualitative data analysis
process including planning, data preparation, identification of themes, codebook
development and code application, reliability and inter-coder agreement, data
reduction techniques, comparative techniques, integration with quantitative data,
and software considerations.
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-7167-6
Joseph A. Maxwell, George Mason University

This invaluable book presents an innovative
approach to the components of design and how
they interact with each other. Author Joseph
Maxwell presents a clear strategy for creating
coherent and workable relationships among these
design components and highlights key design issues.
CONTENTS
Reflexive Methodology
1. A Model for Qualitative Research Design

2. Goals: Why Are You Doing This Study?
3. Conceptual Framework: What Do You Think Is Going On?
4. Research Questions: What Do You Want to Understand?
5. Methods: What Will You Actually Do?
6. Validity: How Might You Be Wrong?
7. Research Proposals: Presenting and Justifying a Qualitative Study
New Vistas for Qualitative Research

Second Edition
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2608-5
Mats Alvesson, University of Lund, Sweden
2005, 420 pages
Kaj Skldberg, Stockholm School of Business,

Sweden
In this book, the authors clarify the links between
techniques used in empirical research and
different research traditions, giving a theoretically
informed approach to qualitative research.
This updated Second Edition includes a new
chapter on positivism, social constructionism, and critical realism, and offers new
conclusions on the applications of methodology.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: The Intellectualization of Method
2. (Post-)Positivism, Social Constructionism, Critical Realism: Three Reference Points in the
Philosophy of Science
3. Data-Oriented Methods: Empiricist Techniques and Procedures
4. Hermeneutics: Interpretation and Insight
5. Critical Theory: The Political and Ideological Dimension
6. Poststructuralism and Postmodernism: Destabilizing Subject and Text
7. Language/Gender/Power: Discourse Analysis, Feminism and Genealogy
8. On Reflexive Interpretation: The Play of Interpretive Levels
9. Applications of Reflexive Methodology: Strategies, Criteria, Varieties
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0112-3
2010, 360 pages
New edition!
Stretching Exercises
for Qualitative
Researchers
Third Edition
Valerie J. Janesick, University of South Florida

In this updated version of her innovative and
distinctive book, Stretching Exercises for
Qualitative Researchers, author Valerie J.
Janesick extends her dance and yoga metaphors
to strengthen her argument that tapping
into ones artistic sidethe side that is more creative and less inhibitedis
fundamental to realizing ones potential as a qualitative researcher. With a focus
on developing habits of mind through intuition and creativity, this Third Edition
provides a series of exercises that are both imaginative and immensely practical
in helping students to see the artistic side of research and reflection. Thoroughly
classroom-tested, these exercises demystify the research process and help
researchers become more active observers, interviewers, and learners as they
develop and critique their habits of observation, questioning, creativity, writing, and
analysis.
CONTENTS
1. Qualitative Research and Habits of Mind
2. The Observation and Writing Habit
3. Advancing the Observation and Reflection Habit
4. The Interviewing and writing habit
5. The Creative Habit
6. The Analysis and Writing Habit
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8045-6
2011, 280 pages
Textbooks
An Interactive Approach
Second Edition
Greg Guest and Katherine MacQueen
24 Intermediate / Advanced Qualitative Methods
Wordcraft: Applied
Qualitative Data
Analysis (QDA)
New!
Textbooks
Cartographies of
Knowledge
Tools for Public and Voluntary Social Services
Exploring Qualitative Epistemologies
Vincent E. Faherty, University of Southern Maine
Celine-Marie Pascale, American University

Using clear language and concrete examples,
this text examines theoretical and historical
foundations that shape the premise and logic of
qualitative social research. It analyzes qualitative
methodology and methods in relationship to
issues of agency, subjectivity, and experience.
CONTENTS
This text helps students and social service

personnel better evaluate agency programs using
the various qualitative documents (such as case
intake forms and case progress notes) already at
their disposal. Author Vincent E. Faherty shows
readers not just what to do with qualitative data, but also how they should interpret
the meanings.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Philosophical Roots of Research Methodologies
3. Analytic Induction
4. Symbolic Interaction
5. Ethnomethodology
6. Social Research: Drawing New Maps
PART I. THEORY AND PRACTICE

1. Welcome to the Terminological Jungle With Figures
2. Subjectivity, Objectivity, and Ethics in Qualitative Data Analysis (QDA) With Figures
3. Qualitative Data Analysis: By Computer or by Hand? With Figures
4. A Written Model of QDA, With Figures
5. Applying the QDA Model: Coding, Memoing, Concept Mapping, and Theme Development,
With Figures
6. Case Illustrations: Intensive Interviewing
7. Case Illustrations: Participant Observation
8. Case Illustrations: Focus Groups
9. Case Illustrations: Mixed Strategies of Data Collection
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5496-9

2011, 192 pages
Qualitative GIS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6763-1

2010, 232 pages
A Mixed Methods Approach

Meghan Cope, University of Vermont
Sarah Elwood, University of Washington
Analyzing Qualitative
Data
This text is one of the few, if any, books that takes

a mixed methods approach of qualitative methods
and GIS a growing approach within geography.
The authors offera comprehensive rather than
a how-to account of specific techniques of this
emerging approach.
Systematic Approaches
H. Russell Bernard, University of Florida
Gery W. Ryan, RAND Corporation
Utilizing real-life social science examples, this
book walks upper-division undergraduate to
graduate students through the steps of collecting
and analyzing qualitative data.
CONTENTS
PART I. REPRESENTATIONS
1. Metadata as a Site for Imbuing GIS with Qualitative Information
2. Multiple Representations, Significations, and Epistemologies in Community-Based GIS
3. Geographic Information Technologies, Local Knowledge, and Change
PART II. ANALYTICAL INTERVENTIONS AND INNOVATIONS
4. Grounded Visualization and Scale: A Recursive Analysis of Community Spaces
5. Computer-Aided Qualitative GIS: A Software-Level Integration of Qualitative Research
and GIS
PART III. CONCEPTUAL ENGAGEMENTS
6. Affective Visual Geographies and GIScience
7. Towards a Genealogy of Qualitative GIS
8. Conclusion: For Qualitative GIS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4566-0
2010, 192 pages
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Text: Qualitative Data Analysis
2. Collecting Data
3. Finding Themes
4. Codebooks and Coding
5. Introduction to Data Analysis
6. Conceptual Models
7. First Steps in Analysis: Comparing Attributes of Variables
8. Cultural Domain Analysis: Free Lists, Judged Similarities, and Taxonomies
9. KWIC Analysis, Word Counts, and Semantic Network Analysis
10. Discourse Analysis: Conversation and Performance
11. Narrative Analysis
12. Grounded Theory
13. Content Analysis
14. Schema Analysis
15. Analytic Induction and Qualitative Comparative Analysis
16. Ethnographic Decision Models
17. Sampling
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2490-6
2010, 480 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Qualitative Data
Analysis
An Expanded Sourcebook
Second Edition
Second Edition
Lyn Richards, Royal Melbourne Institute of

Technology University, Australia
Janice M. Morse, University of Utah, Salt Lake City
Using a clear, conversational, and friendly
approach, the Second Edition of this text offers
novice researchers a readable, practical readme
guide to get them started in qualitative inquiry.
Matthew B. Miles and A. Michael Huberman

In this bestselling text, the authors describe each
method of data display and analysis in detail,
with practical suggestions for adaptation and use.
Using examples from a host of social science and
professional disciplines and stressing a hands-on,
practical approach, this book remains a seminal treatment of this topic.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. Why Readme First?
2. Thinking Research
3. The Integrity of Qualitative Research
4. Selecting a Method
5. Grounded Theory
6. Qualitative Research Design
7. Inside Analysis
8. Making Data
9. Coding
10. Abstracting
11. Getting It Right
12. On Getting It Right and Knowing If Its Wrong
13. Writing It Up
14. Beginning Your Project
15. Groundwork for Beginning Your Project
16. Getting Started
1. Focusing and Bounding the Collection of Data

2. Early Steps in Analysis
3. Within-Case Displays
4. Within-Case Displays
5. Cross-Case Displays
6. Cross-Case Displays
7. Matrix Displays
8. Making Good Sense
9. Ethical Issues in Analysis
10. Producing Reports
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8039-5540-0
1994, 352 pages
Doing Qualitative
Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2743-7

2007, 304 pages
A Comprehensive Guide
David Silverman, Goldsmiths College, University of
London, U.K.
and Theory
Development
Amir Marvasti, Penn State Altoona

Chock-full of useful pedagogy, Doing Qualitative
Research contains interdisciplinary and realworld examples and student diaries that speak to
those readers undertaking new research projects
Mystery as Method
Dan Karreman, Lund University, Sweden
Empirical data is one of the cornerstones of
knowledge in the social sciences. And yet, the
researcher often takes it for granted, reserving
his or her imaginative faculties for finding a theory that fits the data. This revealing
account of the theory-data relationship calls this faith in data into question and
establishes a reflexive framework and vocabulary to explore the creative, political
and philosophical elements of data production.
CONTENTS
1. The Use of Empirical Material for Theory Development
2. The Role of Constructions and Language in Empirical Research
3. Key Methodological Principles for Detecting Mysteries
4. A Methodology of Sorts for Theorizing from Empirical Material
5. Illustrating the Development and Resolution of Mysteries
6. Research Guided or Assisted by Mystery?
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8570-2324-7
and qualitative dissertations.

CONTENTS
PART II. STARTING OUT
PART III. COLLECTING AND ANALYSING YOUR DATA
PART IV. WRITING UP
PART V. GETTING SUPPORT
PART VI. REVIEW
PART VII. THE AFTERMATH
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2639-3
2008, 576 pages
Textbooks
README FIRST for a

Users Guide to
Qualitative Methods
Textbooks
26 Intermediate / Advanced Qualitative Methods
Video in Qualitative
Research
Analysis in Qualitative
Research
Christian Heath, Jon Hindmarsh, and Paul Luff,

Kings College London, U.K.
Hennie R. Boeije, University of Utrecht, The

Netherlands
Thisis the first book to provide practical guidance

for students and academics on how to use
video in qualitative research, how to address the
problems and issues that arise in undertaking
video-based field studies, and how to subject
video recordings to detailed scrutiny and analysis.
The authors consider the ethical and practical issues that arise in recording
and gathering data as well as how video enables new and distinctive ways of
presenting insights, observations, and findings to both academic and practitioner
audiences.
This book helps readers prepare and successfully

finish qualitative data analysis. It sets out an easy
to grasp modelthe spiral of analysisthat
shows how to break up the data with coding
and how to subsequently integrate the data to
yield a meaningful picture of the phenomenon
under study. It offers useful devices to guide the reader through the last difficult
integrating phase of qualitative analysis including diagramming, memoing, thinking
aloud, and using ones feelings.
CONTENTS
PART I. INTRODUCTION TO QUALITATIVE RESEARCH

PART II. RESEARCH DESIGN
PART III. ETHICS IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
PART IV. DATA COLLECTION
PART V. PRINCIPLES OF QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS
PART VI. DOING QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS
PART VII. INTEGRATIVE PROCEDURES
PART VIII. FINDINGS
PART IX. QUALITY OF THE RESEARCH
PART X. WRITING THE RESEARCH REPORT
1. Video, Analysis and the Social Sciences

2. Access, Ethics and Project Planning
3. Collecting Audio-Visual Data
4. Analysing Video: Developing Preliminary Observations
5. Matters Of Context: Objects, Participation and Institutional Practice
6. Preparing Presentations and Publications
7. Implications, Applications and New Developments
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2943-1
2010, 184 pages
CONTENTS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7007-0

2010, 240 pages
Qualitative Inquiry
Thematic, Narrative and Arts-Informed
Perspectives
Interpretative
Phenomenological
Analysis
Lynn Butler-Kisber, McGill University, Canada

This book examines theory, method and
interpretation in a way that is meaningful
to students and new researchers, as well
as discussing newer, more avant-garde,
developments in qualitative research in artsinformed inquiry.
Theory, Method and Research

Jonathan A. Smith, University of London, Birkbeck
College, U.K.
Paul Flowers, Glasgow Caledonian University, U.K.
Michael Larkin, University of Birmingham, U.K.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Issues in Qualitative Inquiry
3. Constant Comparison Inquiry
4. Phenomenological Inquiry
5. Narrative Inquiry
6. Poetic Inquiry
7. Collage Inquiry
8. Photographic Inquiry
9. Performative Inquiry
10. Future Directions
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4820-3
2010, 168 pages
This book presents a comprehensive guide to

interpretative phenomenological analysis (IPA) which is an increasingly popular
approach to qualitative inquiry taught to undergraduate and postgraduate students
today.
CONTENTS
PART I. DOING IPA: THEORY AND METHOD
1. The Theoretical Foundations of IPA
2. Planning an IPA Research Study
3. Collecting Data
4. Analysis
5. Writing up
PART II. IPA RESEARCH
6. Health and Illness
7. Sex and Sexuality
8. Psychological Distress
9. Life Transitions and Identity
PART III. CURRENT ISSUES FOR IPA
10. Assessing Validity
11. The Relationship Between IPA and Other Approaches
12. Conclusion and Reflections on Future Developments
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-0834-4
2010, 232 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Methods for Critical

Discourse Analysis
Qualitative Data
Analysis
Second Edition
An Introduction
Michael Meyer, Vienna University of Economics

and Business, Germany
This text provides a concise andcomprehensive
introduction to Critical Discourse Analysis,
appropriate for both novice and experienced
researchers. This new edition has been updated
throughout, with a new introduction contextualizing the development of the CDA
approach, and two entirely new chapters on the social actor approach to CDA.
CONTENTS
1. Critical Discourse Analysis: History, Agenda, Theory and Methodology
2. Theoretical and Methodological Aspects of Foucauldian Critical Discourse Analysis and
Dispositive Analysis
3. Critical Discourse Studies: A Sociocognitive Approach
4. The Discourse-Historical Approach (DHA)
5. Checks and Balances: How Corpus Linguistics Can Contribute to CDA
6. Discourse as the Recontextualization of Social Practice: A Guide
7. A Dialectical-relational Approach to Critical Discourse Analysis in Social Research
Carol Grbich, The Flinders University of South

Australia
This book provides a thorough yet accessible
reference guide to epistemological changes and
their impact on the field of qualitative research,
together with a practical guide to the wide range
of approaches social science researchers and
postgraduate students are currently using to design and analyze this form of data.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE STATE OF THE ART
PART II. SPECIFIC ANALYTICAL APPROACHES
PART III. ANALYSIS OF DOCUMENTATION
PART IV. WRITING UP DATA
PART V. QUALITATIVE COMPUTING PROGRAMS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2143-5
2007, 264 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7455-9
Constructing Grounded
Theory
2009, 216 pages
Qualitative Data
Analysis with NVivo
Patricia Bazeley, Research Support Pty Limited,
Australia
Through this very practical book, readers are
guided on howto make best use of the powerful
and flexible tools offered by the latest version
of NVivo as they work through each stage of
their research projects. Explanations draw on
examples from her own and others projects, and
are supported by the methodological literature.
CONTENTS
1. Perspectives
2. Starting a Project
3. Making Data Records
4. Working with Data
5. Connecting Ideas
6. Managing Data
7. The Pit Stop
8. Going Further
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2141-1
2007, 232 pages
A Practical Guide through Qualitative Analysis

Kathy Charmaz, Sonoma State University
Kathy Charmaz, one of the worlds leading
theorists and exponents of grounded theory,
introduces readers to the craft of using grounded
theory in social research and provides a clear,
step-by-step guide for those new to the field.
Using examples throughout, the book also maps
out an alternative vision of grounded theory put forward by its founding thinkers,
Glaser and Strauss. Essential reading for students, new researchers, and seasoned
social scientists alike, this book is one of those rare things, a textbook that is both
accessible to those new to the field but also one that has important things to say
about the nature of social enquiry itself.
CONTENTS
1. An Invitation to Grounded Theory
2. Gathering Rich Data
3. Coding in Grounded Theory Practice
4. Memo-Writing
5. Theoretical Sampling, Saturation and Sorting
6. Reconstructing Theory in Grounded Theory Studies
7. Writing the Draft
8. Reflecting on the Research Process
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-7353-9
2006, 224 pages
Textbooks
Ruth Wodak, University of Lancaster, U.K.
28 Action Research
The Action Research

Dissertation
Textbooks
Action Research
A Guide for Students and Faculty
New edition!
Kathryn Herr, Montclair State University
Action Research
Improving Schools and Empowering Educators
Third Edition
Craig A. Mertler, University of West Georgia
Written for pre- and in-service educators, this Third
Edition of Craig A. Mertlers Action Research:
Improving Schools and Empowering Educators
introduces the process of conducting ones own
classroom- or school-based action research in
conjunction with everyday instructional practices
and activities. The text provides educators with the
knowledge and skills necessary to design research studies, conduct research, and
communicate findings to relevant stakeholders and interested parties.
CONTENTS
PART I. WHAT IS ACTION RESEARCH?
1. Introduction to Action Research
2. Overview of the Action Research Process
PART II. HOW DO I BEGIN MY ACTION RESEARCH STUDY?
3. Planning for Action Research
4. Developing a Research Plan
PART III. WHAT DO I DO WITH ALL THESE DATA?
5. Collecting Data
6. Analyzing Data
PART IV. IVE GOT RESULTS!...NOW WHAT?
7. Developing an Action Plan
8. Sharing and Reflecting
9. Writing Up Action Research
Gary L. Anderson, New York University

This must-have resource provides an
accessibleroad map that honors the complexity
of action research. This bookhelps students
understand the ways action research
dissertations are different from more traditional
dissertations andprepares students and their committees for the unique dilemmas
they may face, such as validity, positionality, design, write-up, ethics, and defense
of the dissertation.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: What is an Action Research Dissertation?
2. Action Research Traditions and Knowledge Interests
3. The Continuum of Positionality in Action Research
4. Quality Criteria for Action Research: An Ongoing Conversation
5. Designing the Plane While Flying it: Proposing and Doing the Dissertation
6. What does a Participatory Action Research Dissertation Look Like?
7. Action Research, Ethics, and the Institutional Review Board
8. Final Thoughts
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2991-8
2005, 176 pages
New Edition!
The Action Research

Guidebook
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8889-6
A Four-Step Process for Educators, Leaders,

and School Leadership Teams
Second Edition

Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/mertler3study
Richard Sagor, Washington State University
Action Research
Third Edition
Ernest T. Stringer, Curtin University of Technology

The Third Edition of this popular text provides a
simple but highly effective model for approaching
action research, and the tools necessary to assist
the researcher in working through the research
process.
Teachers know their particular students,

classroom, and schools intimatelytherefore, they
are best equipped to pick a particular problem
(or research question) and then use qualitative
or quantitative techniques for further study. The
book is organized around Sagors four stage process developed from his many
years of experience training hundreds of educators: clarifying visions/targets,
articulating theory, implementing action and collecting data, and reflecting on data
and planning informed action.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. RESEARCH IN PROFESSIONAL AND PUBLIC LIFE
PART II. THEORY AND PRINCIPLES OF ACTION RESEARCH
PART III. SETTING THE STAGE: PLANNING A RESEARCH PROCESS
PART IV. LOOK: BUILDING THE PICTURE
PART V. THINK: INTERPRETING AND ANALYZING
PART VI. ACT: RESOLVING PROBLEMSPLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING SUSTAINABLE
SOLUTIONS
PART VII. STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT
PART VIII. FORMAL REPORTS
PART IX. UNDERSTANDING ACTION RESEARCH
1. Introduction to Action Research

2. Finding a Focus
3. Refining the Focus
4. Articulating a Theory in Action
5. Drawing a Theory in Action
6. Determining the Research Questions
7. Building a Data-Collection Plan
8. Analyzing the Data
9. Turning Findings Into Action Plans
10. Reporting and Sharing Action Research
11. Conclusion: The School as a Learning Organization
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8128-6
2011, 248 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5223-1

2007, 304 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Action Research | Case Study & Narrative Analysis 29
Case Study & Narrative Analysis
David Coghlan, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland
Narrative Methods for

the Human Sciences
Teresa Brannick, University College Dublin, Ireland
Catherine Kohler Riessman, Boston College
Third Edition
Providing a lively overview of research based on

constructing and interpreting narrative,this text
helps to improve research practice bygiving a
detailed discussion of four analytic methods that
students can adapt.
This book is the essential resource for any

researcher embarking on an action research
project in their own organization, and all students
of organization studies, education, health studies, and community studies. Thisnew
edition of the popular work, provides an easy-to-follow, hands-on guide to every
aspect of conducting an action research project in your own organization.
CONTENTS
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
1. Introducing Action Research
2. Learning In Action
3. Understanding Action Research
PART II. IMPLEMENTATION
4. Framing And Selecting Your Insider Project
5. Designing And Implementing Your Action Research Project
6. Interlevel Dynamics In Insider Action Research
7. Using Frameworks To Study Organizations In Action
PART III. ISSUES AND CHALLENGES IN RESEARCHING YOUR OWN ORGANIZATION
8. Researching Your Own Organization
9. Preunderstanding, Role Duality And Access
10. Managing Organizational Politics And Ethics
11. Writing Your Insider Action Research Dissertation
12. In Conclusion
CONTENTS
1. Looking Back, Looking Forward
2. Constructing Narratives for Research
3. Thematic Analysis
4. Structural Analysis
5. Dialogic Performance Analysis
6. Visual Analysis
7. Truths and Cautions
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2998-7
2008, 264 pages
The Art of Case Study

Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0216-8
Robert E. Stake, University of Illinois at UrbanaChampaign
2010, 184 pages
All You Need to Know About Action

Research
Second Edition
Jean McNiff, York St. John University, U.K.

Jack Whitehead, University of Bath, U.K.
In the second edition of All You Need to Know about Action Research, expert
practitioners Jean McNiff and Jack Whitehead guide you through everything you
need to know to plan and carry out a successful action research project. The
Second Edition has been thoroughly updated throughout, and now includes new
real-life case studies from Education, Health and Business. A new chapter on
reviewing the literature has been added and the sections on data gathering and
analysis have been updated to take into account the latest technological advances.
CONTENTS
PART I. WHAT DO I NEED TO KNOW?
PART II. WHY DO I NEED TO KNOW?
PART III. HOW DO I FIND OUT?
PART IV. HOW DO I GENERATE EVIDENCE TO SUPPORT MY CLAIM TO KNOWLEDGE?
PART V. HOW DO I TEST AND CRITIQUE MY KNOWLEDGE?
PART VI. HOW DO I REPRESENT AND DISSEMINATE MY KNOWLEDGE?
PART VII. HOW DO I SHOW THE SIGNIFICANCE OF MY KNOWLEDGE?
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8570-2583-8
Unique in his approach and style, author Robert

E. Stake draws from naturalistic, holistic,
ethnographic, phenomenological, and biographic
methods to present a disciplined, qualitative
exploration of case study methods. Written with
the inspired and thought-provoking style of a
master storyteller, this engaging text helps readers chart their way through the
labyrinth of case study research.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. The Unique Case
3. Research Questions
4. The Nature of Qualitative Research
5. Data Gathering
6. Analysis and Interpretation
7. Case Researcher Roles
8. Triangulation
9. Writing the Report
10. Reflections
11. Harper School
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8039-5767-1

1995, 192 pages
Textbooks
Doing Action Research

in Your Own
Organization
30 Case Study & Narrative Analysis
Textbooks
About the Author

Robert K. Yin, PhD, serves as Chairman of the Board and CEO of COSMOS Corporation, an applied research and social science
firm that has been in operation since 1980. Over the years, COSMOS has successfully completed hundreds of projects for
government agencies, private foundations, and other entrepreneurial and non-profit organizations. At COSMOS, Dr. Yin actively
leads various research projects, including those in which the case study method is used. He has authored numerous books and
peer-reviewed articles, including Case Study Research and Applications of Case Study Research. In 1998 he founded the Robert
K. Yin Fund at M.I.T., which supports seminars on brain sciences, as well as other activities related to the advancement of
predoctoral students in the Department of Brain and Cognitive Sciences.
New EDITION!
Bestseller!
Applications of Case Study Research
Case Study Research
Robert K. Yin, COSMOS Corporation
Design and Methods

Fourth Edition
Third Edition
This text discusses numerous completed case studies on a variety of topics and
includes examples using specific case study techniques and principles. The topics
emphasize institutional and organizational phenomena, such as education, law
enforcement, public health, economic development, and job training. From design
to reporting, the applications identify and suggest solutions to problems commonly
encountered when doing case studies.
CONTENTS
PART I. STARTING POINTS
1. A (Very) Brief Refresher on the Case Study Method
2. Field Notes
3. The Role of Theory in Doing Case Studies
PART II. DESCRIPTIVE CASE STUDIES
4. Start-up for a Newly-Appointed Education Leader
5. Citizens on Patrol
6. A Case Study of a Neighborhood Organization
PART III. EXPLANATORY CASE STUDIES
7. A Nutshell Example
8. Essential Ingredients of Explanatory Case Studies
9. Transforming a Business Firm through Strategic Planning
10. Rival Explanations
PART IV. CROSS-CASE SYNTHESES
11. Proposal Processing by Public and Private Universities
12. Case Studies of Transformed Firms
PART V. CASE STUDY EVALUATIONS
13: Evaluation of a Community Coalition
14. Sheriffs Combined Auto Theft Task Force
15. Technical Assistance for HIV/AIDS Community Planning
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8916-9
Robert K. Yin, COSMOS Corporation

Providing a complete portal to the world of case
study research, the Fourth Edition of Robert
K. Yins bestselling text offers comprehensive
coverage of the design and use of the case study
method as a valid research tool. Thisedition
covers more than 50 case studies (approximately
25% new), gives fresh attention to quantitative
analyses, discusses more fully the use of mixed methods research designs, and
includes new methodological insights.
Key Features
Highlights each specific research feature through 44 boxed vignettes that
feature previously published case studies
Provides methodological insights to show the similarities between case studies
and other social science methods
Suggests a three-stage approach to help readers define the initial questions
they will consider in their own case study research
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: How to Know Whether and When to Use Case Studies as a Research Method
2. Designing Case Studies: Identifying Your Case(s) and Establishing the Logic of Your Case
Study
3. Preparing to Collect Case Study Evidence: What You Need to Do Before Starting to Collect
Case Study Data
4. Collecting Case Study Evidence: The Principles You Should Follow in Working With Six
Sources of Evidence
5. Analyzing Case Study Evidence: How to Start Your Analysis, Your Analytic Choices, and
How They Work
6. Reporting Case Studies: How and What to Compose
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6099-1
2009, 240 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Case Study & Narrative Analysis 31
FROM the Authors
Jaber F. Gubrium was appointed Chair of the Sociology Department at the University of Missouri in 2002. He previously taught at
Marquette University and the University of Florida, was a Fulbright scholar at Tampere University, Finland, in 1996, and has been a
visiting professor at Tampere, at Lund University in Sweden, and at the Universities of Copenhagen and Odense in Denmark.
Analyzing Narrative
Reality
New!
Varieties of Narrative Analysis
Jaber F. Gubrium, University of Missouri
James A. Holstein, Marquette University
James A. Holstein, Marquette University
Jaber F. Gubrium, University of Missouri

This edited volume provides a more comprehensive view of Narrative Analysis
to include personal documents, interactive dimensions of storytelling and how
circumstances shape narrative production. Written by well known contributors who
are recognized in this field of specialization, this book bridges the divide between
analytic approaches.
CONTENTS
1. The Relationship of Big and Small Stories
2. Agential Realism Analysis of Storytelling
3. The Ethnography of Storytelling: A Folklorists Perspective on Text, Context, and
Interaction
4. Narrative Analysis: Using the Logic of Rhetoric and the Logic of Action as Analytical Tools
5. Practicing Dialogical Narrative Analysis
6. Quantitative Narrative Analysis
7. The Public Life of Personal Stories: Solidarity, Dissent and the Negotiation of Social
Meanings
8. Speaker Role Analysis of Personal Narrative: Strategies for Analyzing Interaction, Culture,
and Identities in Stories
9. Psychological Themes in Life-Narrative Accounts
10. Analyzing the Norms of Stories Use
11. Small World Stories and Other Examples of Conversational Narrative
12. Narrative Analysis as a Relational Engagement with Lives in the Making
13. [Analyzing the Interplay of Public and Personal Narratives] Provisional Title Assigned by
Editors
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-8755-4
Providing a new analytic framework for

conducting narrative research in the social and
behavioral sciences, this booklinks the meaning
and integrity of narratives to the myriad social
practices through which they are accomplished.
The authors focus on the interplay of narrative
work and narrative environments and cover interviewing, ethnographic fieldwork,
and conversational and textual analysis.
CONTENTS
PART I. NARRATIVE REALITY
1. Stories in Society
2. Forms of Analysis
3. Into the Field
PART II. NARRATIVE WORK
4. Activation
5. Linkage
6. Composition
7. Performance
8. Collaboration
9. Control
PART III. NARRATIVE ENVIRONMENTS
10. Close Relationships
11. Local Culture
12. Status
13. Jobs
14. Organizations
15. Intertextuality
PART IV. NARRATIVE ADEQUACY
16. What Is a Good Story?
17. Who Is a Good Storyteller?
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5219-4
2009, 272 pages
Textbooks
James A. Holstein is Department Chair of Social and Cultural Sciences at Marquette University. Dr. Holsteins teaching interests
include deviance and social control, research methods, and statistics. He has published over three dozen books on topics
including mental health and illness, family, the life course, social problems, the self, and qualitative research methods.
32 Case Study & Narrative Analysis | Ethnography

New!
Ethnography
Textbooks
Case Study Research

What, Why and How?
New EDITION!
Peter Swanborn
Critical Ethnography
This is an authoritative and nuanced exploration

of the many faces of case-based research
methods.In bringing diverse notions of case study
research together in one volume and sensitizing
the reader to the many varying definitions and
perceptions of case study, this book equips
researchers at all levels with the knowledge to
make an informed choice of research strategy.
Method, Ethics, and Performance

Second Edition
CONTENTS
1. What Is a Case Study?
2. When to Conduct a Case Study?
3. How to Select Cases?
4. What Data to Collect?
5. How to Enrich Your Case Study Data?
6. How to Analyse?
7. Assets and Opportunities
D. Soyini Madison, Northwestern University

This text presents a fresh new look at critical ethnography by emphasizing
the significance of ethics and performance in the art and politics of fieldwork.
The productive links between theory and method are celebrated in this text.
Theoretical concepts range from queer theory, feminist theory, and critical race
theory to Marxism and phenomenology. The methodological techniques range
from designing and asking in-depth interview questions and developing rapport to
coding and interpreting data. The various theories and methods culminate in three
fictional ethnographic case studies that enact the interdependence between
theory and method and the significance of social theory, ethics, and performance.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Critical Ethnography: Theory and Method
2. Methods: Do I Really Need a Method? A Method ... or Deep Hanging-Out
3. Three Stories: Case Studies in Critical Ethnography
4. Ethics
5. Methods and Ethics
6. Methods and Application: Three Case Studies in Ethical Dilemmas
7. Performance Ethnography
8. Its Time to Write: Writing as Performance
9. The Case Studies
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0612-9

2011, 192 pages
Case Study Research

in Practice
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8024-1

May 2011, 296 pages
Helen Simons, University of Southampton, U.K.

This text explores the authors practical and
personal approach to the theory and practice of
case study research. Author Helen Simons draws
on her extensive experience to tackle common
misconceptions and addresses the questions
often raised by students.
Ethnography
Step-by-Step
Third Edition
David M. Fetterman, Fetterman & Associates and
Stanford University
CONTENTS
PART I. GETTING STARTED
1. Evolution and Concept of Case Study Research
2. Planning, Designing, Gaining Access
3. Listen, Look, Document: Methods in Case Study Research
PART II. IN THE FIELD
4. Who Are They? Studying Others
5. Who Are We? Studying Our Self
6. Whose Data Are They? Ethics in Case Study Research
7. Mid-term Letter
PART III. MAKING SENSE
8. Begin at the Beginning: Analysis and Interpretation
9. From Data to Story: Examples in Practice
PART IV. TELLING THE STORY
10. Start at Any Point: Reporting and Writing
11. Dispelling Myths in Case Study Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-6424-7
2010, 200 pages
The Third Edition of this best-selling text guides

readers in managing mountains of ethnographic
data and making meaningful statements
based on that data. This edition builds on the
coverage of the Second Edition and offers an
up-to-date discussion of technology in
ethnography, covering a range of topics from technological tools to research with
virtual communities.
CONTENTS
1. The First Step: An Overview
2. Walking in Rhythm: Anthropological Concepts
3. A Wilderness Guide: Methods and Techniques
4. Gearing Up: Ethnographic Equipment
5. Finding Your Way Through the Forest: Analysis
6. Recording the Miracle: Writing
7. Walking Softly Through the Wilderness: Ethics
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5045-9
2010, 200 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Ethnography 33
Being Ethnographic
Netnography
A Guide to the Theory and Practice of

Ethnography
Doing Ethnographic Research Online

Robert V. Kozinets, York University, Toronto, Canada
Clear, engaging and original this book provides

invaluable advice as well as practical tools and
study aids for those engaged in ethnographic
research.
CONTENTS
PART I. KEY CONCEPTS AND THEORETICAL FRAMES
1. Definitions, Methods and Applications
2. Ethnographic Fields: Home and Away
PART II. DOING ETHNOGRAPHY
3. Talking to People: Negotiations, Conversations and Interviews
4. Being with People: Participation
5. Looking at People: Observations and Images
PART III. INSCRIPTION
6. Description: Writing Down Fieldnotes
7. Analysis to Interpretation: Writing Out Data
8. Interpretation to Story: Writing Up Ethnography
PART IV. EXPANDING ETHNOGRAPHY
9. Conclusion: Ethnographic Horizons
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4697-1
2010, 216 pages
This exciting new text is the first to explore

the discipline of Netnography the conduct
of ethnography over the internet a method
specifically designed to study cultures and
communities online. For the first time, full
procedural guidelines for the accurate and ethical
conduct of ethnographic research online are
set out, with detailed, step-by-step guidance to
thoroughly introduce, explain, and illustrate the method to students and researchers.
CONTENTS
1. Cultures and Communities Online
2. Understanding Culture Online
3. Researching Online: Methods
4. The Method of Netnography
5. Planning and Entre
6. Data Collection
7. Data Analysis
8. Conducting Ethical Netnography
9. Representation and Evaluation
10. Advancing Netnography: the Changing Landscape
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0645-6
2010, 232 pages
Organizational
Ethnography
Creating
Autoethnographies
Studying the Complexity of Everyday Life
Tessa Muncey, University of Leeds, U.K.

The first ever practical text on this increasingly
popular research method, it provides a
background and considers some of the criticisms
of the approach. The book is structured to mirror
the process of writing about experience, from
establishing an idea through to the process of
writing and the development of creative writing
skills, and provides detailed worked examples of the whole process.
CONTENTS
1. Why Do Autoethnography: Discovering the Individual in Research
2. Personal Worlds: Discovering the Constituent Parts of the Individual
3. What Is Autoethnography: Making Sense of Individual Experience
4. Planning an Autoethnographic Account
5. Making Sense of Autoethnographic Texts: Legitimacy, Truth and Memory
6. A Complete Autoethnographic Account
7. The Autoethnographic Process: Starting a New Story
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7473-3
2010, 168 pages
Sierk Ybema, Dvora Yanow, Harry Wels, and Frans

H. Kamsteeg, VU University, Amsterdam
This resourcebrings contributions from leading
scholars in organizational studies that help
to develop an ethnographic perspective on
organizations and organizational research. The
authors explore the special problems faced by
organizational ethnographers, from questions of gaining access to research sites
to various styles of writing ethnography, the role of friendship relations in the field,
ethical issues, and standards for evaluating ethnographic work.
CONTENTS
PART I. ETHNOGRAPHIC DOING AND WRITING
1. Getting Going: Organizing Ethnographic Fieldwork
2. Ethnographic Practices: From Writing-up Ethnographic Research to Writing Ethnography
3. Reading and Writing as Method: In Search of Trustworthy Texts
4. When the Subject and the Researcher Speak Together: Co-producing Organizational
Ethnography
PART II. FAMILIARITY AND STRANGER-NESS
5. Making the Familiar Strange: A Case for Disengaged Organizational Ethnography
6. Zooming In & Zooming Out: A Package of Method and Theory to Study Work Practices
7. From Participant Observation to Observant Participation
8. At-home Ethnography: Struggling with Closeness and Closure
PART III. RESEARCHER-RESEARCHED RELATIONSHIPS
9. Lies from the Field: Ethical Issues in Organizational Ethnography
10. But I Thought We Were Friends? Life Cycles and Research Relationships
11. Critical Action Research and Organizational Ethnography
12. Beyond Complicity: A Plea for Engaged Ethnography
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7046-9

2010, 304 pages
Textbooks
Raymond Madden, La Trobe University
34 Ethnography | Focus Groups
Textbooks
Doing Sensory
Ethnography
New!
Focus Group Methodology
Sarah Pink, University of Loughborough, U.K.
Principle and Practice
This important and groundbreaking book

provides an accessible analysis of the theoretical,
methodological, and practical aspects of doing
sensory ethnography, drawing on examples
and case studies from the growing literature
on sensory ethnographic studies and from
the authors own work. It is the first book to
concentrate on outlining a sensory ethnographic methodology.
CONTENTS
Pranee Liamputtong, La Trobe University, Australia

Focus Group Methodology is an introductory text which leads readers through
the entire process of designing a focus group study, from conducting interviews
to analysing data and presenting the findings. It also includes discussions on
cross-cultural and virtual focus group. Liamputtong presents clear, practical advice
in simple terms which will be appropriate for undergraduate and postgraduate
students who are undertaking research, making this an ideal starter text for anyone
new to focus group research.
CONTENTS
1. Introducing Sensory Ethnography

2. Understanding Sensory Cultures
3. Preparing for Sensory Research
4. Participant Observation: Sensory Embodied Learning
5. Interviewing
6. (Audio)Visual Methods
7. Combining Methods
8. Analysing Sensory Materials
9. Representing and Communicating about Sensory Ethnography
1. Focus Group Methodology: An Introduction

2. Theories and Ethics
3. Focus Group Methodology and Principles
4. Focus Group Methodology and Practical Issues
5. Conducting Focus Groups: Practicalities
6. The Use of Focus Group Methodology in the Health and Social Sciences
7. Focus Group Methodology and Sensitive Topics and Vulnerable People
8. Focus Group Methodology in Cross-Cultural Research
9. Virtual Focus Groups
10. Managing and Making Sense of Focus Group Data
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4803-6

2010, 184 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7909-7

Focus Groups
Focus Groups as
Focus Groups
David L. Morgan, Portland State University
A Practical Guide for Applied Research

Fourth Edition
This best-selling text continues to provide an

excellent guide for researchers across the
disciplines.
Richard A. Krueger, University of Minnesota,

Professor Emeritus and Senior Fellow
Mary Anne Casey, Consultant
This book provides aneasy-to-readoverview
of sound focus group practices, from recruiting
participants, to developing questions, capturing
and analyzing data, and reporting results.
CONTENTS
1. Overview of Focus Groups
2. Planning the Focus Group Study
3. Developing a Questioning Route
4. Participants in a Focus Group
5. Moderating Skills
6. Analyzing Focus Group Results
7. Reporting
8. Styles of Focus Group Research
9. Focus Group Interviews With Young People
10. International and Cross-Cultural Focus Groups Interviewing
11. Telephone and Internet Focus Group Interviewing
12. Focus Group Interviews Within the Organization
13. Modifications of Focus Groups
14. Answering Questions About the Quality of Focus Group Research
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Focus Groups as Qualitative Method
3. The Uses of Focus Groups
4. Planning and Research Design for Focus Groups
5. Conducting and Analyzing Focus Groups
6. Additional Possibilities
7. Conclusions
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-0343-7
1996, 88 pages
Spiral ISBN: 978-1-4129-6947-5

2009, 240 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Interviewing 35
Interpreting Interviews
Interviewing
Cases in Online Interview Research

Janet Salmons, Vision2Lead, Inc and Capella University School of Business and
Technology
This casebook on online interview research contains multidisciplinary cases from
researchers who have done structured or unstructured online interviews using a
variety of qualitative methods and mixed methods approaches in data collection.
Each case is followed by a critique analysis and overall summary.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-9180-3
August 2011, 400 pages
Online Interviews in
Real Time
Janet Salmons, Vision2Lead, Inc and Capella
University School of Business and Technology
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Views on Interviews: A Skeptical Review
3. Practical Aspects on Interview Studies
4. A Metaphor Approach
5. Rethinking Interviews: New Metaphors for Interviews
6. Reflexivity: A Framework
7. Implications for Research Practice
8. Conclusion
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8570-2258-5
2011, 176 pages
This book provides emerging and experienced

scholars the theoretical background and practical
tips they need to design and conduct credible
online interview research. Author Janet Salmons
bridges the theoretical and the practical, with
guidance for designing and conducting credible
online interview research.
InterViews
Learning the Craft of Qualitative Research
Interviewing
Second Edition
Steinar Kvale, University of Aarhus, Denmark
Svend Brinkmann, Aalborg University, Denmark
CONTENTS
1. Real Interviews in an Online World
2. Online Research with Technology Tools
3. Interviews for Scholarly Research
4. Design for Credible and Ethical Online Research
5. Sampling - Selecting Participants for Online Interviews
6. Preparing for a Live Online Interview
7. Conducting the Interview
8. Visual Research and the Synchronous Online Interview
9. Online Communications and Online Interviews - Trends and Influences
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6895-9
2010, 256 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/salmonsstudy
This thoroughly revised Second Edition focuses

on the practical, epistemological, and ethical
issues involved with interviewing while also
covering newer developments in qualitative
interviewing.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Interview Research
2. Research Interviews, Philosophical Dialogues, and Therapeutic Interviews
3. Epistemological Issues of Interviewing
4. Ethical Issues of Interviewing
5. Learning the Craft of Qualitative Research Interviewing
6. Thematizing and Designing an Interview Study
7. Conducting an Interview
8. Interview Variations
9. Interview Quality
10. Transcribing Interviews
11. Preparing for Interview Analysis
12. Interview Analyses Focusing on Meaning
13. Interview Analyses Focusing on Language
14. Eclectic and Theoretical Analyses of Interviews
15. The Social Construction of Validity
16. Reporting Interview Knowledge
17. Conversations About Interviews
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2542-2
2009, 376 pages
Textbooks
Researchers conducting interviews in the social

sciences quickly find that there is no single best
way to approach their task. This text offers a
critique of traditional interviewing practices and
provides a framework for thinking about issues
such as trustworthiness, identity and language
in a conceptual rather than technical context,
allowing you to develop your own reflexive
practice.
New!
36 Interviewing
Reflective Interviewing
UpDATED Edition Coming Soon!
Textbooks
Qualitative
Interviewing
A Guide to Theory and Practice

Kathryn Roulston, University of Georgia
Offering a theoretically-informed guide for
researchers learning how to interview in the
social sciences, this book provides a practical
approach to interviewing, helping researchers to
learn about themselves as interviewers in ways
that will inform the design, conduct, analysis, and
representation of interview data.
The Art of Hearing Data

Second Edition
Herbert J. Rubin and Irene S. Rubin,
Northern Illinois University
In this practical, user-friendly text, the authors
take the novice researcher through all of the
steps of an interviewing project, beginning with
picking a viable and absorbing topic, gaining
the confidence of interviewees, preparing questions, and the final analysis and
write-up.
CONTENTS
1. Listening, Hearing, and Sharing Social Experiences
2. Why We Do What We Do: Philosophy of Qualitative Interviewing
3. Design: Choosing Topics and Anticipating Data Analysis
4. Continuing the Design: Making the Research Credible
5. Conversational Partnerships
6. The Responsive Interview as an Extended Conversation
7. Structuring the Interview
8. Designing Main Questions and Probes
9. Preparing Follow-Up Questions
10. The First Phase of Analysis: Preparing Transcripts and Coding Data
11. Analyzing Coded Data
12. Presenting the Results
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Asking Questions and Individual Interviews
3. Interviews with Groups
4. Theorizing the Qualitative Interview
5. Designing Studies That Use Interviews
6. Doing Interview Research
7. Theorizing the Researcher: The Reflective Interviewer
8. Examining Interview Talk
9. Analyzing and Representing Interview Data
10. Final Thoughts: Learning How to Interview
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4857-9
2010, 216 pages
Online Interviewing
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2075-5
Nalita James and Hugh Busher, University of

Leicester, U.K.
2005, 304 pages
This is a short, accessible and practical

introduction to designing and conducting online
interviews in qualitative research. The authors
help students understand the methodological
and epistemological challenges of carrying out
interviews in the virtual environment.
Interviews in
Nigel King, University of Huddersfield, U.K.
Christine Horrocks, University of Bradford, U.K.
The authorspresent a clear and thorough guide to
the use of interviews in contemporary qualitative
research. Writing in an accessible style, with
many practical examples, the authors explorekey
debates in the philosophy and theory underlying
interview methods.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Philosophical Assumptions
3. Designing an Interview Study
4. Carrying out Qualitative Interviews
5. Group Interviews
6. Remote Interviewing
7. Ethics in Qualitative Interviewing
8. Reflexivity and Qualitative Interviewing
9. An Introduction to Interview Data Analysis
10. Interviews in Phenomenological Research
11. Interviews and Narrative
CONTENTS
1. Online Qualitative Research: Epistemological Dimensions
2. Engaging with Research Participants Online: Interview or Conversation?
3. Developing Online Qualitative Interviews: A Methodological Discussion
4. The Displacement of Time and Space: Engagement in Online Qualitative Interviewing
5. Ethical Issues in Online Qualitative Research
6. Constructing Credibility and Authenticity in Online Interviews
7. The Nature of Inequalities and Power in Online Interviewing
8. Analysing Online Discourse and Dialogues
9. The Presentation, Curation and Dissemination of Online Qualitative Data
10. Conclusion: Online Qualitative Research: Challenges and Possibilities
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4532-5
2010, 176 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-1257-0

2010, 256 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Survey Research Methods 37
Survey Research
Methods
Survey Research Methods
Fourth Edition
A Step-by-Step Guide
Fourth Edition
Arlene Fink, University of California at Los Angeles,
The Langley Research Institute
Completely revised, and with a greater emphasis
on online surveys, this practical text guides
readers in developing their own rigorous surveys
and evaluating the credibility of others.
CONTENTS
1. Conducting Surveys: Everyone Is Doing It
2. The Survey Form: Questions, Scales, and Appearance
3. Getting It Together: Some Practical Concerns
4. Sampling
5. Survey Design: Environmental Control
6. Analyzing & Organizing Data From Surveys
7. Presenting the Survey Results
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6668-9
2009, 136 pages
Floyd J. Fowler, Jr., University of Massachusetts

Boston, Center for Survey Research
In the Fourth Edition of the bestselling Survey
Research Methods, author Floyd J. Fowler, Jr.
provides students and researchers who want to
collect, analyze, or read about survey data with a
sound basis for evaluating how each aspect of a
survey can affect its precision, accuracy, and credibility.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Types of Error in Surveys
3. Sampling
4. Nonresponse: Implementing a Sample Design
5. Methods of Data Collection
6. Designing Questions to be Good Measures
7. Evaluating Survey Questions and Instruments
8. Survey Interviewing
9. Preparing Survey Data for Analysis
10. Analyzing Survey Data
11. Ethical Issues in Survey Research
12. Providing Information About Survey Methods
13. Survey Error in Perspective
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5841-7
Conducting Online
Surveys
2009, 216 pages
Improving Survey
Questions
Valerie M. Sue and Lois A. Ritter, California State

University, East Bay
Design and Evaluation
T his text is a comprehensive guide to the creation,

implementation, and analysis of e-mail and
Web-based surveys. Authors Valerie M. Sue and
Lois A. Ritter specifically address issues unique to
online survey research such as selecting software,
designing Web-based questionnaires, and
sampling from online populations.
Floyd J. Fowler, Jr., University of Massachusetts

Boston, Center for Survey Research
Clearly written, this book enables researchers and
practitioners to write better survey questions and
helps users of survey data to evaluate their data
more critically.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Planning the Online Survey
3. Sampling
4. Writing Survey Questions
5. Designing and Developing the Survey Instrument
6. Conducting the Survey
7. Processing and Analyzing the Survey Data
8. Reporting the Survey Results
9. Concluding Comments
CONTENTS
1. Questions as Measures
2. Designing Questions to Gather Factual Data
3. Questions to Measure Subjective States
4. Some General Rules for Designing Good Survey Instruments
5. Presurvey Evaluation of Questions
6. Assessing the Validity of Survey Questions
7. Question Design and Evaluation Issues in Perspective
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8039-4583-8

Paperback ISBN:978-1-4129-3754-2
2007, 208 pages
1995, 200 pages
Textbooks
How to Conduct
Surveys
38 Mixed Methods Research
The Mixed Methods

Reader
Mixed Methods Research

Textbooks
Designing and
Conducting Mixed
Methods Research
Vicki L. Plano Clark and John W. Creswell,

University of Nebraska-Lincoln
This Reader organizes a collection of key
methodological mixed methods discussions and
exemplar mixed methods research studies in
one easy-to-access location. It draws from the
international literature appearing across diverse
research disciplines over the past thirty years.
Second Edition
John W. Creswell and Vicki L. Plano Clark,

University of Nebraska-Lincoln
Combining the latest thinking about mixed
methods research designs with practical, stepby-step guidance, the Second Edition of this text
now covers six major mixed methods designs.
Authors John W. Creswell and Vicki L. Plano Clark walk readers through the entire
research process, from formulating questions to designing, collecting data, and
interpreting results and include updated examples from published mixed methods
studies drawn from the social, behavioral, health, and education disciplines.
Key Features
Two new mixed methods designstransformative and multiphaseare now
covered.
New flowcharts detail the steps involved in conducting each of the six major
mixed methods designs.
More detailed coverage of data collection decisions for each of the six major
designs.
CONTENTS
1. The Nature of Mixed Methods Research
2. The Foundations of Mixed Methods Research
3. Choosing a Mixed Methods Research Design
4. Examples of Mixed Methods Designs
5. Introducing a Mixed Methods Study
6. Collecting Data in Mixed Methods Research
7. Analyzing and Interpreting Data in Mixed Methods Research
8. Writing and Evaluating Mixed Methods Research
9. Summary and Recommendations
CONTENTS
PART I. METHODOLOGICAL SELECTIONS
1. The Evolution of Mixed Methods Research
2. Pragmatism as a Philosophical Foundation for Mixed Methods Research
3. The Transformative-Emancipatory Perspective as a Philosophical Foundation for Mixed
Methods Research
4. Triangulation as the First Mixed Methods Design
5. Identifying the Purposes for Mixed Methods Designs
6. A Notation System for Mixed Methods Designs
7. An Expanded Typology for Classifying Mixed Methods Research Into Designs
8. Different Sampling Techniques for Mixed Methods Studies
9. Data Analysis Strategies in Mixed Methods Research
10. Expanding the Reasons for Conducting Mixed Methods Research
11. Types of Legitimation (Validity) in Mixed Methods Research
12. Powerful Rhetorical Devices Used in Writing Mixed Methods Research
13. An Improved Role for Qualitative Research in Mixed Methods
14. An Alternative to Reconciling the Different Realities of Qualitative and Quantitative
Research
PART II. EXEMPLAR RESEARCH STUDIES
15. A Concurrent/Triangulation Mixed Methods Design With Merged Results
16. A Concurrent/Triangulation Mixed Methods Design With Data Transformation
17. An Embedded Experimental Before-Intervention Mixed Methods Design
18. An Embedded Experimental During-Intervention Mixed Methods Design
19. An Embedded Experimental After-Intervention Mixed Methods Design
20. A Sequential Explanatory Mixed Methods Design to Explain Findings
21. A Sequential Explanatory Mixed Methods Design With Participant Selection
22. A Sequential Exploratory Mixed Methods Design With Instrument Development
23. A Sequential Exploratory Mixed Methods Design to Generate and Test a Model
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5145-6
2008, 640 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7517-9

2010, 504 pages
About the Authors

John W. Creswell is a Professor of Educational
Psychology at Teachers College, University
of Nebraska-Lincoln. He is affiliated with a
graduate program in educational psychology
that specializes in quantitative and qualitative
methods in education. In this program, he
specializes in qualitative and quantitative
research designs and methods, multimethod
research, and faculty and academic leadership issues in colleges and
universities.
icki L. Plano Clark, PhD, is a Research

V
Assistant Professor in the Department of
Educational Psychology, Co-Director of the Office
of Qualitative and Mixed Methods Research,
and Managing Editor of the Journal of Mixed
Methods Research. Her specialization includes
mixed methods research designs and qualitative
research. She is interested in the procedural
issues that arise when implementing different designs and how mixed
methods research is applied in different disciplines.
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Mixed Methods Research 39
Advances in Mixed
Methods Research
New!
Using Mixed Methods
Theories and Applications
David Plowright, University of Hull, U.K.

This text will take the novice researcher through
the process of undertaking a research project
using mixed methods. It has a particular focus on
ethics, a key concern for researchers in education
and the social sciences.
This book illuminates new ways of

conceptualizing and conducting empirical
research in the social sciences and humanities.
Covering both practical and methodological
issues, the authors explore different visions of
what mixed methods research is and where it is going.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE THEORY OF MIXED METHODS DESIGN
1. The Straw Men of the Qualitative-Quantitative Divide and their Influence on Mixed
Methods Research
2. Troubles with Triangulation
3. Analytic Density, Postmodernism and Applied Multiple Method Research
4. The Practice of a Mixed Methods Research Strategy
5. Methodological Issues in Conducting Mixed Methods Research Designs
PART II. APPLICATIONS IN MIXED METHODS DESIGN
6. Why Do Researchers Integrate/Combine/Mesh/Blend/Mix/Merge/Fuse Quantitative and
Qualitative Research?
7. Quality of Inferences in Mixed Methods Research
8. Method Mix, Technical Hex, Theory Fix
9. Mixing Data Collection Methods
10. Analysis with APES, the Actor Process Event Scheme
11. Multi-perspective Exploration as a Tool for Mixed Methods Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4809-8
CONTENTS
1. From Mixed Methods to an Integrated Methodology
2. The FraIM: Frameworks for an Integrated Methodology
3. Case Selection: Data Source Management
4. Case Selection: Integrated Sampling
5. Data Collection: An Overview
6. Observing
7. Asking Questions
8. Analyzing Artefacts I
9. Analyzing Artefacts II
10. Data Integration
11. Warrantable Research: Using the FraIM as a Guide
12. Ethical Issues in Participant-Centred Research
13. Wider Ethical Issues and the FraIM
14. Holistic Integrationism: Philosophizing Research
15. Writing a Research Proposal Based on the FraIM
16. A Few Final Words
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0108-6
2009, 200 pages
Foundations of Mixed
Methods Research
Integrating Quantitative and Qualitative
Approaches in the Social and
Behavioral Sciences
Charles Teddlie, Louisiana State University,
Baton Rouge
Abbas Tashakkori, University of North Texas
The first textbook on using mixed methods in the
social sciences, written by two leading names
in the field, this text provides an overview of the
development of mixed methodology. The authors take students through all aspects
of working with mixed methods from research design and data collection through
to analysis and conclusions.
CONTENTS
1. Mixed Methods: The Third Methodological Movement
2. Mixed Methods as the Third Research Community
3. The Fundamentals of Mixed Methods Research
4. Methodological Thought Before the 20th Century
5. Paradigm Issues in Mixed Methods Research
6. Methods and Strategies of Mixed Methods Research
7. Generating Questions in Mixed Methods Research
8. Mixed Methods Research Designs
9. Sampling Strategies for Mixed Methods Research
10. Considerations Before Collecting Your Data
11. Data Collection Strategies for Mixed Methods Research
12. The Analysis of Mixed Methods Data
13. The Inference Process in Mixed Methods Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-3012-9
2009, 400 pages
Textbooks
Frameworks for an Integrated Methodology
Manfred Max Bergman, University of Basel,

Switzerland
40 Evaluation
RealWorld Evaluation
Textbooks
Evaluation
Working Under Budget, Time, Data, and Political

Constraints
New EDITION!
Michael Bamberger, Independent Consultant,

Former World Bank Senior Sociologist
The Program
Evaluation Standards
Jim Rugh, CARE International

Linda Mabry, Washington State University,
Vancouver
A Guide for Evaluators and

Evaluation Users
Third Edition
This is the only textbook that provides specific

guidance on how to conduct evaluations when
working under resource and/or data constraints.
The authors illustrate options for addressing each constraint through practical
examples from both developed and developing countries to show how adapting to
different types of exigencies can lead to successful evaluations.
Donald B. Yarbrough, University of Iowa

Lyn M. Shulha, Queens University at Kingston,
Canada
Rodney K. Hopson, Duquesne University
Flora A. Caruthers, Office of Program Policy
Analysis and Government Accountability, Florida
Legislature
The Joint Committee on Standards for Educational Evaluation (JCSEE.org) is an
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) accredited standards developer,
sponsored by 17 North American professional organizations. With oversight from
the JCSEE, Yarbrough, Schula, Hopson, and Caruthers have revised and illustrated
this new edition of the Program Evaluation Standards. These thirty standards
support the core attributes of evaluation quality: utility, feasibility, propriety,
accuracy, and accountability, and provide guidance to anyone interested in
planning, implementing, or using program evaluations.
Key Features
Provides extensive attention to cultures and contexts in evaluations
Encourages reflective practice based on in-depth understanding of standards
and their applications
Suggests flexible approaches for learning how to use the standards
Includes a new section, Evaluation Accountability, emphasizing metaevaluation
for improvement and accountability guided by three new metaevaluation
standards
Includes case scenarios and applications across multiple standards to help
users apply the standards individually and in concert
Offers updated documentation reference lists
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Applying the Standards
3. The Functional Table of Standards
4. THE STANDARDS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8908-4
2011, 312 pages
Key Features
Provides practical guidance: Specific and well documented case studies are
provided for addressing budget, time, and data constraints, and for dealing
with political pressures. Guidelines are offered for protecting the validity of
conclusions when measures must be taken to save costs and time.
Uses a mixed-methods approach: Adapting a range of methods to real-world
situations, this text draws on quantitative, qualitative, and mixed-methods
approaches. Design, methods, cultural sensitivity, validity, credibility, and
reporting are among the many topics addressed. In addition, triangulation is
encouraged for increasing the validity of findings.
Incorporates a unique seven-step model: A systematic step-by-step approach
that is logical and easy to follow is presented. Frameworks and checklists are
provided for assessing the strengths and weaknesses of an evaluation and
providing strategies to overcome the weaknesses and improve the design and
validity.
CONTENTS
PART I. OVERVIEW: REALWORLD EVALUATION
1. RealWorld Evaluation and the Contexts in Which It Is Used
PART II. THE SEVEN STEPS OF THE REALWORLD EVALUATION APPROACH
2. First Clarify the Purpose: Scoping the Evaluation
3. Not Enough Money: Addressing Budget Constraints
4. Not Enough Time: Addressing Scheduling and Other Time Constraints
5. Critical Information Is Missing or Difficult to Collect: Addressing Data Constraints
6. Reconciling Different Priorities and Perspectives: Addressing Political Influences
7. Strengthening the Evaluation Design and the Validity of the Conclusions
8. Making It Useful: Helping Clients and Other Stakeholders Utilize The Evaluation
PART III. A REVIEW OF EVALUATION METHODS AND APPROACHES AND THEIR
APPLICATIONS IN REALWORLD EVALUATION
9. Applications of Program Theory in RealWorld Evaluation
10. The Most Widely-Used RealWorld Quantitative Evaluation Designs
11. Quantitative Evaluation Methods
12. Qualitative Evaluation Methods
13. Mixed-Method Evaluation
14. Sampling for RealWorld Evaluation
PART IV. PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER
15. Learning Together: Building Capacity for RealWorld Evaluation
16. Bringing It All Together: Applying RealWorld Evaluation Approaches to Each Stage of the
Evaluation Process
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-0946-4
2006, 504 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Evaluation 41
Practical Research
and Evaluation
A Start-to-Finish Guide for Practitioners
Colin McCaig, Centre for Education and Inclusion

Research (CEIR), Sheffield Hallam University, U.K.
Practical Research and Evaluation is a
practical, user-friendly guide to social science
research methods for professionals who are
looking to conduct evaluation studies and
research as part of their own professional practice.
CONTENTS
1. Practitioner Research and the Research Process
2. Introduction to Research and Evaluation Basics
3. Research and Evaluation Design
4. Ethics and Research Governance
5. Writing a Research Proposal or Brief
6. Literature Reviews
7. Action Research
8. Different Kinds of Qualitative Data Collection Methods
9. Preparation and Process of Qualitative Interviews and Focus Groups
10. Qualitative Data Analysis
11. Different Kinds of Quantitative Data Collection Methods
12. Quantitative Data Collection
13. Quantitative Data Processing and Analysis
14. Dissemination
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7004-9
2010, 272 pages
Conducting Needs Assessments

A Multidisciplinary Approach
Second Edition
Fernando Soriano, Cal State University, San Marcos
T his book demystifies the process of planning a community intervention. This
book takes needs assessment down to a very basic level and speaks in very basic
terminology that students understand.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Planning a Needs Assessment
3. Assessment Methods
4. Survey Methods and Sample Size Requirements
5. Instrument Development
6. Collecting Data from Participants
7. Data Preparation and Statistical Analyses
8. Reporting the Findings
9. Social and Cultural Considerations
10. Conclusion
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6574-3

New!
Program Development
in the 21st Century
Designing and
Managing Programs
An Evidence-Based Approach to Design,

Implementation, and Evaluation
Nancy G. Calley, University of Detroit - Mercy
An Effectiveness-Based Approach
Third Edition
T his text provides an in-depth examination of

all that is involved in comprehensive program
development in the human services and mental
health professions today. Designed for both
graduate students and practitioners, the book
provides rich knowledge of practices, conditions,
and legislative issues that currently impact
program development.
Peter M. Kettner, Professor Emeritus, Arizona State

University
Robert M. Moroney, Arizona State University
Lawrence L. Martin, University of Central Florida
This new edition is written in a deliberate manner
that has students following the program planning
process in a logical manner. The books format guides students from problem
analysis through evaluation, enabling students to apply these concepts to their
own program plans.
CONTENTS
1. Contemporary Issues in Social Service Program Planning and Administration
2. The Contribution of Theory to Program Planning
3. Understanding Social Problems
4. Needs Assessment: Theoretical Considerations
5. Needs Assessment: Approaches to Measurement
6. Selecting the Appropriate Intervention Strategy
7. Setting Goals and Objectives
8. Designing Effective Programs
9. Using Management Information
10. Budgeting for Control, Management, and Planning
11. Line-Item, Functional, and Program Budgeting Systems
12. Performance Measurement, Monitoring, and Program Evaluation: Data Requirements
13. Program Impact Evaluation and Hypothesis Testing
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5195-1
2008, 320 pages
CONTENTS
1. Overview: Comprehensive Program Development in the Mental Health Professions
2. Establish the Need for Programming: Developing the Rationale
3. Establishing a Research-Basis in Program Design
4. Addressing Cultural Identity Issues in Program Design
5. Design the Clinical Program
6. Develop the Organizational Staffing Structure
7. Community Resource Development: Identify and Engage Community Resources
8. Identify & Evaluate Potential Funding Sources
9. Develop the Financial Management Plan
10. Proposal Development
11. Implement the Program
12. Evaluate the Program
13. Community Resource Preservation: Build & Preserve Relationships
14. Develop an Advocacy Plan
15. Develop a Data Reporting Plan
16. Attain Program and Organizational Accreditation
17. Putting it all Together: Comprehensive Program Development in the 21st Century
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7449-3
2011, 504 pages
Textbooks
Lena Dahlberg, Dalarna University and Dalarna

Research Institute
New EDITION!
42 Evaluation
Utilization-Focused
Evaluation
Qualitative Research &

Evaluation Methods
Michael Quinn Patton, Utilization-Focused

Evaluation, Saint Paul, MN
Michael Quinn Patton, Utilization-Focused

Evaluation, Saint Paul, MN
Textbooks
Fourth Edition
Third Edition
The Fourth Edition of the bestselling UtilizationFocused Evaluation provides expert, detailed
advice on conducting program evaluations from
one of the leading experts. Chock full of useful
pedagogyincluding a unique utilization-focused
evaluation checklistthis book presents Michael Quinn Pattons distinctive
opinions based on more than thirty years of experience.
The book that has been a resource and training

tool for countless applied researchers, evaluators,
and graduate students has been completely
revised with hundreds of new examples and
stories illuminating all aspects of qualitative
inquiry. This revision will help readers integrate and make sense of the great
volume of qualitative works published in the past decade.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. TOWARD MORE USEFUL EVALUATIONS

1. Evaluation Use: Both Challenge and Mandate
2. What Is Utilization-Focused Evaluation? How Do You Get Started?
3. Fostering Intended Use by Intended Users: The Personal Factor
4. Intended Uses of Findings
5. Intended Process Uses: Impacts of Evaluative Thinking and Experiences
PART II. FOCUSING EVALUATIONS: CHOICES, OPTIONS, AND DECISIONS
6. Situational Evaluation: Being Active-Reactive-Interactive-Adaptive
7. Focusing on Outcomes: Beyond the Goals Clarification Game
8. Evaluation Focus Options: Developmental Evaluation and Other Alternatives
9. Implementation Evaluation: What Happened in the Program?
10. Conceptualizing the Intervention: Alternatives for Evaluating Theories of Change
PART III. APPROPRIATE METHODS
11. Evaluations Worth Using: Utilization-Focused Methods Decisions
12. The Paradigms Debate and a Utilization-Focused Synthesis
13. The Meanings and Reporting of Evaluation Findings: Analysis, Interpretation, Judgment,
and Recommendations
PART IV. REALITIES AND PRACTICALITIES OF UTILIZATION-FOCUSED EVALUATION
14. Power, Politics, and Ethics
15. Utilization-Focused Evaluation: Processes and Premises
PART I. CONCEPTUAL ISSUES IN QUALITATIVE INQUIRY

1. The Nature of Qualitative Inquiry
2. Strategic Themes in Qualitative Inquiry
3. Variety in Qualitative Inquiry: Theoretical Orientations
4. Particularly Appropriate Qualitative Applications
PART II. QUALITATIVE DESIGNS AND DATA COLLECTION
5. Designing Qualitative Studies
6. Fieldwork Strategies and Observation Methods
7. Qualitative Interviewing
PART III. ANALYSIS, INTERPRETATION AND REPORTING
8. Qualitative Analysis and Interpretation
9. Enhancing the Quality and Credibility of Qualitative Analysis
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-7619-1971-1
2001, 788 pages
A Practical Guide to
Program Evaluation
Planning
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5861-5

2008, 688 pages
Theory and Case Examples
The Logic Model

Guidebook
Better Strategies for Great Results
Lisa Wyatt Knowlton and Cynthia C. Phillips,
Phillips Wyatt Knowlton, Inc.
This unique primer on logic models is a recipe
for program and strategy improvement. A
field-leader, it emphasizes quality processes,
distinguishes model types, and provides case
studies as well as archetypes.
CONTENTS
PART I. CONSTRUCTION
1. Introducing Logic Models
2. Building & Improving Theory of Change Models
3. Creating Program Logic Models
4. Modeling: Improving Program Logic Models
PART II. APPLICATIONS
5. Logic Models for Evaluation Literacy
6. Display and Meaning
7. Exploring Archetypes
Debra J. Holden, RTI International

Marc A. Zimmerman, University of Michigan
This practicalbook provides a step-by-step
process to guide evaluators in planning
a comprehensive, yet feasible, program
evaluationfrom start to designwithin any context. No book on the market
delineates the required steps for preparing to conduct an evaluation.
CONTENTS
1. Introductions
2. Evaluation Planning Here and Now
3. Planning for an Education Evaluation
4. Planning for a Service Program Evaluation
5. Planning for a Community-Based Program Evaluation
6. Planning for a Media Evaluation
7. Program Evaluation Planning: Overview and Analysis
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6775-4
2009, 184 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5864-6

2009, 168 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Evaluation 43
Evaluation in Action
Jody Fitzpatrick, University of Colorado Denver
Christina Christie, Claremont Graduate University
Melvin M. Mark, The Pennsylvania State University
Drawing from the popular Exemplars section in
the American Journal of Evaluation (AJE), the books
twelve interviews with evaluators illustrate a
variety of evaluation practices in different settings
and include commentary and analysis on what the
interviews teach about evaluation practice.
CONTENTS
1. Evaluation and Its Practice: Some Key Considerations and Choices
PART I. TRADITIONAL EVALUATIONS WITH A PRIMARY PURPOSE OF JUDGING MERIT AND
WORTH
2. The Evaluation of GAIN: A Welfare-to-Work Program in California, An Interview with
James A. Riccio
3. Evaluation of the Natural Resources Leadership Program, 1995 through 1998, An
Interview with Jennifer C. Greene
4. The Evaluation of the Ft. Bragg and Stark County Systems of Care for Children and
Adolescents, An Interview with Len Bickman
PART II. EVALUATIONS WITH A FOCUS ON DESCRIPTION
5. The Evaluation of the Stanford Teacher Education Program (STEP), An Interview with
David Fetterman
6. The Evaluation of the Homeless Families Program, An Interview with Debra J. Rog
7. The Council for School Performance: Performance Reports for Georgia Schools, An
Interview with Gary T. Henry
PART III. EVALUATIONS WITH AN EMPHASIS ON PROGRAM PLANNING AND
ORGANIZATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
8. Evaluation of the Special Education Program at the Anoka-Hennepin School District, An
Interview with Jean A. King
9. Evaluation of the Work and Health Initiative with a Focus on Winning New Jobs, An
Interview with Stewart I. Donaldson
10. Developing an Evaluation System for the Corporate Education Development and Training
(CEDT) Department at Sandia National Laboratories, An Interview with Hallie Preskill
11. Evaluation of the Colorado Healthy Communities Initiative, An Interview with Ross Conner
PART IV. EVALUATIONS CONCERNING CULTURAL COMPETENCE
12. Evaluation of the Fun with Books Program, An Interview with Katrina Bledsoe
13. Evaluation of Godfreys Children Center in Tanzania, An Interview with Allan Wallis and
Victor Dukay
PART V. ANALYSIS, INTERPRETATIONS, AND CONCLUSIONS
14. Exemplars? Choices: What Do These Cases Tell Us About Practice?
15. Analyzing the Practice of Evaluation: What Do these Cases Tell Us About Theory?
Stewart I. Donaldson and Christina A. Christie,

Claremont Graduate University
Melvin M. Mark, The Pennsylvania State University
Placing into perspective the meaning of evidence
for evaluation professionals and applied
researchers, this text provides observations about the diversity and changing
nature of credible evidence, Editors Stewart I. Donaldson, Christina A. Christie, and
Melvin M. Mark include lessons from their own applied research and evaluation
practice, and suggest ways in which practitioners might address the key issues
and challenges of collecting credible evidence.
CONTENTS
1. In Search of the Blueprint for an Evidence-Based Global Society
2. Social Inquiry Paradigms as a Frame for the Debate on Credible Evidence
PART II. EXPERIMENTAL APPROACHES AS THE ROUTE TO CREDIBLE EVIDENCE
3. When Getting It Right Matters: The Case for High-Quality Policy and Program Impact
Evaluations
4. Randomized Control Trials: A Gold Standard With Feet of Clay?
5. What Is Credible Evidence in Education? The Role of the What Works Clearinghouse in
Informing the Process
6. Evaluation Methods for Producing Actionable Evidence: Contextual Influences on
Adequacy and Appropriateness of Method Choice
PART III. NONEXPERIMENTAL APPROACHES FOR BUILDING CREDIBLE EVIDENCE
7. Demythologizing Causation and Evidence
8. Evidence as Proof and Evidence as Inkling
9. Reasoning With Rigor and Probity: Ethical Premises for Credible Evidence
10. Seeing Is Believing: The Credibility of Image-Based Research and Evaluation
11. Toward a Practical Theory of Evidence for Evaluation
PART IV. CONCLUSIONS
12. Credible Evidence: Changing the Terms of the Debate
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5707-6
2009, 288 pages
Reframing Evaluation
Through Appreciative
Inquiry
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4974-3

2009, 472 pages
Hallie Preskill, University of New Mexico

Tessie Tzavaras Catsambas, En Compass LLC
This insightful work is the first book to introduce
the application of Appreciative Inquiry (AI), an
approach for organizational development and
change, to the practice of evaluation. Authors
Hallie Preskill and Tessie Tzavaras Catsambas lay out the theoretical foundation of
AI and build a bridge between the theory and practice of applying AI to evaluation.
CONTENTS
1. Introducing Appreciative Inquiry
2. Using Appreciative Inquiry in Evaluation Practice
3. Focusing the Evaluation Using Appreciative Inquiry
4. Designing and Conducting Interviews and Surveys Using Appreciative Inquiry
5. Using Appreciative Inquiry to Develop Evaluation Systems
6. Building Evaluation Capacity Through Appreciative Inquiry
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-0951-8
2006, 192 pages
Textbooks
What Counts as
Credible Evidence in
Applied Research and
Evaluation Practice?
Interviews With Expert Evaluators
Textbooks
44 Evaluation
Program Evaluation
and Performance
Measurement
Evaluation Roots
Tracing Theorists Views and Influences
Marvin C. Alkin, University of California,
Los Angeles
An Introduction to Practice
The book examines current evaluation theories

and traces their evolution within the framework
of theories building upon theories and how
evaluation theories are related to each other.
Author Marvin C. Alkin posits that evaluation
theories can be classified by the extent to which
they focus on methods, uses, or valuing.
James C. McDavid, University of Victoria, Canada

Laura R. L. Hawthorn
This text offers a conceptual, as well as
practical, introduction to program evaluation and
performance measurement for public and nonprofit organizations. The authors guide readers through conducting quantitative and
qualitative program evaluations and needs assessments, as well as constructing
and implementing performance measurement systems.
CONTENTS
1. Key Concepts and Issues in Program Evaluation and Performance Measurement
2. Understanding and Applying Program Logic Models
3. Research Designs for Program Evaluations
4. Measurement in Program Evaluation
5. Applying Qualitative Evaluation Methods
6. Assessing the Need for Programs
7. Concepts and Issues in Economic Evaluation
8. Performance Measurement as an Approach to Evaluation
9. Design and Implementation of Performance Measurement Systems
10. Using and Sustaining Performance Measurement Systems
11. Program Evaluation and Program Management: Joining Theory and Practice
12. The Nature and Practice of Professional Judgment in Program Evaluation
CONTENTS
PART II. METHODS
PART III. VALUING
PART IV. USE
PART V. SUMMING UP
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2894-2
2004, 440 pages
Evaluation
A Systematic Approach
Seventh Edition
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-0668-5
Peter H. Rossi, University of Massachusetts
2006, 496 pages
Mark W. Lipsey, Vanderbilt Institute for Public

Policy Studies
Howard E. Freeman, University of California,
Los Angeles
Evaluation
Methodology Basics
The Nuts and Bolts of Sound Evaluation
E. Jane Davidson, Davidson Consulting Limited
This valuable text provides a step-by-step
guide for doing a real evaluation by focusing on
the main kinds of big picture questions that
evaluators usually need to answer, and how the
nature of such questions is linked to evaluation
methodology choices.
CONTENTS
1. What is Evaluation?
2. Defining the Purpose of the Evaluation
3. Identifying Evaluative Criteria
4. Organizing the Criteria & Identifying Potential Sources of Evidence
5. Dealing With the Causation Issue
6. Values in Evaluation
7. Determining Importance
8. The Merit Determination Step
9. Synthesis Methodology
10. Putting it All Together
11. Meta-Evaluation
In this completely revised Seventh Edition,the

authorsinclude the latest techniques and
approaches to evaluation as well as guidelines
to tailor evaluations to fit programs and social contexts. Additionally, scores of
new examples help students understand how evaluators deal with various critical
issues.
CONTENTS
1. An Overview of Program Evaluation
2. Tailoring Evaluations
3. Identifying Issues and Formulating Questions
4. Assessing the Need for a Program
5. Expressing and Assessing Program Theory
6. Assessing and Monitoring Program Process
7. Measuring and Monitoring Program Outcomes
8. Assessing Program Impact: Randomized Field Experiments
9. Assessing Program Impact: Alternative Designs
10. Detecting, Interpreting, and Analyzing Program Effects
11. Measuring Efficiency
12. The Social Context of Evaluation
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-7619-0894-4
2003, 480 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2930-7

2005, 280 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Business and Marketing 45
Essentials of Business
Research
Research Methods in
Business and Marketing
A Guide to Doing Your Research Project
Designing and
Managing a Research
Project
This concise, student-friendly text cuts through

the jargon of research terminology to present a
clear guide to the basics of business research.
It takes the student through the entire research
process, uses actual student case examples, and
explains the role of the supervisor and how to
meet their expectations.
A Business Students Guide

Second Edition
Michael Jay Polonsky
CONTENTS
David S. Waller, University of Technology, Sydney,

Australia
1. An Introduction to Business Research

2. Developing a Research Topic
3. Conducting a Literature Review
4. Addressing Ethical Issues
5. Establishing a Research Design
6. Primary Data Collection
7. Using Secondary Data
8. Sampling
9. Analyzing Quantitative Data
10. Analyzing Qualitative Data
11. Writing Up and Presenting Your Research
This practical, step-by-step guide shows business

students how to successfully conduct a research
project, from choosing the topic through to presenting the results. The book is
divided into sections on preparing and planning the project, undertaking the
research, and finally communicating the results.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE FOUNDATIONS
1. Introduction
2. Choosing a Topic
3. The Role of the Supervisor
4. Group Dynamics and the Role of Conflict
5. Ethical Considerations
PART II. UNDERTAKING THE RESEARCH
6. Planning the Research Project
7. Literature Review
8. Data Gathering
10. Quantitative Data Analysis
11. Establishing Recommendations
PART III. COMMUNICATING THE RESULTS
12. Presenting the Results
13. Writing the Report
14. Oral Presentations
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0133-8

2010, 336 pages
Making the Most of

Your Placement
John Neugebauer, Independent Consultant
Jane Evans-Brain, Independent Consultant
This study guide is an invaluable resource for
any student doing a work placement as part
of their degree. The text provides practical and
thorough advice to help students select, prepare,
and navigate through their first experience of
organizational life.
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7775-3

2011, 296 pages
CONTENTS
PART I. GETTING A PLACEMENT
1. Finding a Placement
2. Applying for Roles
3. Interviews and Assessment Centres
4. The Important Not-So-Small Print
PART II. WORKING ON YOUR PLACEMENT
5. Settling into Your Placement
6. Key Skills
7. Writing Reports
8. Learning from Your Placement
PART III. UNIVERSITY AND PLACEMENT
9. University Research Principles
PART IV. PLACEMENTS IN PERSPECTIVE
10. Back at University
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7568-6

2010, 184 pages
Textbooks
Jonathan Wilson, Anglia Ruskin University, U.K.
New edition!
Textbooks
46 Research Methods in Business and Marketing
Data Analysis in
Business Research
Cost-Effectiveness
Analysis
A Step-By-Step Nonparametric Approach
Methods and Applications

Second Edition
D. Israel, XLRI, Jamshedpur

This book discusses tools pertaining to sample
tests, providing a compendium of major nonparametric tests all in one text. It is a friendly
guide for anyone doinga dissertation data
analysis.
CONTENTS
1. One-Sample Tests
2. Two Independent Samples Tests
3. Two Related Samples Tests
4. K Related Samples Tests
5. K Independent Samples Tests
6. Measures of Correlation and Association
7. Tests of Interaction and Multiple Comparison
8. Multivariate Nonparametric Test for Interdependence
Henry M. Levin, Teachers College Columbia

University
Patrick J. McEwan, Wellesley College
Designed so that an individual can utilize this
book as part of an informal course of self-study
or in a formal course on the subject, the authors
of this text provide readers with the step-by-step methods to plan and implement a
cost-analysis study.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Cost-Analysis
2. Establishing an Analytic Framework
3. The Concept and Measurement of Costs
4. Placing Values on Ingredients
5. Analyzing Costs
6. Cost-Effectiveness Analysis
7. Cost-Benefit Analysis
8. Cost-Utility Analysis
9. The Use of Cost Evaluations
Paperback ISBN: 978-8-1782-9875-7

2009, 320 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-1934-6
Diagnosing
Organizations
2001, 328 pages
Methods, Models, and Processes

Third Edition
Michael I. Harrison, Agency for Healthcare
Research and Quality
The Third Edition of this best-sellershows how
consultants and applied researchers can help
decision makers quickly and flexibly diagnose
problems and challenges and decide how to deal
with them.
CONTENTS
1. Diagnosis: Approaches and Methods
2. Open Systems Models
3. Assessing Individual and Group Behavior
4. System Fits and Organizational Politics
5. Environmental Relations
6. Challenges and Dilemmas of Diagnosis
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2572-9
2005, 192 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Communication 47
Research Methods
in Communication
New EDITION!
Introducing
Communication
Research
An Introduction to Qualitative and Quantitative

Approaches
Second Edition
Arthur Asa Berger, San Francisco State University
Paths of Inquiry
Donald Treadwell, Westfield State College
Focusing on the types of communication research
students will actually utilize in their careers, this
introductory text makes continuous connections
between research and its real world application.
In an engaging and conversational style, Donald
Treadwell introduces the conceptual foundations of communication research,
provides practical guidance on the most commonly used methods, and concludes
with a chapter on writing up and presenting ones findings.
CONTENTS
Prologue: Welcome to Communication Research: Finding your Path
1. Getting Started: Possibilities and Decisions
2. First Decisions: What, Why, How?
3. Ethics: Your Responsibilities as a Researcher
4. Reading Research: To Boldly Go Where Others Have Gone Before
5. Measurement: Research Using Numbers
6. Statistics: Analyzing Your Numbers
7. Sampling: Who, What and How Many?
8. Surveys: Putting Numbers on Opinions
9. Experiments: Researching Cause and Effect
10. Observation: Watching and Listening for In-Depth Understanding
11. Content Analysis: Understanding Text and Image
12. Writing Research: Sharing Your Results
Combining both qualitative and quantitative

research methods, this Second Edition of
bestselling introductory text covers the topics
thoroughly and is clearly written and fun-to-read. This book is ideal for beginning
research students both at the graduate and undergraduate level because it is clear,
concise, and accompanied by many detailed examples.
CONTENTS
1. What Is Research?
2. Library Searches
3. Semiotic Analysis
4. Rhetorical Analysis
5. Ideological Criticism
6. Psychoanalytic Criticism
7. Interviews
8. Historical Analysis
9. Ethnomethodological Research
10. Participant Observation

11. Content Analysis
12. Surveys
13. Experiments
14. A Primer on Descriptive Statistics
15. Nineteen Common Thinking Errors to
Avoid
16. Writing Research Reports
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8777-6

2011, 360 pages
Doing Media Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4457-1
An Introduction
Second Edition
2010, 248 pages

Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/treadwellicr
Susanna Hornig Priest, University of

Nevada - Las Vegas
IBM SPSS DVD, Bound with this Book
Emphasizing conceptual understanding rather

than algebra, this revised edition provides
comprehensive coverage of both quantitative
and qualitative social science methods used in
research about the media and its role in society.
CONTENTS
PART I. ROOTS: SOCIAL SCIENCE FOUNDATIONS
1. A Philosophy of Social Science
2. Foundational Disciplines
3. Mass Communication as a Research Field
PART II. ASKING QUESTIONS AND COLLECTING DATA: CREATING A RESEARCH PLAN
4. Developing a Research Question, Reviewing the Literature, Exploring Data Sources, and
Defining Variables
5. Designing Quantitative Research: Surveys, Experiments, and Quantitative Content Analysis
6. Designing Qualitative Studies: Participant Observation, Interviews, Focus Groups, and
Qualitative Content Analysis
PART III. APPROACHES TO DATA ANALYSIS: BASIC TOOLS
7. Describing a Numerical Data Set and Making Inferences
8. Testing Hypotheses and Exploring Other Relationships
9. Qualitative Analysis: Identifying Themes and Writing Meaningful Summaries
PART IV. RESEARCH IN BROADER CONTEXT: CONTEMPORARY TRENDS IN THE
DISSEMINATION OF RESEARCH RESULTS
10. Research Horizons: Opportunities and Challenges
11. Writing and Presenting the Research Report
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6097-7
2009, 272 pages
Textbooks
Media and
Communication
Research
48 Research Methods in Communication

New!
Content Analysis
Qualitative
Communication
Research Methods
Textbooks
An Introduction to Its Methodology

Klaus Krippendorff, The Annenberg School for
Communication, University of Pennsylvania
The Second Edition is a definitive sourcebook
ofthe history and core principles of content
analysis as well as an essential resource for
present and future studies. The book introduces
readers to ways of analyzing meaningful data
whose physical manifestations are secondary
to the meanings that a particular population of
people brings to them.
CONTENTS
PART I. Conceptualizing CONTENT ANALYSIS
1. History
2. Conceptual Foundation
3. Uses and Inferences
PART II. COMPONENTS OF CONTENT ANALYSES
4. The Logic of Content Analysis Designs
5. Unitizing
6. Sampling
7. Recording/Coding
8. Data Languages
9. Analytical Constructs
PART III. ANALYTICAL PATHS AND EVALUATIVE TECHNIQUES
10. Analytical/Representational Techniques
11. Reliability
12. Computer Aids
13. Validity
14. A Practical Guide
Third Edition
Thomas R. Lindlof, University of Kentucky

Bryan C. Taylor, University of Colorado-Boulder
This book is the only guide dedicated to
qualitative research methods in communication. It
introduces readers to every step of the qualitative
research process, from developing research topics and questions, through writing
a final report. In addition to covering the theories and methods currently used in
qualitative communication research, the authors also discuss important trends
influencing the future of that research.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Qualitative Communication Research
2. Theoretical Traditions and Qualitative Communication Research
3. Design I: Planning Research Projects
4. Design II: Implementing Research Projects
5. Producing Data I: Participating, Observing, and Recording Social Action
6. Producing Data II: Qualitative Interviewing
7. Producing Data III: Analyzing Material Culture and Documents
8. Sensemaking: Qualitative Data Analysis and Interpretation
9. Writing, Authoring, and Publishing
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7473-8
2011, 400 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-1545-4
Techniques of Close
Reading
2004, 440 pages
Barry Brummett, The University of Texas at Austin
The Content Analysis

Guidebook
Kimberly A. Neuendorf, Cleveland State University
In this text, author Kimberly Neuendorf
provides an accessible core text for upper-level
undergraduates and graduate students across
the social sciences. Comprising step-by-step
instructions and practical advice, this text
unravels the complicated aspects of content
analysis.
CONTENTS
1. Defining Content Analysis
2. Milestones in the History of Content Analysis
3. Beyond Description: An Integrative Model of Content Analysis
4. Message Units and Sampling
5. Variables and Predictions
6. Measurement Techniques
7. Reliability
8. Results and Reporting
9. Contexts
In a world in which messages increasingly

ask us to believe, accept, buy, and follow, the
ability to read texts closely in order to gain a
deeper understanding of their meanings is an
indispensable survival skill. This brief book
provides students with this skill. Renowned
scholar and professor Barry Brummett explains
and explores the various ways to read messages (such as speeches or magazine
ads), teaching students how to see deeper levels of meaning and to share those
insights with others.
CONTENTS
1. On Noticing What You See and Hear
2. Theories, Methods, Techniques
3. Using Form for Close Reading
4. Transformations in Texts: Seeing Beneath the Surface
5. Ideology and Argument
6. Conclusion: A Close Reading Using Multiple Techniques
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7265-9
2010, 152 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/brummettstudy
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-1978-0

2002, 308 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Counseling | Research Methods in Criminology / Criminal Justice 49
Research Methods in Counseling
New!
Doing Criminological
Research
Evaluation and Application

Second Edition
Rick Houser, University of Alabama at Birmingham
Pamela Davies, Peter Francis, and Victor Jupp,

Northumbria University, U.K.
Written for research methods courses in

counseling and education, this Second Edition
emphasizes the importance of being a good
consumer of research and shows practitioners
how to conduct research in practice. The new
edition includes new chapters on evidence-based practice statistics, mixed
methods, and online literature searches,new articles from the literature, and more.
The new edition of this bestselling textbook

brings criminological research alive for students.
It introduces the processes and practicalities of
preparing, doing, experiencing and reflecting
upon criminological research.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. INTRODUCTION TO THE RESEARCH PROCESS

1. Science and the Research Process
2. Searching Articles in Professional Journals and Online Databases
3. Basics of Statistical Methods
4. Quantitative Research and Research Designs
5. Qualitative Research Methods
6. Mixed Methods Research
7. Evidence-Based Research Methods
8. Ethics and Research
PART II. EVALUATING ARTICLES IN THE PROFESSIONAL LITERATURE
9. Evaluating the Literature Review
10. Evaluating the Purpose Statement and Hypotheses
11. Evaluating the Methods SectionSampling Methods
12. Evaluating the Methods SectionProcedures
13. Evaluating the Methods SectionInstruments
14. Evaluating the Results Section
15. Evaluating the Discussion Section
PART III. APPLICATION OF RESEARCH AND EVALUATION
16. Developing a Research Proposal and Conducting Research in Practice
17. Development and Application of Program Evaluation Research
18. Current and Future Issues in Counseling and Educational Research
PART I. PREPARING CRIMINOLOGICAL RESEARCH

1. Planning Criminological Research
2. Formulating Criminological Research Questions
3. Methodological Approaches to Criminological Research
4. The Politics of Criminological Research
PART II. DOING CRIMINOLOGICAL RESEARCH
5. Undertaking a Criminological Literature Review
6. Mapping and Using Crime Data in Criminological Research
7. Doing Interviews in Prison
8. Using Survey Research to Measure Crime, Fear and Victimization
9. Carrying out Appreciative Ethnography in the Context of Policing
10. Using Images to Understand Crime and Justice
11. Doing Comparative Criminological Research
12. Using the Internet to Research Crime and Justice
PART III. REFLECTING ON CRIMINOLOGICAL RESEARCH
13. Ethics and Criminological Research
14. Researching Crime, Criminal Justice and Social Divisions
15. The Media and Criminological Research
16. Criminological Research and Critical Inquiry
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0653-1
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5661-1

2009, 296 pages
New!
Snapshots of Research
Readings in Criminology and Criminal Justice
Richard D. Hartley, University of Texas-San Antonio
This supplemental textbook comprised of
scholarly articles exemplifying research methods
in criminology and criminal justice. The variety of
readings will provide the student with a grasp of
the fundamentals of research, as well as a more
in depth understanding of each of the specific
methods used in everyday life.
CONTENTS
1. The Scientific Method and the
Research Process in Criminology and
Criminal Justice
2. Criminological Theory and the Scientific
Method
3. Ethics in the Research Process
4. Conceptualization and Measurement
5. Sampling
6. Experimental and Quasi Experimental
Research Designs
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8919-0
2011, 464 pages
7. Survey Research and Interviews

8. Qualitative Research Participant
Observation, Focus Groups and Case
Studies
9. Unobtrusive Methods Secondary
Analysis, Content Analysis, Crime
Mapping, and Meta-Analysis
11. Evaluation Research and Policy Analysis
Textbooks
Counseling and
Educational Research
Research Methods in
Criminology / Criminal Justice
50 Research Methods in Criminology / Criminal Justice
The Practice of
Research in
Criminology and
Criminal Justice
NEW EDITION!
Textbooks
Fundamentals of
Research in
Criminology and
Criminal Justice
Fourth Edition
Second Edition
Ronet Bachman, University of Delaware
Ronet Bachman, University of Delaware
Russell K. Schutt, University of Massachusetts,

Boston

Boston
This text is a concise resource for understanding the multifaceted subject of
research methods in the field of criminology and criminal justice. This book
uniquely helps to teach research design and techniques within the context of
substantive criminology and criminal justice issues of interest to students and the
field. This is an excellent introductory methods text for undergraduate research
courses in the fields of Criminal Justice and Criminology.
CONTENTS
1. Science, Society, and Criminological Research
2. The Process and Problems of Criminological Research
3. Research Ethics and Philosophies
5. Sampling
6. Causation and Research Design
7. Survey Research
8. Qualitative Methods and Data Analysis
9. Analyzing Content: Crime Mapping and Historical, Secondary, and Content Analysis
10. Evaluation and Policy Analysis
11. Describing Quantitative Data
12. Reporting Research Results
Like its predecessors, the Fourth Edition provides complete coverage of the use
and results of the contemporary methods employed in criminology and criminal
justice research today. This text teaches research design and techniques within
the context of substantive criminology and criminal justice issues of interest to
students who will become professionals in the field.
CONTENTS
1. Science, Society, and Criminological Research
2. The Process and Problems of Criminological Research
5. Sampling
7. Experimental Designs
8. Survey Research
9. Qualitative Methods and Analysis: Observing, Participating and Listening
10. Analyzing Content: Historical, Secondary, and Content Analysis and Crime Mapping
11. Evaluation and Policy Analysis
13. Reporting Research Results
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7875-0
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-9176-6
2011, 560 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/prccj4e
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/bachmanfrccj2e
Other titles from Russell K. Schutt...

Fundamentals of Social Work Research (p. 63)
Investigating the Social World (Read about Schutt, p. 65)
Making Sense of the Social World (p. 66)
The Practice of Social Work Research (p. 63)
Research Methods in Psychology (p. 58)
About THE AUTHORS

Ronet Bachman, PhD, is Professor of Sociology and Criminal Justice at the University of Delaware. She is coauthor of Statistical
Methods for Crime and Criminal Justice and coeditor of Explaining Crime and Criminology: Essays in Contemporary Criminal
Theory. In addition, she is author of Death and Violence on the Reservation and coauthor of Stress, Culture, and Aggression in the
United States as well as numerous articles and papers.
For Russell K. Schutts bio, please see page 65.
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Education 51
Research Methods in Education
Quantitative, Qualitative, and Mixed Approaches
Fourth Edition
Burke Johnson and Larry Christensen, University of South Alabama

Educational Research is a comprehensive introductory research methods textbook for upper level
undergraduate and graduate students. Readers will develop an understanding of the multiple research
methods and strategies used in education and related fields, the ability to read and critically evaluate
published research, and the ability to write a proposal, construct a questionnaire, and conduct an
empirical research study on their own.
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-7828-6
2011, 520 pages
|
CONTENTS
Key Features
Definitions of key terms are provided in margins of text for easy reference
Includes separate chapters on How to Construct a Questionnaire and How to Write a Research
Proposal
Provides balanced coverage of quantitative, qualitative, and mixed research
Has the most comprehensive companion website on the market
1. Introduction to Educational Research
2. Quantitative, Qualitative, and Mixed
Research
PART II. PLANNING THE RESEARCH STUDY
3. How to Review the Literature and Develop
Research Questions
4. How to Write a Research Proposal
5. Research Ethics
PART III. FOUNDATIONS OF RESEARCH
6. Standardized Measurement and
Assessment
7. How to Construct a Questionnaire
8. Methods of Data Collection
9. Sampling in Quantitative, Qualitative, and
Mixed Research
10. Validity of Research Results in
Quantitative, Qualitative, and Mixed
Research
PART IV. SELECTING A RESEARCH METHOD
11. Experimental Research
12. Quasi-Experimental and Single-Case
Research
13. Nonexperimental Quantitative Research
14. Qualitative Research
15. Historical Research
16. Mixed Research
About the Authors

Burke Johnson is
a Professor in the
Professional Studies
Department at the
University of South
Alabama. His PhD
is from the REMS
(research, evaluation,
measurement, and statistics) program in the
College of Education at the University of Georgia.
He also has graduate degrees in psychology,
sociology, and public administration, which
have provided him with a multidisciplinary
perspective on research methodology. He has
published in such journals as the Educational
Researcher, Evaluation and Program Planning,
Evaluation Review, Journal of Mixed Methods
Research, Journal of Educational Psychology,
and Quantity and Quality.
PART V. ANALYZING THE DATA

18. Inferential Statistics
19. Data Analysis in Qualitative and Mixed
Research
PART VI. WRITING THE RESEARCH REPORT
20. How to Prepare a Research Report and
Use APA Style Guidelines
Larry Christensen
received his PhD
degree from the
University of Southern
Mississippi in 1967.
After completing his
doctoral studies he
accepted a position
as an Assistant Professor of Psychology at
Texas A&M University. He remained at Texas
A&M University for the next 25 years and was
promoted to Professor of Psychology in 1982.
In 1994 he accepted the position of chairperson
of the Psychology Department at the University
of South Alabama, a position he currently holds.
He is the author or coauthor of three textbooks
focusing on research methods and statistics,
one of which is currently in its 11th edition.
Textbooks
New Edition!
52 Research Methods in Education
Textbooks
Research and
Evaluation in
Education and
Psychology
Self-Study Teacher
Research
Improving Your Practice Through Collaborative
Inquiry
Anastasia P. Samaras, George Mason University
Integrating Diversity With Quantitative,

Qualitative, and Mixed Methods
Third Edition
Designed to help teachers plan, implement, and

assess a manageable self-study research project,
this unique textbook covers the foundation and
methods of self-study research.
Donna M. Mertens, Gallaudet University

Covering all methodological paradigms, this text
combines theory with practical advice on how to
do research and evaluation while integrating issues of social justice and cultural
diversity into the full spectrum of research methods.
CONTENTS
1. An Introduction to Research
2. Evaluation
3. Literature Review and Focusing the Research
4. Experimental and Quasi-Experimental Research
5. Causal Comparative and Correlational Research
6. Survey Methods
7. Single-Case Research
8. Qualitative Methods
9. History and Narrative Study of Lives
11. Sampling
12. Data Collection
13. Data Analysis, Interpretation, and Use
PART I. THE 6Ws OF SELF-STUDY RESEARCH

1. Understanding Self-Study: What and Why
2. Overview of the Self-Study Process: What and How
3. The Self-Study Community: When and Where and Who
4. The Self-Study Research Methodology: Why and How
5. Self-Study Methods: How
PART II. YOUR SELF-STUDY PROJECT
6. Design
7. Protect
8. Organize Data
9. Collect Data
10. Analyze Data
11. Assess Research Quality
12. Write
13. Present and Publish
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7190-4
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7207-9
2010, 552 pages
2011, 344 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/mertensstudy
Student Study Site, www/sagepub.com/samaras
CONTENTS
Doing Quantitative
Research in Education
with SPSS
New!
Conducting
Second Edition
Daniel Muijs, University of Southampton, U.K.
Guide to Completing a Major Project

Daniel J. Boudah, East Carolina University
This book walks readers through each step of a
research project or thesis, including developing
a research question, performing a literature
search, developing a research plan, collecting and
analyzing data, drawing conclusions, and sharing
the conclusions with others. Throughout the book,
Daniel J. Boudah covers all types of research
(including experimental, descriptive, qualitative, group designs, and single subject
designs) and helps readers link research questions to designs, designs to data
sources, and data sources to appropriate analyses.
CONTENTS
1. Research in Education
2. Identifying a Research Problem, Question, and Searching Relevant Literature
3. Understanding Relevant Literature and Writing a Literature Review
4. Issues in Validity and Trustworthiness
5. Designing and Conducting Experimental Research
6. Designing and Conducting Qualitative Research
7. Designing and Conducting Descriptive Research
8. Creating a Research Proposal
10. Analyzing and Interpreting Qualitative Research
11. Analyzing and Interpreting Descriptive Research
12. Writing Research Reports
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7902-3
2011, 336 pages
This accessible and authoritative introduction is

essential for education students and researchers
needing to use quantitative methods for the first
time. Using datasets from real-life educational
research and avoiding the use of mathematical
formulae, the author guides students through the essential techniques that they
will need to know, explaining each procedure using the latest version of SPSS. The
datasets can also be downloaded from the books website, enabling students to
practice the techniques for themselves.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Quantitative Research
2. Experimental and Quasi-Experimental Research
3. Designing Non-Experimental Studies
4. Validity, Reliability and Generalizability
5. Introduction to PASW Statistics (IBM SPSS) and the Data Set
6. Univariate Statistics
7. Bivariate Analysis: Comparing Two Groups
8. Bivariate Analysis: Looking at the Relationship between Two Variables
9. Multivariate Analysis: Using Regression Models to Look at the Relationship between
Several Predictors and One Dependent Variable
10. Using Analysis of Variance to Compare More than Two Groups
11. Developing Scales and Measures: Item and Factor Analysis
12. One Step Beyond: Introduction to Multilevel Modeling and Structural Equation Modeling
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0324-1
2011, 264 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Education 53
Art Practice as
Research
Marilyn Lichtman, Virginia Tech
Graeme Sullivan, Columbia University,

Teachers College
This text uses published research articles to

teach students how to understand and evaluate
qualitative research in education. It gives students
a well-rounded and practical look at what
qualitative research is, along withguidance on how
to read, analyze, and design studies themselves.
CONTENTS
PART I. QUALITATIVE RESEARCH APPROACHES
1. Reading Ethnography
2. Reading Grounded Theory
3. Reading Phenomenology
4. Reading Case Studies
5. Reading Action Research
6. Reading Narrative
7. Reading Mixed Methods
PART II. ISSUES AT THE FOREFRONT OF THE QUALITATIVE RESEARCH FIELD
8. Clarifying Research Approaches
9. Qualitative Research in the New Millennium
10. Standards of Evidence
11. Review Boards, Research Ethics, and Academic Freedom
12. Writing Up Results
13. Reflexivity
14. Negotiating Through Graduate School
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7526-1
2011, 328 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/lichtmanreadings
Inquiry in Visual Arts

Second Edition
Substantially updated and revised, Art Practice

as Research, Second Edition presents a
compelling theory that the creative and cultural
inquiry undertaken by artists is a form of
research. Sullivan argues that legitimate research goals can be achieved by
choosing different methods than those offered by the social sciences. Artists
emphasize the role of the imaginative intellect in creating, criticizing, and
constructing knowledge that is not only new but also has the capacity to transform
human understanding.
CONTENTS
Introduction: Re-Viewing Visual Arts Research
PART I. CONTEXTS FOR ART PRACTICE AS RESEARCH
1. Pigment to Pixel
2. Paradigms Lost
3. Practice and Beyond
PART II. THEORIZING ART PRACTICE AS RESEARCH
4. Art Practice as Research
5. Visual Knowing
6. Artist as Theorist
PART III. VISUAL ARTS RESEARCH PRACTICES
7. Visualizing Practices
8. Visual Arts Projects
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7451-6
2010, 312 pages
in Education
Quantitative Research
in Education
A Users Guide
Second Edition
A Primer
Marilyn Lichtman, Virginia Tech

Designed to help education students
become qualitative researchers,
thisupdatededitionbrings together the
essential elements of qualitative research,
including traditions and influences in the field,
withpractical, step-by-step coverage of each stage of the research process.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction and Overview of the Field
2. Insights From the Past
3. Learning How to Be a Qualitative Researcher
5. Designing Your Research: Choosing From a Variety of Approaches
6. Embarking on Qualitative Research
7. Self-Reflexivity and Subjectivity
8. The Role and Function of a Literature Review
9. Learning About Others Through Interviewing
10. Learning About Others Through Observations and Other Techniques
11. Making Meaning From Your Data
12. Communicating Your Ideas
13. Judging and Evaluating
14. Thinking About the Future
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7052-5
2010, 288 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/lichtman2estudy
Wayne K. Hoy, The Ohio State University

Designed to allay anxiety about quantitative
research, this practical text introduces readers
to the nature of research, and then presents the
meaning of concepts, variables, and research
problems in the field of education. Rich with
concrete examples and illustrations, the Primer
emphasizes a conceptual understanding of quantitative methods and statistics
while teaching strategies and techniques for developing an original research
hypothesis.
CONTENTS
1. The Nature of Research and Science
2. Concepts, Variables, and Research Problems
3. Conceptual Foundations of Statistics
4. Analyzing the Structure and Substance of Hypotheses
5. Generating Hypotheses
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7326-7
2010, 160 pages
Textbooks
Understanding and
Evaluating Qualitative
Textbooks
54 Research Methods in Education
The Ethics of Research

with Children and
Young People
Key Issues for

Education Researchers
Diana Burton, Professor of Education and Pro Vice
Chancellor at Liverpool John Moores University
A Practical Handbook
Steve Bartlett, Professor of Education Studies at

the University of Wolverhampton
Priscilla Alderson, Institute of Education, U.K.

Virginia Morrow, University of Oxford, U.K.
Alderson & Morrow cover ethics at every stage
of research, and with all kinds of research
participants, particularly focusing on those who
are vulnerable or neglected. They break down the
process of researching with children and young people into ten stages, each with
its own set of related questions and problems, to help the reader understand the
ethical issues which they need to address at each stage of their research.
Outlining philosophical approaches to research,

this book will guide and support students
through their research, offering practical advice
on designing, planning and completing the
research and on writing it up. It talks through techniques in both quantitative and
qualitative methods, how to design research instruments, and the collecting and
analyzing of data.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. The Development of Education Research

2. Research Paradigms and Social Perspectives
3. An Ethical Approach to Research
4. Getting Started: Beginning a Research Project
5. Accessing and Using Literature
6. Research Strategies: Case Studies and Experiments
7. Questionnaires
8. Interviews
9. Observation
10. Research Biographies and Logs
11. Use of Existing Documents
12. Writing up and Final Conclusions
1. Introduction
2. Defining Some Terms
3. Research Ethics
4. The Purpose of This Book: Starting from Uncertainty and the Question Format
5. Researchers as Insiders or Outsiders
6. Overview of Contents
PART I. THE PLANNING STAGES
7. Planning the Research: Purpose and Methods
8. Assessing Harms and Benefits
9. Respect for Rights: Privacy and Confidentiality
10. Designing Research: Selection and Participation
11. Money Matters: Contracts, Funding Research and Paying Participants
12. Reviewing Aims and Methods: Ethics Guidance and Committees
PART II. THE DATA COLLECTING STAGE
13. Information
14. Consent
PART III. THE WRITING, REPORTING AND FOLLOW UP STAGES
15. Disseminating and Implementing the Findings
16. The Impact on Children
17. Conclusion
18. References And Resources
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7358-3

2010 192 pages
Introduction to
Research Methods in
Education
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8570-2137-3

Keith F. Punch, University of Western Australia

This book assumes no previous knowledge
of the subject, and focuses on helping the
reader develop a clear, logical and conceptual
understanding of the nature of empirical research
in education, and of how those ideas lead to and
underlie the principal research techniques.
Introduction to
A Critical Thinking Approach
W. Newton Suter, University of Arkansas at
Little Rock
CONTENTS
Engaging, informative, and easy to follow,

this text enables students to think clearly and
critically about the scientific process of research.
The author makes research accessible to
teachers and equips them with the skills and
understanding that enable the evaluation of
published research including quantitative, qualitative, and action research.
CONTENTS
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
PART II. RESEARCH AS PROCESS
PART III. DATA COLLECTION
PART IV. DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
PART V. CONSUMER TO PRODUCER
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-1390-4
1. Introduction
2. Theory and Method in Education Research
3. The Context of Ethics in Education Research
4. Research Questions
5. From Research Questions to Data
6. Literature Searching and Reviewing
7. Qualitative Research Design
8. Collecting Qualitative Data
9. The Analysis of Qualitative Data
10. Quantitative Research Design
11. Collecting Quantitative Data
12. The Analysis of Quantitative Data
14. Evaluation
15. Research Writing
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7018-6
2009, 398 pages
2006, 496 pages

Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/eic
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Health 55
Research Methods in Health
Award winner!
New!
David Grembowski, University of Washington
Designing and Conducting Gender,

Sex, and Health Research
American Journal of Nursing

Book of the Year
John L. Oliffe and Lorraine J. Greaves, The University of British Columbia
This valuable text provides readers with the

methods to evaluate health programs and the
expertise to navigate the political terrain so as to
work more effectively with decision makers and
other groups.
This is the first resource dedicated to critically examining gender and sex study
design, methods, and analysis in health research. The authors draw attention to
the methodological complexities, and offer ways to thoughtfully address these by
drawing on empirical examples across a range of topics and disciplines.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. CONTEXT & CONCEPTS
1. Why Put Gender and Sex Into Health Research?
PART II. DESIGN
2. Sex and Gender: Beyond the Binaries
3. Implications of Sex and Gender for Health Research: From Concepts
4. Approaches to the Measurement of Gender
5. Measuring Biological Sex
PART III: THE DOING OF SEX AND GENDER METHODS
6. Fieldwork: Observations and Interviews
7. Visual Methods in Gender and Health Research
8. Secondary Analysis: Gender, Age, Place
9. Content and Discourse Analysis
10. Approaches to Examining Gender Relations in Health Research
11. Developing a Gender Role Socialization Scale
PART IV. POLICY, PROCESS AND PRODUCTS
12. Gender, Health, Research and Public Policy
13. Boundary Spanning: Knowledge Translation as Feminist Action Research in Virtual
Communities of practice
14. Design, Methods and Knowledge Exchange: Connections and Pathways
1. Introduction
2. Health Program Evaluation
3. The Evaluation Process
4. Act I: Asking the Question
5. Developing Evaluation Questions
6. Act II: Answering the Question
7. Scene I: Designing the Evaluation
8. Evaluation of Program Impacts
9. Cost-Effectiveness Analysis
10. Evaluation of Program Implementation
11. Act II: Answering the Question
12. Scene II: Planning and Conducting the
Evaluation
13. Population and Sampling

14. Measurement and Data Collection
15. Data Analysis
16. Act III: Use of the Answers in DecisionMaking
17. Scene I: Translate Answers Back into
Policy Language and Developing
Recommendations
18. Scene II: Development of Dissemination
Plan
19. Scene III: Use of the Answers
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-1847-9

2001, 344 pages
Introductory Statistics
for Health and Nursing
Using SPSS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8243-6

May 2011, 328 pages
Louise Marston, University College London, U.K.
New!
With the inclusion of real-world data and a

host of health-related examples, thisisa highly
accessibleintroductory statistics text ideal for
all health science and nursing students.This
accessible text avoids using long and off-putting
statistical formulae in favor of non-daunting
practical and SPSS-based examples.
Technology-Based
Health Promotion
Sheana Bull, University of Colorado, Denver
Integrating detailed case studies and interactive
skill-building exercises throughout, this is the
first textbook of its kind to offer students an
introduction to best practices for using technology
in health promotion programs.
CONTENTS
1. A Primer on Technology Based Health Promotion
2. Ethical Issues in Technology Based Health Promotion
3. Technology Based Health Program Development
4. Technology Based Program Implementation
5. Program Evaluation for Technology Based Health Promotion
6. Case Studies in Computer-Based Health Promotion
7. Case Studies in Internet-Based Health Promotion
8. Case Studies in Mobile Phone-Based Health Promotion
CONTENTS
1. Getting Started with Data and SPSS
2. Data Management
3. Study Designs
4. Probability
5. Summary Statistics for Continuous Data
6. Summary Statistics for Categorical Data
7. Samples and Populations
8. Comparing Two Categorical Variables
9. Comparing Means
10. Non-Parametric Tests
11. Assessing Associations with a Continuous Outcome
12. Assessing Associations with a Categorical Outcome
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7483-2
2010, 264 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7060-0

2011, 296 pages
Textbooks
The Practice of Health

Program Evaluation
56 Research Methods in Health | Research Methods in Politics from cq press
Textbooks
Your Undergraduate
Dissertation in Health
and Social Care
Qualitative Methods
for Health Research
Second Edition
Judith Green and Nicki Thorogood, London School

of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, U.K.
Nicholas Walliman, Oxford Brookes University, U.K.

Jane Appleton
This revised edition has been specially tailored
to the needs of those studying health, social care
and related subjects.
CONTENTS
1. Whats It All For?
2. What Types of Dissertations Are There?
3. What Will It Be About?
4. How Do I Get Started?
5. Whats All This About Philosophy?
6. How Do I Write A Proposal?
7. What About Working and Planning My
Time?
8. Where and How Do I Get Hold of All the
Necessary Background Information?
9. How Can I Manage All the Notes?
10. Arguments - Why Do I Need Them?
11. What Sorts of Data Will I Find?
12. Appraising the Quality of the Evidence
13. Whats All This About Ethics?
14. Whats All This About Research
Governance?
15. How Do I Get Hold of Data?

16. What Do I Do with the Information When
Ive Got It?
17. When Do I Need To Combine Data
Collection with Analysis?
18. How Can I Create a Mini World To
Manipulate?
19. What About Referencing?
20. Writing It Up
21. How on Earth Can I Manage such a
Long Piece of Writing?
22. What Can I Do To Make My Work Look
Interesting and Easy To Read?
23. Who Else Might Be Interested in My
Writing?
This book provides a thorough and practical

introduction to designing, conducting, and
appraising qualitative research. The authorsfocus
on applied research, but cover the essentials of
theory and principles in an accessible way, with
easy-to-follow guidance on how to apply core research skills to the particular
contexts of health research.
CONTENTS
PART I. PRINCIPLES AND APPROACHES IN QUALITATIVE HEALTH RESEARCH
1. Qualitative Methodology and Health Research
2. Developing Qualitative Research Designs
3. Responsibilities, Ethics and Values
PART II. GENERATING AND ANALYSING DATA
4. In-depth Interviews
5. Group Interviews
6. Observational Methods
7. Using Documentary Sources
8. Analysing Qualitative Data
PART III. DOING QUALITATIVE WORK FOR HEALTH
9. Qualitative Research in Practice: Settings and Contexts
10. Writing up Qualitative Work
11. Reading and Appraising Qualitative Outputs
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7074-2
2009, 320 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7070-4

2009, 288 pages
Research Methods for

Health Care Practice
Frances Griffiths, University of Warwick, U.K.
Research Methods in Politics

Offerings from CQ Press
New!
A Stata Companion to
Political Analysis
The book provides useful examples from

health care research throughout to illustrate
the application of the techniques and methods
discussed. The book provides discussion of all the
key issues and stages of research, including user
involvement in research, research ethics, deciding
on a research approach, and data collection and
analysis methods.
Second Edition
Philip H. Pollock III, University of Central Florida

A step-by-step guide, this Second Edition
contains over 50 exercises, customized data sets,
annotated screenshots, and boxes that highlight
Statas special capabilities. Updates include
new datasets, coverage of the Stata Graph
Editor, enhanced discussion of graph types, and
guidance on using Internet-available data.
CONTENTS
PART I. RESEARCH FOR HEALTH CARE PRACTICE
PART II. GETTING STARTED ON YOUR RESEARCH
PART III. CONSIDERING THE ETHICS OF YOUR RESEARCH
PART IV. INVOLVING USERS IN YOUR RESEARCH
PART V. PREPARING TO DESIGN RESEARCH FOR HEALTH CARE PRACTICE
PART VI. USING EXISTING DATA IN RESEARCH FOR HEALTH CARE PRACTICE
PART VII. COLLECTING AND EXPLORING NEW DATA USING QUALITATIVE METHODS
PART VIII. COLLECTING AND EXPLORING NEW DATA USING QUANTITATIVE METHODS
PART IX. ANALYSING DATA IN RESEARCH FOR HEALTH CARE PRACTICE
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Stata
4. Making Comparisons
5. Making Controlled Comparisons
6. Making Inferences about Sample Means
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-3577-7
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-6087-1671-5
2010, 224 pages
2011, 225 pages
7. Chi-square and Measures of Association

8. Correlation and Linear Regression
9. Dummy Variables and Interaction Effects
10. Logistic Regression
11. Doing Your Own Political Analysis
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in PoliticsOfferings from CQ Press 57
The Essentials of
Political Analysis
Political Science
Research Methods
Janet Buttolph Johnson, H. T. Reynolds, and

Jason D. Mycoff, University of Delaware
Third Edition
CONTENTS
1. The Definition and Measurement of Concepts
2. Measuring and Describing Variables
3. Proposing Explanations, Framing Hypotheses, and Making Comparisons
4. The How Else? Question: Making Controlled Comparisons
5. Sampling and Inference
6. Foundations of Statistical Inference
7. Tests of Significance and Measures of Association
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8728-9606-2
2008, 226 pages
An SPSS Companion to
Political Analysis
Dont let an introduction to research methods

be your students least favorite (and most
intimidating) political science course. Relevant,
timely, insightful, comprehensive, and always
mindful of their student audience, the authors
have revamped their popular text so that the sixth edition is friendlier and more
intuitive than everthe perfect gateway to understanding not just the how but
also the why behind research into politics.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Studying Politics Scientifically
3. The Building Blocks of Social Scientific Research: Hypotheses, Concepts, and Variables
4. The Building Blocks of Social Scientific Research: Measurement
5. Research Design
6. Conducting a Literature Review Selecting a Research Topic
7. Sampling
8. Making Empirical Observations: Direct and Indirect Observation
9. Document Analysis: Using the Written Record
10. Survey Research and Interviewing
11. Statistics: First Steps
12. Investigating Relationships between Two Variables
13. Multivariate Analysis
14. The Research Report: An Annotated Example
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8728-9442-6
2007, 572 pages
Third Edition
Working with Political

Science Research
Methods
In his popular workbook, An SPSS Companion

to Political Analysis*, Philip H. Pollock III gets
students using actual political data and working
with a software tool that prepares them for future
political science courses.
Problems and Exercises

Second Edition
*SPSS was acquired by IBM in October 2009
Janet Buttolph Johnson and H. T. Reynolds,

University of Delaware
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to SPSS
4. Making Comparisons
5. Making Controlled Comparisons
6. Making Inferences about Sample Means
7. Chi-square and Measures of Association
9. Dummy Variables and Interaction Effects
11. Doing Your Own Political Analysis
This companion workbook gives students the

perfect opportunity to practice each of the
methods presented in the text. To maximize
their ability to master each technique, the workbook is organized to parallel the
text chapter for chapter, breaking out each aspect of the research process into
manageable parts, and comes with updated data sets and primary documents.
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8728-9494-5
2007, 168 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-8728-9607-9

2008, 237 pages
Visit www.college.cqpress.com
to request your exam copies.
Textbooks
Student anxiety runs high given the seemingly

intimidating nature of the methods course. Brief
and accessible, his text walks students through
the basicsmeasuring concepts, formulating and
testing hypotheses, describing variablesand
uses key terms, chapter-opening objectives, more
than eighty tables and figures, and class-tested chapter exercises to promote skill
application and aid student review.
Sixth Edition
58 Research Methods in Psychology

Textbooks
New!

Investigating Human Behavior
Paul Nestor and Russell K. Schutt, University of Massachusetts, Boston
Using substantive research stories to illustrate the presentation of research methods in each chapter,
this textbook presents systematically the entire research process and its major variants within a unifying
conceptual framework.
Key Features
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6049-6
Research Methods in Psychology uses substantive research stories to illustrate the presentation of
research methods in each chapter.
A full chapter on ethics is complemented in the chapters that follow by end-of-chapter exercises
applying ethics to the topic at hand.
Each chapter will have an interesting overarching thematic issue or topic, illustrated by real data, that
will teach students the concepts and methods in an applied fashion.
CONTENTS
More illustrations than comparable texts visually reinforce key concepts and techniques.
1. Uncommon Sense: Scientific Method

and Human Reasoning
2. The Foundations of Psychological
Research
3. Ethics
4. Theory and Measurement
5. Sampling and Surveys
6. Simple Experimental Designs
7. Complex Experimental Designs
8. Quasi-Experimental Designs
9. Small N Designs
10. Statistical Analysis
11. Qualitative Methods
12. Essentials of APA Report Writing
Unique end-of-chapter exercises will help give students in-depth experience in learning the chapter
content.
Extensive, unique ancillary package with Interactive Exercises tied to journal research articles that are
included on the companion study site.

Fundamentals of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice
(p. 50)
The Practice of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice
(p. 50)
About the authors

Paul G. Nestor, PhD, is Professor of Psychology at the University of Massachusetts
Boston, and Assistant Professor in Psychology in the Department of Psychiatry at the
Harvard Medical School. He received his BA from Boston University, and his MA and
PhD from Catholic University of America, and was a post-doctoral fellow in the National
Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) Clinical Research Training Program at Harvard Medical
School. His research has been federally support by competitive grants from both the
NIMH and the Department of Veterans Affairs. His teaching has been recognized by the
College of Arts and Sciences Outstanding Faculty Achievement Award, University of
Massachusetts-Boston (1999).
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Psychology 59

New EDITION!
New EDITION!
Methods in
Psychological
Research
A Practical Approach
Third Edition
Second Edition
Leslie A. Miller, LanneM TM, LLC
Annabel Ness Evans and Bryan J. Rooney,

Concordia University College of Alberta, Canada
Sandra A. McIntire, Rollins College

Robert L. Lovler, Wilson Learning Corporation
The Third Edition of this text offers a straight
forward and clear introduction to the basics of
psychological testing as well as to psychometrics
and statistics for students new to the field. The authors focus on relating core ideas
to practical situations that students will recognize and relate to. They provide a
variety of pedagogical tools that promote student understanding of the underlying
concepts required to interpret and to use test scores. Primarily concerned with
preparing students to become informed consumers and users of tests, the text
also features a final section focusing on how tests are utilized in three important
settings: education, clinical and counseling practice, and organizations.
Key Features
NEW! Testing concepts are more directly linked with examples from published
tests to demonstrate how the concepts are actually used.
NEW! A more intuitive and student-friendly approach to the discussion of True
Scores and Error Scores in classical test theory concepts that students
typically struggle with.
Section previews and concept maps provide students with written and graphic
overviews of the contents of each section of the text and help instructors set the
context of the proceeding chapters.
For Your Information boxes throughout each chapter supplement the material
with relevant and interesting information about a particular topic.
CONTENTS
PART I. OVERVIEW OF PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTING
1. What Are Psychological Tests?
2. Why Is Psychological Testing Important?
3. Is There a Right or Wrong Way to Use Psychological Tests?
4. How Does Computerized Testing Work?
PART II. PSYCHOMETRIC PRINCIPLES
5. How Do Test Users Interpret Test Scores?
6. What Is Test Reliability?
7. How Do We Gather Evidence of Validity Based the Content of a Test?
8. How Do We Gather Evidence of Validity Based a Tests Relationships with External Criteria?
9. How Do We Gather Evidence of Validity Based on a Tests Relationship with Constructs?
PART III. DEVELOPING AND PILOTING SURVEYS AND PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTS
10. How Do We Construct, Administer, and Use Survey Data?
11. How Do You Develop a Test?
12. How Do We Assess the Psychometric Quality of a Test?
PART IV. USING TESTS IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS
13. How Are Tests Used in Educational Settings?
14. How Are Tests Used in Clinical and Counseling Settings?
15. How Do Organizations Use Psychological Tests?
Hardcover ISBN: 978-1-4129-7639-8
2011, 632 pages
Annabel Ness Evans and Bryan J. Rooney provide

an applied approach in this thoroughly updated
Second Edition of Methods of Psychological
Research. The authors continue to rely on
student feedback from their extensive classroom experience to insure both
accessibility and relevance. End-of-chapter FAQs and projects complement the
in-text exercises and art to develop a refreshingly realistic methodology.
Key Features
Updated material and research examples incorporate reviewer suggestions
and conform to the revised second printing of the 6th edition of the Publication
Manual of the American Psychological Association (APA).
New illustrative artwork emphasizes pertinent concepts while providing a visual
foundation for todays students.
Conceptual mini-exercises throughout the text encourage students to stop and
think critically about the material they have just read.
End-of-chapter material includes suggested answers to the conceptual
exercises, a collection of chapter exercises and projects voted by students to be
the most useful, and a popular FAQ section comprised of the questions asked
most often by the authors students.
Chapter 13 is written specifically for students who are required to conduct or
propose a research project, and is complete with detailed examples and basic
statistical procedures.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Research in Psychology
2. Understanding the Research Literature
3. Research in Psychology: An Ethical Enterprise
4. Hypothesis Testing, Power, and Control: A Review of the Basics
5. Measuring Variables
6. Selecting Research Participants
7. Experimental Design: Independent Groups Designs
8. Experimental Design: Dependent Groups and Mixed Groups Designs
9. Experimental Design: Single-Participant Designs/The Operant Approach
10. Finding Relationships Among Variables: Nonexperimental Research
11. Data Collection Methods
12. Program Evaluation, Archival Research, and Meta-Analytic Designs
13. Your Research Project: Analyzing, Interpreting, and Presenting Your Research
14. Communicating in Psychology
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7788-3
2011, 408 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/evans2e
Textbooks
Foundations of
Psychological Testing
60 Research Methods in Psychology
The Process of
Research in
Psychology
New!
Textbooks
An EasyGuide to APA
Style
Dawn M. McBride, Illinois State University
Beth M. Schwartz, Randolph College

R. Eric Landrum, Boise State University
Regan Gurung, University of Wisconsin, Green Bay
emystifying the process of writing in APA style
D
and format, this handy guide presents precise
examples (both writing examples and Microsoft
Word screenshots) and points out common APA
style and formatting mistakes and how to avoid
them.
CONTENTS
PART I. OVERVIEW
1. Style v. Format: Why It Matters to Your Audience and Why It Should Matter to You
2. Your Visual Guide to APA Style: QuickFinder Using a Sample Paper
PART II. WRITING WITH (APA) STYLE: BIG PICTURE ITEMS
3. General Writing Tips Specific to APA Style
4. A Quick Grammar Summary for APA Style Writing
5. Thou Shalt Not Steal (Nor be Lazy): Plagiarism and How to Avoid It
6. Avoiding Biased Language (He Said, She Said)
PART III. WRITING WITH (APA) STYLE: GETTING DOWN TO BUSINESS
7. Whodunnit (Or Said It)? Citing References in Text
8. The Buck Starts Here: Method PART Update or What Exactly Did They Do?
9. And the Winner Is? Writing Your Results and Associated Fun
10. References: Everybody Needs References
PART IV. PRESENTING YOUR WORK IN APA FORMAT
11. The Numbers Game: How to Write Numbers (and When the Rules Change)
12. Formatting: Organizing, Headings, and Making Your Work Look Good to Print
13. Table that Motion: Special Challenges of Tables and Figures
14. Make Microsoft Word 2007 Work For You: APA Formatting
PART V. SOME NITTY-GRITTY DETAILS
15. Making a List, Checking it Twice: Enumeration and Seriation
16. The Devil is in the Details: Abbreviations, Signs, Symbols, Quotations, and Punctuation
PART VI. IN CLOSING: IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
17. Using Rubrics: Knowing What it Means to Write a Good Paper
18. Get It Right! Proofreading the Entire Paper
19. Complete Sample of Experimental (Research) Paper Samples, Anyone?
20. All Together Now: The Most Common Mistakes to Avoid
Employing numerous examples and the

pedagogical approach of spaced repetition,
this introductory text provides a step-by-step
explanation of how to design, conduct, and present
a research study in psychology. Chronologically
organized and chock-full of pedagogy, this book
creates logical scaffolding upon which students can build their knowledge.
CONTENTS
1. Psychological Research: The Whys and Hows of the Scientific Method
2. Hypothesis Development: Where Research Questions Come From
3. How Psychologists Use the Scientific Method: Observation Techniques and Research
Designs
4. Types of Variables
5. Ethical Guidelines for Psychological Research
6. Sampling
7. Summarizing and Interpreting Data: Using Statistics
8. Reporting Research
9. The Nuts and Bolts of Survey Research
10. The Nuts and Bolts of Correlational Studies
11. The Nuts and Bolts of Experiments
12. The Nuts and Bolts of Quasi-Experiments
13. The Nuts and Bolts of Other Specialized Designs
14. The Nuts and Bolts of Using Statistics
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6078-6
2010, 352 pages
IBM SPSS Statistics Student Version 18.0
Instructor Teaching Site, www.sagepub.com/mcbridestudysite
|
Lab Manual for
Psychological
Research
Sprial ISBN: 978-1-4129-9124-7

Second Edition
Dawn M. McBride and J. Cooper Cutting, Illinois

State University
Packed full of useful exercises, checklists, and howto sections, this robust lab manual gives students
hands-on guidance and practice conducting their
own psychological research projects.
CONTENTS
PART I. RESEARCH METHODS EXERCISES
PART II. RESEARCH PROJECT EXERCISES
PART III. APA STYLE EXERCISES
PART IV. AVOIDING PLAGIARISM EXERCISES
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7976-4
2010, 136 pages
Better Together! The Process of Research in Psychology and the Second Edition of the Lab
Manual for Psychological Research, ISBN: 978-1-4129-8086-9
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Research Methods in Psychology 61
Developmental
Research Methods
Third Edition
Scott A. Miller, University of Florida

This classic standard, now in its Third Edition,
successfully provides an overview of methods
to prepare students to carry out, report on, and
evaluate research on human development, with a
focus on the whole lifespan. Author Scott A. Miller
explores every step in the research process,
from the initial concept to the final written result, covering conceptual issues of
experimental design as well as the procedural skills necessary to translate design
into research.
Jon S. Bailey, Florida State University School of

Social Work
Mary R. Burch, Behavior Management Consultants,
Inc.
This practical, how-to text provides the beginning
researcher with the basics of applied behavior
analysis research methods. The text covers all
of the elements of single-subject research design in 10 logical steps and includes
practical information for designing, implementing, and evaluating studies.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. General Principles
3. Design
4. Measurement
5. Procedure
6. Contexts for Research
7. Qualitative and Applied Research
8. Statistics
9. Ethics
10. Writing
11. Infancy
12. Cognitive Development
13. Social Development
14. Aging
PART I. WHAT IS APPLIED BEHAVIOR ANALYSIS RESEARCH?

PART II. RESEARCH METHODS IN APPLIED BEHAVIOR ANALYSIS: PRACTICAL ADVICE FOR
THE NEW RESEARCHER
PART III. GOING PUBLIC
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2556-9
2002, 280 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5029-9
Doing Qualitative
Research in
Psychology
2007, 416 pages
A Practical Guide
Michael A. Forrester, University of Kent, U.K.
The Psychology
Research Handbook
A Guide for Graduate Students and Research
Assistants
Frederick T. Leong, Michigan State University
James T. Austin, The Ohio State University
This Handbook offers a comprehensive guide
for understanding and conquering the entire
research process. The editors have assembled
a distinguished group of expert researchers
who share skill sets accumulated as a result of years of practical exposure to
the design, development, implementation, and documentation of research in
psychology.
CONTENTS
PART I. RESEARCH PLANNING
PART II. DESIGN, INSTRUMENT SELECTION AND SAMPLING
PART IV. DATA ANALYSES
PART V. RESEARCH WRITING
PART VI. SPECIAL TOPICS
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-3022-8
2006, 408 pages
This unique text provides a complete introduction

to qualitative methods in psychology and will
be ideal reading for anyone doing a course in
qualitative psychology or planning a practical
project using qualitative approaches. Forresters
book has been developed in tandem with its own dataset, collected specifically for
the book which will be a unique resource for any students using the text.
CONTENTS
PART I. FORMULATING RESEARCH QUESTIONS
1. Theory and Method In Qualitative Research
2. Conducting Literature Reviews
PART II. CONDUCTING QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
3. Approaches to Data Collection in Qualitative Research
4. The Interview In Qualitative Research
5. Research Ethics in Qualitative Research
PART III. QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS: PRACTICAL EXAMPLES
6. Introducing the Data Set
7. QM1: Discourse Analysis
8. QM2: Grounded Theory
9. QM3: Interpretative Phenomenological Analysis
10. QM4: Conversation Analysis
PART IV. WRITING UP
11. Writing Up the Qualitative Methods Research Report
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7911-0
2010, 280 pages
Textbooks
Research Methods in
Applied Behavior
Analysis
62 RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK
Measuring the
Performance of Human
Service Programs
RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK

Textbooks
Agency-Based
Program Evaluation
Second Edition
Lawrence L. Martin, University of Central Florida
Lessons From Practice
Peter M. Kettner, Professor Emeritus, Arizona State

University
Stephen A. Kapp, University of Kansas

Gary R. Anderson, Michigan State University
This text aids both students and practitioners in
articulating the elements of program evaluation,
deepening their understanding of the contextual
issues that surround and shape an evaluation.
Authors Stephen A. Kapp and Gary R. Anderson
offer readers details on the application of useful and accepted evaluation methods.
The Second Edition of this classic text examines

the reasons why performance measurement
has become the major method of performance
accountability today. Employing the systems model as a conceptual framework,
it explains how to develop and utilize output, quality, and outcome performance
measures in human service programs.
CONTENTS
1. Performance Accountability and Performance Measurement
2. Putting Performance Accountability and Performance Measurement in Perspective
3. Logic Models, Human Service Programs, and Performance Measurement
4. Output Performance Measures
5. Quality Performance Measures
6. Outcome Performance Measures
7. Introduction
8. Standardized Measures
9. Level of Functioning (LOF) Scales
10. Client Satisfaction
11. Using Performance Measurement Information
CONTENTS
1. Making the Case for Program Evaluation
2. Steps in Program Evaluation
3. Ethics and Program Evaluation: Applying a Code of Ethics to Field-Based Research
4. Ethical Challenges for Evaluators in an Agency Setting: Making Good Choices
5. Agencies and Academics: The Social and Political Context of Program Evaluation
6. Cultural Competency and Program Evaluation
7. Program Definition: Using Program Logic Models to Develop a Common Vision
8. Program Description: Evaluation Designs Using Available Information
9. Evaluation Design: Options for Supporting the Use of Information
10. Evaluation Design: Group Designs and Methods
11. Evaluation Design: Qualitative Designs and Applications
12. Consumer Satisfaction
13. Dissemination: Spreading the News
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7061-7

2010, 160 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-3984-3

2010, 384 pages
Developing a Learning
Culture in Nonprofit
Organizations
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/kapp
The Handbook of
Social Work Research
Methods
Stephen J. Gill, Independent Consultant

Filled with practical tips and tools, this text shows
students and managers of human services, arts,
education, civic, and environmental agencies how
to implement a learning culture with individuals,
teams, the organization as a whole, and the larger
community.
Second Edition
Bruce Thyer, Florida State University College of

Social Work
This updated Handbook addresses the changes
in the field of social work, as qualitative research
gains more prominence as well as mixed
methods and various issues regarding race,
ethnicity and gender. Edited by a leading scholar in the field, this textcoversmeta
analysis, designs to evaluate treatment, and keyInternet resources.
CONTENTS
PART I. QUANTITATIVE APPROACHES: FOUNDATIONS OF DATA COLLECTION

PART II. QUALITATIVE APPROACHES: TYPES OF STUDIES
PART III. QUANTITATIVE APPROACHES: FOUNDATIONS OF DATA COLLECTION
PART IV. QUANTITATIVE APPROACHES: TYPES OF STUDIES
PART V. CONCEPTUAL RESEARCH
PART VI. GENERAL ISSUES
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5840-0
CONTENTS
1. Need for a Learning Culture
2. Barriers to a Learning Culture
3. Creating a Learning Culture
4. Individual Learning
5. Team Learning
6. Whole Organization Learning
7. Community Learning
8. Learning From Evaluation
9. Using Models to Facilitate Learning
10. Summary
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6767-9
2010, 232 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/learnculstudy
2010, 672 pages

Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/thyerhdbk2e
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK 63
About the authors
Fundamentals of
The Practice of
Research in Social
Work
Rafael J. Engel, University of Pittsburgh
Second Edition
Russell K. Schutt, University of Massachusetts, Boston

This text introduces research methods as an
integrated set of techniques to investigate social
work practice methods and problems. Integrating
substantive practice-related examples with
research techniques, the authors present ethical
decision making as a part of every aspect of the
research design process and infuse content on
diversity and populations at risk throughout the text.
Key Features
Engaging writing style coupled with real, applied examples that show students why
a study of research methods is relevant and interesting to future social workers
Research with diverse populations infused into every chapter
Evidence-Based Practice integrated throughout the text
Ethical concerns highlighted in each chapter and ethics exercises included after
each chapter
An expansive Student Study Site with a variety of contemporary research
examples and more
CONTENTS
1. Science, Society, and Social Work Research
2. The Process and Problems of Social Work Research
4. Sampling
5. Group Experimental Designs
6. Single-Subject Design
7. Survey Research
8. Qualitative Methods: Observing, Participating, Listening
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5416-7
2010, 416 pages
Instructor Teaching Site and Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/fswrstudy
|
Fundamentals of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice
(p. 50)
(p.63)
Rafael J. Engel, University of Pittsburgh

Boston
Designed to help students develop skills in
evaluating research and conducting studies, this
popular text makes principles of evidence-based
practice come alive through illustrations of actual social work practice research.
Key Features
Updated coverage of diverse populations. Coverage of diverse populations
is shown as an integral part of the research design process, rather than as a
disconnected step.
An increased focus on ethics, including new ethics exercises. Ethical decisionmaking is presented as an integral part of the research design process, rather
than as a disconnected step.
New examples of research in social work practice settings. New social
work practice examples now illustrate the latest research on such topics
as homelessness, domestic violence, substance abuse, gender, aging, child
welfare, and welfare reform, including the methods used and the challenges
researchers confronted.
New and revised pedagogy. This edition includes more review exercises in
a variety of formats than any other text of its kind, including exercises on
developing a proposal, discussion questions, practice exercises, web exercises,
new ethics exercises, and new SPSS exercises on the student website.
CONTENTS
1. Science, Society, and Social Work Research
2. The Process and Problems of Social Work Research
4. Sampling
6. Group Experimental Designs
7. Single-Subject Design
8. Survey Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6891-1
2009, 608 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/prsw2
Textbooks
Rafael J. Engel, PhD, is Associate Professor and Associate Dean for Academic Affairs at the School of Social Work, University of Pittsburgh. He has authored
journal articles on such topics as poverty in later life, welfare benefits, and depressive symptomatology and he has written a variety of monographs reporting
agency-based evaluations. His research experience includes funded research studies on faith-based organizations and employment in late life as well as funded
evaluation research studies on welfare to work programs and drug and alcohol prevention programs.
64 Research Methods in Social Work | Social Research Methods
Qualitative Methods in
Textbooks
Second Edition
Adventures in Social
Research
Deborah K. Padgett, New York University, New York

This essential text promotes new ways of thinking
by offering fresh perspectives and collecting
the most up-to-date information on qualitative
research methods. With this Second Edition,
noted author and researcher, Deborah K. Padgett
continues to deliver a highly readable, tightly
woven book that helps humanize data in a meaningful way.
Data Analysis using IBM SPSS Statistics

Seventh Edition
Earl Babbie, Chapman University, Orange,
California
Fred S. Halley, State University of New York,
Brockport
William E. Wagner, III, California State University,
Channel Islands
CONTENTS
1. The Qualitative Methods Family
2. Choosing the Right Approach(es)
3. Getting Started: Study Design and Sampling
5. Entering the Field and Conducting Observation
6. Interviewing and Use of Documents
7. Data Analysis and Interpretation
8. Strategies for Rigor
9. Telling the Story: Writing Up the Qualitative Study
10. Mixed Methods
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-5193-7
2008, 304 pages
Jeanne Zaino, Iona College, New Rochelle

This book guides students step-by-step through the process of data analysis using
SPSS /PASW Statistics and 2008 General Social Survey (GSS) data. Written by
esteemed social science research authors, this workbook encourages students to
practice SPSS as they read about it and provides a practical, hands-on introduction
to conceptualization, measurement, and association through active learning.
Arranged to parallel most introductory research methods texts, this text starts with
an introduction to computerized data analysis and the social research process,
then walks readers step-by-step through univariate, bivariate, and multivariate
analysis using SPSS Statistics.
CONTENTS
PART I. PREPARING FOR DATA ANALYSIS
1. Introduction: The Theory and Practice of Social Research
2. The Logic of Measurement
3. Description of Data Sets; The General Social Survey (GSS)
PART II. UNIVARIATE ANALYSIS
4. Using SPSS Statistics: Some Basics
5. Describing Your Data Religiosity
6. Presenting Your Data in Graphic Form: Political Orientations
7. Recoding Your Data: Religiosity and Political Orientations
8. Creating Composite Measures: Exploring Attitudes Toward Abortion in More Depth
9. Suggestions for Further Analysis
PART III. BIVARIATE ANALYSIS
10. Examining the Sources of Religiosity
11. Political Orientations as Cause and Effect
12. What Causes Different Attitudes Towards Abortion?
13. Measures of Association
14. Tests of Significance
15. Suggestions for Further Bivariate Analyses
PART IV. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS
16. Multiple Causation: Examining Religiosity in Greater Depth
17. Dissecting the Political Factor
18. A Powerful Prediction of Attitudes Towards Abortion
19. Suggestions for Further Multivariate Analyses
PART V. THE ADVENTURE CONTINUES
20. Designing and Executing Your Own Survey
21. Further Opportunities for Social Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8244-3
2011, 456 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/babbie7estudy
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Social Research Methods 65

Bestseller!
Investigating the Social World

Russell K. Schutt, University of Massachusetts, Boston
In thisupdated Sixth Edition of the most successful social research text published in a generation, Russell
K. Schutt, an award-winningresearcher and educatorat the forefront of cutting-edge research,makes
research come alive through up-to-datereal-world examplesthat illustrate each chapters methods and
hands-on exercises that help students learn by doing.
Key Features
A new chapter on research ethics (Chapter 3) with up-to-date information on Institutional Review Boards
and HIPAA (health information) rules
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6940-6
New-to-this-edition ethics questions at the end of each chapter
2009, 728 pages
Updated studies of social ties, domestic violence, crime, and other social issues throughout
Student Study Site, www.pineforge.com/isw6
New examples from research on disasters, gender roles, and social interaction
Instructor Teaching Site,

www.pineforge.com/schuttisw6einstr
Expanded coverage of survey research methods, including the effect of cell phones and use of the
Internet
|
CONTENTS
1. Science, Society, and Social Research
2. The Process and Problems of Social
Research
5. Sampling
6. Research Design and Causation
7. Experiments
8. Survey Research
9. Qualitative Methods: Observing,
Participating, Listening
11. Evaluation And Policy Research
12. Historical And Comparative Research
13. Secondary Data Analysis and Content
Analysis
15. Summarizing and Reporting Research
Increased qualitative research methods such as the growing popularity of narrative analysis, conversation
analysis, and visual methods
New sections focus on: the conceptualization of race (Chapter 4), the importance of translation (Chapter
8), improving our understanding of prejudice (Chapters 9 and 10), the challenges of cross-cultural
research (Chapter 9), the significance of gender (Chapter 13), and the dynamics of voting (Chapter 14)
New discussion questions focus on issues that can be debated in class, and exercises using SPSS
(version 16.0) are revised for use with the new 2006 General Social Survey (GSS) dataset

Fundamentals of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice (p.
50)
The Practice of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice (p.50)
Research Methods in Psychology (p.58)
About the Author

Russell K. Schutt, PhD, is Professor of Sociology at the University of Massachusetts, Boston and Lecturer on
Sociology in the Department of Psychiatry (Beth Israel-Deaconess Medical Center) at the Harvard Medical School.
He completed his BA, MA, and PhD degrees at the University of Illinois at Chicago and was a Postdoctoral Fellow
in the Sociology of Social Control Training Program at Yale University. He has authored and coauthored numerous
texts, journal articles, book chapters, and research reports on homelessness, service preferences and satisfaction,
mental health, organizations, law, and teaching research methods.
Textbooks
The Process and Practice of Research

Sixth Edition
66 Social Research Methods
Configurational
Comparative Methods
Bestseller!
Textbooks
Making Sense of the

Social World
Qualitative Comparative Analysis (QCA) and

Related Techniques
Methods of Investigation
Third Edition
Benot Rihoux, Universit catholique de Louvain,

France
Daniel F. Chambliss, Hamilton College
Charles C. Ragin, University of Arizona

Boston
This brief, accessible, and sometimes humorous
text is ideal for students who need to understand
research methods, but who may never conduct
vaccurate, and comprehensive coverage, with a balanced treatment of qualitative
and quantitative methods, illustrated by vivid examples from research studies and
from everyday life, and a new full chapter on ethics.Students become informed
consumers of research through unusually clear explanations of challenging topics
such as units of analysis and conceptualization, easily applied how to instruction
on a variety of important methods, and extensive chapter-ending exercises.
CONTENTS
1. Science, Society, and Social Research
2. The Process and Problems of Social Research
3. Ethics in Research
5. Sampling
6. Causation and Experimental Design
7. Survey Research
8. Elementary Quantitative Data Analysis
12. Reviewing, Proposing, and Reporting Research
Integrating strengths of both qualitative (caseoriented) and quantitative (variable-oriented)

approaches, this first-of-its-kind text is ideally
suited for small-N or intermediate-N research situations. Authors Rihoux and
Ragin, along with contributing authors, offer both a basic, comparative research
design overview and atechnical, hands-on review of Crisp-Set QCA (csQCA), MultiValue QCA (mvQCA), and Fuzzy-Set QCA (fsQCA).
CONTENTS
1. Qualitative Comparative Analysis (QCA) as an Approach
2. Comparative Research Design: Case and Variable Selection
3. Crisp-Set Qualitative Comparative Analysis (CSQCA)
4. Multi-Value QCA (MVQCA)
5. Qualitative Comparative Analysis Using Fuzzy Sets (FSQCA)
6. A Commented Review of Applications
7. Addressing the Critiques of QCA
8. Conclusions - The Way(s) Ahead
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-4235-5
2009, 240 pages
Perspectives in Social
Research Methods and
Analysis
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6939-0

2010, 416 pages
A Reader for Sociology
Student Study Site, www.pineforge.com/mssw3
Howard Lune, Hunter College

Enrique S. Pumar, The Catholic University of
America
Ross Koppel, University of Pennsylvania

Fundamentals of Research in Criminology and Criminal
Justice (p. 50)
(p. 58)
Research Methods in Psycholog (p. 58)
This book shows students the steps involved in

the research process, the various strategies for conducting a valid social inquiry,
and most importantly, the persuasiveness and elegance of reliable social research.
It highlights the link between academic research and the real world.
CONTENTS
PART I. WHERE TO BEGIN
PART III. ETHICS IN SOCIAL RESEARCH
PART IV. QUANTITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
PART V. QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
PART VI. QUANTITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
PART VII. QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
PART VIII. MIXED METHODS
PART IX. LAST WORD
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6739-6
2010, 456 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/lunestudy
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Feminist Research
Practice
A Primer
Patricia Lina Leavy, Stonehill College
This text provides a hands-on approach to
research by providing exercises and behind the
scenes glimpses of feminist researchers at work.
CONTENTS
1. An Invitation to Feminist Research
PART I. FEMINIST APPROACHES TO EPISTEMOLOGY AND THEORY
2. Feminist Empiricism: Challenging Gender Bias and Setting the Record Straight
3. Feminist Standpoint Epistemology: Building Knowledge and Empowerment Through
Womens Lived Experience
4. Feminist Postmodernism and Poststructuralism
PART II. FEMINIST APPROACHES TO RESEARCH METHODS AND METHODOLOGY
5. The Practice of Feminist In-Depth Interviewing
6. The Practice of Feminist Oral History and Focus Group Interviews
7. The Feminist Practice of Ethnography
8. The Feminist Practice of Content Analysis
9. Feminist Approaches to Mixed-Methods Research
10. Feminist Survey Research
PART III. FEMINIST PRAXIS
11. Putting It Together: Feminist Research Praxis
Scale Development
Theory and Applications
Third Edition
Robert F. DeVellis, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill
A best-seller in its previous editions, Scale Development: Theory and
Applications, Third Edition has been extensively updated and revised to address
changes in the field and topics that have grown in importance. Widely adopted for
graduate courses in departments such as Psychology, Public Health, Marketing,
Nursing, and Education, this book will prove beneficial to applied researchers
across the social sciences.
CONTENTS
1. Overview
2. Understanding the Latent Variable
3. Reliability
4. Validity
5. Guidelines in Scale Development
6. Factor Analysis
7. An Overview of Item Response Theory
8. Measurement in the Broader Research Context
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8044-9

May 2011, 232 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-2892-8
Theory and Methods in

Social Research
2007, 392 pages
Second Edition
Designing Social
Research
A Guide for the Bewildered
Ian Greener, Durham University
sing everyday jargon-free language, Designing
U
Social Research guides you through the jungle of
setting up a research study. Ian Greener provides
guidance on how to practically plan your research
and helps you to understand the underpinning
methodological principles that should inform your
decisions about the methods you plan to use.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: The Vocabulary of Social Research, or What Are You Talking about?
2. Reviewing What Other People Have Said, or How Can I Tell if Others Research Is Any
Good?
3. Causality in Your Research, or How Deep Should Ontology Go?
4. Dealing with Time and Control, or Should Immersion and Objectivity Be Research Goals?
5. Questionnaires, or How Can I Conduct Research with People at a Distance?
6. Elements Of Quantitative Design: Sampling, Statistics and Regression, or What Can I Do
with Numbers?
7. Ethnography as a Research Approach, or What Do I Gain from Watching People and
Talking to Them?
8. Dealing With Qualitative Data, or What Should I Do with All These Words?
9. Ethics, or What Practices Are Appropriate in My Research?
10. Writing up Your Research, or What Can I Say Ive Found?
11. Writing up Reviews and Putting Together Proposals, or Can You Provide Some Examples
of All of This?
12. Conclusion, or Getting on with Social Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0190-2
May 2011, 200 pages
Bridget Somekh, Manchester Metropolitan

University, U.K.
Cathy Lewin
This new edition provides a scholarly and
readable introduction to all the key qualitative
and quantitative research methodologies and
methods, enabling postgraduate and masterslevel students and new researchers to reflect on which ones suit their needs and to
receive guidance on how to find out more.
CONTENTS
PART I. READING, REVIEWING AND REFLECTING
PART II. LISTENING, EXPLORING THE CASE AND THEORIZING
PART III. ADDRESSING ISSUES OF POWER AND RESEARCHING FOR IMPACT
PART IV. OBSERVING, QUERYING, INTERPRETING
PART V. IDENTITY, COMMUNITY AND REPRESENTATION
PART VI. QUANTITATIVE METHODS: THEORIES AND PERSPECTIVES
PART VII. QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN ACTION
PART VIII. RESEARCHING IN POSTMODERN CONTEXTS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0015-8
Textbooks
Sharlene Nagy Hesse-Biber, Boston College
New EDITION!
Exploring Social
Issues
New EDITION!
Textbooks
Constructing Social
Research
Using SPSS for Windows

Third Edition
The Unity and Diversity of Method

Second Edition
Joseph F. Healey, Christopher Newport University
John Boli, Emory University, Atlanta, Georgia
Lisa Amoroso, Dominican University
Earl R. Babbie, Chapman University, Orange
Constructing Social Research, Second

Edition is a concise, innovative text designed
for undergraduate Research Methods courses
in the Social Sciences. This Sociology for a
New Century Series text effectively highlights the unity and diversity of methods
across disciplines and cultures using comparative and historical examples. Ragin
and Amoroso clearly demonstrate the similarities among three major traditions:
qualitative research on commonalities, comparative research on diversity, and
quantitative research on relationships among variables. Together, these three
compelling research strategies provide a solid foundation for studying all social
phenomena, from examining the complexities of everyday life to investigating the
power of transnational processes.
CONTENTS
PART I. ELEMENTS OF SOCIAL RESEARCH
1. What is Social Research?
2. The Goals of Social Research
3. The Process of Social Research: Ideas and Evidence
4. The Ethics of Social Research
PART II. STRATEGIES OF SOCIAL RESEARCH
5. Using Qualitative Methods to Study Commonalities
6. Using Comparative Methods to Study Diversity
7. Using Quantitative Methods to Study Covariation
Fred Halley, State University of New York, Brockport

This hands-on text to social research for
Introductory Sociology courses, shows students
how analyzing data can help them better understand compelling social issues. This
Third Edition uses updated General Social Survey data sets and offers a robust
SPSS primer in an appendix.
CONTENTS
1. Getting Started: Social Research, Data Sets, and Frequency Distributions
2. Theory and Research: The Scientific Method
3. Describing the Sample, Types of Variables, and Data Sets
4. Culture: What Do Americans Value?
5. A Controversy in Values: Attitudes About Abortion
6. Socialization: What Kinds of Children Do Americans Want?
7. Crime: Fear, Law Enforcement, and Punishment
8. Inequality and Social Class in the United States
9. Inequality and Gender
10. Inequality and Race
11. The Family Institution: Forms and Functions
12. The Political Institution in the United States: Support for Civil Liberties, Presidential
Choice, and the Gender Gap
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6421-0
2010, 376 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6018-2

2011, 248 pages
New!
Social Research and

Reflexivity
New!
Social Research
Tim May, Centre for Sustainable Urban & Regional

Futures, University of Salford, U.K.
An Introduction
Second Edition
Beth Perry, University of Salford, U.K.
Matthew David, Brunel University
This is an agenda setting book from the leading

expert in the field book that not only provides a
history of reflexive thought, but its consequences
for the practice of social research and an
understanding of the contexts in which it is
produced.
Carole D. Sutton, University of Plymouth

This new edition provides those new to social
research with a comprehensive introduction to the
theory, logic and practical methods of qualitative,
quantitative and mixed methods research.
Covering all aspects of research design, data
collection, data analysis and writing up, Social
Research: An Introduction is the essential companion for all undergraduate and
postgraduate students embarking on a methods course or social research project.
PART I. CONTENTS
PART II. CONSEQUENCE
PART III. CONTEXT, WITH BETH PERRY
CONTENTS
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-6284-7
PART I. STARTING YOUR RESEARCH

PART II. DATA COLLECTION STRATEGIES
PART III. DATA ANALYSIS
PART IV. PRESENTING RESEARCH
CONTENTS
2011, 248 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7013-1

Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Social Research
Methods
New!
Methodology
Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches

H. Russell Bernard, University of Florida
Martyn Hammersley, The Open University

Since many social scientists are ambivalent
about methodology, in this book, author Martyn
Hammersley spells out the demands it places
upon social scientists, and examining such issues
as the proper role of methodology, the nature of
objectivity, the false idea that social scientists
should be intellectuals or social critics, the
dialectic of academic discussion, the ethics of
belief, and the limits of academic freedom.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE ROLE OF THE RESEARCHER: LIMITS, OBLIGATIONS, AND VIRTUES
1. Methodology, Who Needs It?
2. On the Social Scientist as Intellectual
3. Should Social Science Be Critical?
4. Objectivity as an Intellectual Virtue
5. Too Good to Be False? The Ethics of Belief
PART II. THE DIALECTIC OF KNOWLEDGE PRODUCTION
6. Models of Research: Discovery, Construction and Understanding
7. Merely Academic? A Dialectic for Research Communities
8. Academic License and Its Limits: The Case of Holocaust Denial
9. Epilogue
At last, a social research methods text for

students and future researchers who need to
use both words and numbers in their research.
The purpose of this book is to explain and
demonstrate to students when to use and how to
apply the quantitative and qualitative techniques
that theyll need to do their own social research. Using actual examples from
psychology, sociology, anthropology and education, this book provides readers
with a conceptual understanding of each technique and shows them how to
use it. Social Research Methods shows that a book on research methods can
incorporate comprehensiveness, sophistication, and clear writing. It conveniently
packages nearly everything one needs to know or think about before or while
carrying out social and behavioral research.
CONTENTS
PART I. BACKGROUND TO RESEARCH
PART IV. DATA ANALYSIS
Hardcover ISBN: 978-0-7619-1403-7
2000, 768 pages
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8492-0205-3

Using Biographical
Methods in Social
Research
A Critical Introduction
to Social Research
Second Edition
Barbara Merrill, University of Warwick, U.K.
Matt Henn, Mark Weinstein, and Nick Foard,

Nottingham Trent University, U.K.
Linden West, Canterbury Christ Church University,

U.K.
This book provides a clear and easy-tounderstand route-map to help the reader plan
their research project from beginning to end.It is
perfect for use on introductory methods courses
and is also an invaluable guide for the first
time researcher embarking on their own small-scale research project. The new
Second Edition now features updated chapters which reflect recent debates and
developments in the field.
Barbara Merrill and Linden West consider

important questions about what research is for,
what makes it valid, to the practical business
of interviewing, analyzing and writing up of
biographical data. The authors draw on their sociological and psychological
orientations to provide a truly interdisciplinary approach to the subject, and provide
numerous examples of biographical research across the social sciences.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Setting the Scene

2. Biographical Methods: An Introductory History
3. Mapping the Contemporary Uses of Biographical Research
4. Identifying Some Theoretical Issues
5. Illustrating Good Practice: Case Studies
6. Getting Started in Research
7. Interviewing and Recording Experience
8. Making Sense of Biography: Analysis
9. Representing the Stories: Writing Up
10. Is Biographical Research Valid and Ethical?
11. On Being a Biographical Researcher
1. Introduction
2. What is Social Research?
3. Critical Social Research
4. Getting Started in Research: The Research Process
5. Ethics in Social Research
6. Documentary Sources, Official Statistics and Secondary Data
7. Quantitative Approaches in Social Science Research
8. Qualitative Approaches in Social Research
9. The Analysis of Data
10. Writing Up and Presenting Research Results
11. Designing a Research Proposal
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0179-6
2010, 368 pages
CONTENTS
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2958-5

2010, 224 pages
Textbooks
Who Needs It?
Textbooks
Researching Social
Change
Doing Research in the

Real World
Qualitative Approaches
Second Edition
Julie McLeod, University of Melbourne, Australia
David E. Gray, University of Surrey, U.K.
Rachel Thomson, The Open University, U.K.

This book provides a timely guide to qualitative
methodologies that investigate processes of
personal, generational, and historical change.
The authors showcase a range of methods
that explore temporality and the dynamic
relations between past, present, and future. Through case studies, they review six
methodological traditions: memory work, oral/life history, qualitative longitudinal
research, ethnography, inter-generational and follow-up studies.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Researching Change and Continuity
PART I. REMEMBERING
2. Memory-Work
3. Oral and Life History
PART II. BEING WITH
4. Qualitative Longitudinal Research
5. Ethnography
PART III. INHERITING
6. Generation
7. Revisiting
8. Time, Emotions and Research Practice
9. Conclusion
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-2887-8
2009, 200 pages
Researching Young
Peoples Lives
This clear and accessible text introduces readers

to the essential aspects of the research process,
including the best approaches to the design
of appropriate research tools, data collection,
analysis and writing up.
CONTENTS
PART I. PRINCIPLES AND PLANNING FOR RESEARCH
1. Theoretical Perspectives and Research Methodologies
2. Selecting and Planning Research Proposals and Projects
3. Research Ethics
4. Searching, Reviewing and Using the Literature
PART II. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
5. Research Design: Quantitative Methods
6. Research Design: Qualitative Methods
7. Research Design: Mixed Methods
8. Designing Descriptive and Analytical Surveys
9. Designing Case Studies
10. Designing Evaluations
11. Action Research and Change
PART III. DATA COLLECTION METHODS
12. Collecting Primary Data: Questionnaires
13. Collecting Primary Data: Interviewing
14. Collecting Primary Data: Observation
15. Collecting Primary Data: Unobtrusive Measures
PART IV. ANALYSIS AND REPORT WRITING
16. Analysing and Presenting Quantitative Data
17. Analysing and Presenting Qualitative Data
18. Writing up the Research
19. Preparing for Presentations and Vivas
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8478-7337-8
2009, 624 pages
Sue Heath, University of Southampton

Rachel Brooks, Surrey University, U.K.
Social Network
Analysis
Elizabeth Cleaver, University of Birmingham, U.K.

Eleanor Ireland, National Centre for Social
Research, U.K.
This bookprovides an overview of some of the
key methodological challenges facing youth
researchers and an introduction to the broad
repertoire of methods used in youth-orientated research.Throughout the book, the
emphasis is on research in practice, and examples are drawn from recent youth
research projects from a wide range of disciplines and substantive areas, and from
a range of both U.K. and non-U.K. contexts.
CONTENTS
1. Researching Young Peoples Lives: An Introduction
PART I. THE CONTEXT OF YOUTH RESEARCH
2. Ethical Practice in Youth Research
3. Researching Across Difference
4. Involving Young People in Research
PART II. METHODS FOR YOUTH RESEARCH
5. Qualitative Interviewing
6. Ethnographic Approaches
7. Visual Methods
8. Surveys
9. Using Secondary Data
10. Using the Internet for Youth Research
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-1056-9
A Handbook
Second Edition
John Scott, University of Essex, U.K.
The Second Edition provides an accessible
introduction to the theory and practice of network
analysis in the social sciences. The text gives
a clear and authoritative guide to the general
framework of network analysis, explaining
the basic concepts, technical measures and reviewing the available computer
programs.
CONTENTS
1. Networks and Relations
2. The Development of Social Network Analysis
3. Handling Relational Data
4. Points, Lines and Density
5. Centrality and Centralization
6. Components, Cores, and Cliques
7. Positions, Roles, and Clusters
8. Dimensions and Displays
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-6339-4
2000, 224 pages
2009, 224 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
The Foundations of
Social Research
Michael Crotty
This book links methodology and theory with
great clarity and precision, showing students
and researchers how to navigate the maze of
conflicting terminology.
CONTENTS
1. Positivism
2. Constructionism
3. Interpretivism
4. Interpretivism
5. Critical Inquiry
6. Critical Inquiry
7. Feminism
8. Postmodernism
9. Conclusion
SAGE
Journals
Online
This award-winning and powerful platform is home to
more than 20 journals in research methods, evaluation,
and related disciplines, including those published on
behalf of the following prestigious societies:
Paperback ISBN: 978-0-7619-6106-2

1998, 256 pages
American Educational Research Association
Understanding Social Research

Thinking Creatively about Method
Jennifer Mason and Angela Dale, University of Manchester, U.K.
This text brings together leading researchers in the social sciences including
sociology, health, geography, psychology and social statistics to elaborate their
approach to research design and practice, based on their own research experience,
and to consider what kinds of knowledge their methods can produce. Each of the
contributing authors reflects on their own methods and identifies what is distinctive
about them. The book contains fascinating insights into how the knowledge we
produce is shaped by the methods we choose and use.
CONTENTS
1. Creative Tensions in Social Research: Questions of Method
PART I. RESEARCHING RELATIONSHIPS AND PERSONAL LIFE
2. Experimenting with Qualitative Methods: Researching Family Resemblance
3. Using Psychoanalytic Methodology in Psychosocial Research: Researching Brothers
4. Using Biographical and Longitudinal Methods: Researching Mothering
5. Using Social Network Analysis: Researching Relational Structure
6. Using Survey Data: Researching Families and Households
PART II. RESEARCHING PLACE
7. Section Introduction
8. Ethnographies of Place: Researching the Road
9. Using Sociotechnical Methods: Researching Human-Technological Dynamics in the City
10. Using Participatory, Observational and Rapid Appraisal Methods: Researching Health
And Illness
11. Innovative Ways of Mapping Data about Places
PART III. RESEARCHING CHANGE
12. Using Archived Qualitative Data: Researching Socio-cultural Change
13. Whats History Got to Do with It? Researching Sexual Histories
14. Using Qualitative Methods to Complement Randomized Controlled Trials: Researching
Mental Health Interventions
15. Exploring the Narrative Potential of Cohort Data and Event History Analysis
16. Using Longitudinal Survey Data: Researching Changing Health in Later Life
Paperback ISBN: 978-1-8486-0145-1
2011, 264 pages
American Evaluation Association
Visit
http://online.sagepub.com
and start your research today
Textbooks
Meaning and Perspective in the Research

Process
Textbooks
72
Multivariate General Linear

Models
Richard Haase
This new addition to the QASS series deals with
the application of multivariate multiple regression
(MMR) analysis in the behavioral sciences. The
authors present regression analysis in the context
of multiple dependent or response variables
modeled as a function of one or more independent
or predictor variables.
VOLUME 170
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7249-9
2011, 130 pages
Ordinal Item Response Theory

Mokken Scale Analysis
Wijbrandt H. Van Schuur
Filling a gap between the more classical topics
of undimensional scaling, test theory, principal
component and factor analysis, this volume
discusses parametric item response theory and
latent class analysis. Less technical than other
books in the market, this text is best suited
for an introductory course in social science
measurement.
VOLUME 169
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-8804-9
2011, 176 pages
The Association Graph and

the Multigraph for Loglinear
Models
Harry J. Khamis, Statistical Consulting Center,
Wright State University
This supplemental reviews loglinear models,
explains the association graph, and introduces
the multigraph to readers who may have little
prior experience of graphical techniques, but
have some familiarity with categorical variable
modeling. The author presents logical step-bystep techniques from the point of view of the
practitioner, focusing on how the technique is
applied to contingency table data and how the
results are interpreted.
VOLUME 167
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7238-3
2011, 136 pages
Assessing Inequality
Lingxin Hao and Daniel Q. Naiman,
The Johns Hopkins University
Establishing a natural link between quantile
regression and inequality studies in the social
sciences, this book contains clearly defined
terms, simplified empirical equations, illustrative
graphs, empirical tables, and computational codes
using statistical software popular among social
scientists oriented to empirical research.
Volume 166
Nonrecursive Models
Endogeneity, Reciprocal Relationships, and
Feedback Loops
Pamela M. Paxton, The University of Texas at Austin
John R. Hipp, University of California, Irvine
Sandra Marquart-Pyatt, Utah State University
The only monograph that provides explicit
guidance to researchers on the estimation
and assessment of nonrecursive simultaneous
equation models in a clear, condensed and precise
form, this title provides the applied researcher
a reference. The text guides them through the
specification and identification of simultaneous
equation models, how to assess the quality of the
estimates, and how to correctly interpret results.
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-2629-4

2010, 160 pages
Fractal Analysis
Clifford Brown and Larry Liebovitch,
Florida Atlantic University
This primer uses straightforward language to
give the reader step-by-step instructions for
identifying and analyzing fractal patterns and
the social process that create them. By making
fractals accessible to the social science students,
this book has a significant impact on the
understanding of human behavior.
Volume 165
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7165-2
VOLUME 168
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7444-8
2010, 112 pages
2011, 152 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
73
Quantitative Narrative Analysis
Raymond Sin-Kwok Wong, University of

California, Santa Barbara, Hong Kong University
of Science & Technology
Roberto Franzosi, Emory University
Broadening the scope of association models beyond the typical

sociological and psychological fields, author Raymond S. Wong shows
readers how to analyze and comprehend any social science data
presented in cross-classified formats. Through a careful exposition
of various association models, the text examines the underlying
structure of odds-ratios, offering a unified framework for students
and researchers in the process.
Volume 164
Covering a number of disciplines, including linguistics, literary

criticism, computer science, and statistics, this book illustrates
author Roberto Franzosis distinctive approach to the quantitative
analysis of large volumes of narrative texts. The author bases his
approach on a rigorous linguistic theory of narrative, rather than the
ad-hoc approach typical of content analysis. Focusing on statistical
techniques that mirror key narrative features, the book also shows
how quantitative narrative analysis (QNA) goes hand-in-hand with
another technique of qualitative data analysis: QCA (qualitative
comparative analysis).
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-6887-4
Volume 162
2010, 176 pages
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-2525-9

2010, 200 pages
Multiple Correspondence Analysis

Brigitte Le Roux and Henry Rouanet,
Universit Paris Descartes, France
Requiring no prior knowledge of correspondence analysis, this text
provides a nontechnical introduction to Multiple Correspondence
Analysis (MCA) as a method in its own right. The authors, Brigitte
LeRoux and Henry Rouanet, present the material in a practical
manner, keeping the needs of researchers foremost in mind.
Volume 163
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-6897-3
2010, 128 pages
Differential Item Functioning

Steven J. Osterlind, University of Missouri - Columbia
Howard T. Everson, The Center for Advanced Study in Education, City
University of New York
This new edition presents an up-to-date description of differential
item functioning. It describes varying procedures for addressing
differential item functioning (DIF) in practical testing contexts. The
authors present useful examples and studies of DIF that readers may
employ as a guide in their own work. They also cover major statistical
packages that can be employed in DIF analysis (e.g., SPSS, SAS, M+,
Minitab, and Systat).
Volume 161
Paperback: $17.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5494-5
2010, 104 pages
BUNDLE options5 for $75

Purchase 5 of the QASS titles at $75.00, normally priced at $90.00. To take advantage of
bundling options, order at www.sagepub.com/qass.
2010 QASS SERIES COMPLETE SET

Order the complete set of QASS titles, consisting of all the little green books published through
2010. Get 20% off when you purchase at www.sagepub.com/qass.
QASS Set: $2,355.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-9817-8
top-up bundle
Weve added to the Set! If you purchased the QASS Complete Set in the last few years, you may
be missing out on the newest titles from the series. To get the remaining six titles (Volumes
161-166, see above), order today at www.sagepub.com/qass.
Top-Up Bundle: $86.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-9816-1
Textbooks
Association Models
Textbooks
74
Order Your Needs Assessment Resources Today!

This set of five interrelated and sequenced books, spearheaded by series editor James William Altschuld,
take the reader through the needs assessment (NA) process. These volumes explain how to implement an
assessment and how to identify and prioritize needs.
Needs Assessment: Phase

I: Getting the Process
Started
Needs Assessment:
An Overview
James William Altschuld, Ohio State University
David Devraj Kumar

J. N. Eastmond, Jr.
This book serves as the guiding framework for

the other four books in the kit.
This book focuses on numerous approaches for

starting a meaningful needs assessment.
Paperback: $41.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7584-1
Paperback: $41.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7872-9
2010, 192 pages
2010,152 pages
Needs Assessment:
Phase II: Collecting Data
Needs Assessment: Phase

III: Taking Action for
Change

This book describes in depth the five most
common instruments and strategies of needs
assessment.
Laurie Stevahn, Seattle University

Jean A. King, University of Minnesota
Paperback: $41.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7513-1
This book takes the reader through a journey of

getting results utilized and then evaluating the
needs assessment itself.
2010, 152 pages
Needs Assessment:
Analysis and
Prioritization
Paperback: $41.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7583-4

2010, 184 pages

Jeffry L. White
This book explores how to analyze and combine
qualitative and quantitative data and how to put
results together.
Paperback: $41.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7557-5
2010, 136 pages
Each of the above titles are available on a

complimentary review basis to qualified professors.
All five titles are available together at a 20% discount!
ISBN: 978-0-7619-2595-8 $156.00 2010
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
fOR yOUR bookshelf 75
TITLES FOR PURCHASE
Pages 75-97

fOR yOUR bookshelf

New EDITION!
The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Research

Fourth Edition
Norman K. Denzin, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign
New Edition
Coming Soon!
Hardcover: $135.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7417-2

CONTENTS
PART I. LOCATING THE FIELD
PART II. PARADIGMS AND PERSPECTIVES
IN CONTENTION
PART III. STRATEGIES OF INQUIRY
PART IV. METHODS OF COLLECTING AND
ANALYZING EMPIRICAL MATERIALS

Representing the best thinking from top scholars from around the world, the Fourth Edition of this landmark
Handbook continues to define the present and shape the future of qualitative research. Contributors are
concerned with social justice and how peoples struggles can inform social policy; they write from a critical
framework and address issues of racism, poverty, and sexism; and they demonstrate how qualitative research
can bring about positive change. As with previous editions, the Fourth Edition is virtually an entirely new
volume: 26 chapters are new, with 16 chapters from the previous edition included but substantially revised.
Contributors Include: David L. Altheide, Michael Angrosino, Mary Brydon-Miller, Gaile Cannella, Kathy Charmaz, Susan
E. Chase, Julianne Cheek, Clifford Christians, John W. Creswell, Judith Davidson, Norman K. Denzin, Silvana diGregorio,
Cynthia B. Dillard, Greg Dimitriadis, Laura L. Ellingson, Frederick Erickson, Susan Finley, Bent Flyvbjerg, Sarah Gaston,
Michael D. Giardina, Davydd Greenwood, Egon G. Guba, Jaber F. Gubrium, Judith Hamera, James A. Holstein, John M.
Johnson, George Kamberelis, Joe L. Kincheloe, Michael Kral, Antjie Krog, Morten Levin, Yvonna S. Lincoln, James Liu, Susan
A. Lynham, Patricia Maguire, Peter McLaren, Donna Mertens, Janice M. Morse, Josh L. Newman, Susan Noffke, Chinwe
Okpalaoka, Virgina Olesen, Ronald J. Pelias, Anssi Perkyl, Elisabeth Adams St. Pierre, Ken Plummer, Jon D. Prosser, Judith
Rosenberg, Johanna Ruusuvuori, Anu Sabhlok, Linda Shopes, Tami Spry, Hilary Stacei, Shirley Steinberg, Martin Sullivan,
Abbas Tashakkori, Charles Teddlie, Barbara Tedlock, and Harry Torrance
PART V. THE ART AND PRACTICES OF

INTERPRETATION, EVALUATION, AND
PRESENTATION
PART VI. THE FUTURE OF QUALITATIVE
RESEARCH
Norman K. Denzin is Professor of

Communications, Sociology and Humanities at
the University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign.
Editor of Cultural Studies <=> Critical
Methodologies, Qualitative Inquiry, and Studies
in Symbolic Interaction: A Research Journal, Dr.
Denzin is the author of numerous books. He is
the recipient of two awards from the Society for
the Study of Symbolic Interaction: The Cooley
Award in 1988, and the George Herbert Mead
Award for lifetime contribution to the study of
human behavior in 1997.
Yvonna S. Lincoln is Professor of Higher

Education and Educational Administration at
Texas A & M University. Along with this text,
she is author, coauthor, or editor of such books
as Naturalistic Inquiry and Fourth Generation
Evaluation (both with Egon G. Guba), and
Organizational Theory and Inquiry. Vice President
of Division J (Postsecondary Education) of the
American Educational Research Association,
Dr. Lincoln formerly served as president of the
American Evaluation Association and is the
recipient of many prestigious awards.
Titles for Purchase
Also from Norman K. Denzin and

Yvonna S. Lincoln...
Collecting and Interpreting
Qualitative Materials (p. 19)
The Landscape of Qualitative
Research (p. 19)
Strategies of Qualitative Inquiry
(p. 19)
About the Authors
76 fOR yOUR bookshelf
The SAGE Handbook of

Measurement
New!
Handbook of
Multicultural Measures
Geoffrey Walford, University of Oxford, U.K.

Eric Tucker, N.A.U.D.L.
Glenn C. Gamst, Christopher Liang, and Aghop

Der-Karabetian, University of La Verne
This Handbook is the first and most
comprehensive collection of multicultural
measurement instruments. The authors have
identified approximately 90 instruments used to
assess and evaluate multicultural populations,
and they brought them all together into one
volume. The volume will begin with a chapter that outlines the framework for
the book followed by a chapter that describes the fundamentals of psychometric
properties. The next part will contain the actual instruments.
Madhu Viswanathan, University of Illinois,

Urbana-Champaign
The SAGE Handbook of Measurement is a
unique methodological resource that draws
together contributions from the authors of the
classic works in Measurement studies of the
past twenty five years. The Handbook covers the full range of disciplines where
Measurement studies are common; policy studies, education studies, health studies,
business studies, and more.
CONTENTS
PART I. METHODS FOR DATA COLLECTION
PART II. THE CONTEXT OF MEASUREMENT
PART III. FUNDAMENTAL ISSUES IN MEASUREMENT
PART IV. THE REAL WORLD PRACTICE OF MEASUREMENT
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Testing, Measurement, and Culture
3. The Utility of Measurement: Application of the Multicultural Assessment-Intervention
Process (MAIP)
4. Multicultural Competence Measures
5. Racial Identity and Ethnic Identity Measures
6. Acculturation Measures
7. Racism- and Prejudice- Related Measures
8. Gender-Related Measures
9. Sexual Orientation-Related Measures
10. Disability Attitude Measures
11. Appendices
Hardcover: $157.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4814-2

2010, 648 pages
New!

GIS and Society
Hardcover: $130.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7883-5

2011, 688 pages
Timothy Nyerges, University of Washington

Helen Couclelis, University of California, Santa
Barbara
New!
Robert McMaster, University of Minnesota
The SAGE Handbook of Innovation in

Malcolm Williams, Cardiff University, U.K.
W. Paul Vogt, Illinois State University
This Handbook, edited by internationally recognized scholars in the field, provides
a comprehensive, pitch-perfect critical assessment of the field. It brings together
a glittering assembly of the key figures working in the field of Methods today and
demonstrates the continuities and productive tensions between classical traditions
and real world research today.
CONTENTS
1. Foundations of Geographic Information and Society
PART I. THE SOCIAL CONTEXT OF RESEARCH

PART II. DESIGN AND DATA COLLECTION
PART III. INTEGRATING THE ANALYSIS OF NEW DATA TYPES
PART IV. SAMPLING, INFERENCE AND MEASUREMENT
2. Geographic Information and Modern Life

3. Alternative Representations of Geographic Information and Society
4. Organizations and Institutions
5. Participation and Community Issues
6. Value, Fairness, and Privacy
Hardcover: $157.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4648-3
Hardcover: $140.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4645-2
May 2011, 480 pages
CONTENTS
Titles for Purchase
The SAGE Handbook of GIS and Society

emphasizes the theoretical, methodological,
and substantive diversity within GIS and society
research. It examines the integrity and intellectual
coherence of GIS and society as a field of study, while also looking at resonances
with/between key components and other disciplines such as geography, computer
science, sociology, cognitive science, criminology, anthropology, health sciences
and much more.
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Handbook of Critical
and Indigenous
Methodologies
Handbook of the Arts

in Qualitative Research
Norman K. Denzin, University of Illinois,

Urbana-Champaign
J. Gary Knowles and Ardra L. Cole, Ontario

Institute of Education Studies, University
of Toronto, Canada
Perspectives, Methodologies, Examples,

and Issues

Linda Tuhiwai Smith, University of Waikato,
Hamilton, New Zealand
The Handbook of Critical and Indigenous
Methodologies is the only handbook to make connectionsregarding many of the
perspectives of the new critical theorists and emerging indigenous methodologies.
Built on the foundation of the landmark SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Research,
the Handbook of Critical and Indigenous Methodologies extends beyond
the investigation of qualitative inquiry itself to explore the indigenous and
nonindigenous voices that inform research, policy, politics, and social justice.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PART I. KNOWING
PART II. METHODOLOGIES
PART III. GENRES
PART IV. INQUIRY PROCESSES
PART V. ISSUES AND CHALLENGES
PART VI. ARTS IN RESEARCH ACROSS DISCIPLINES
Hardcover: $146.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-0531-2

2008, 720 pages
Teaching Quantitative Methods

Getting the Basics Right
Geoff Payne, University of Newcastle, U.K.
Malcolm Williams, Cardiff University, U.K.
This exciting collection is both useful and timely. It clearly lays out the problems,
strategies and resources associated with the teaching of quantitative methods in
modern universities. Addressing the perceived crisis of number in a practical and
fresh way the book sets out dynamic new approaches to teaching quantitative
methods. It offers historical, comparative, analytical reflection and empirical
evidence concerning the crisis in contemporary social sciences.
CONTENTS
1. Preface
2. Introduction: The Crisis of Number
3. Mapping the Academic Landscape of Quantitative Methods
4. The International Benchmarking Review of Best Practice in the Provision of
Undergraduate Teaching in Quantitative Methods in the Social Sciences
5. The Place of Quantification in the Professional Training of Sociologists: Some Career
Reflections
6. Challenges and Potential Opportunities for Developing Teaching in Quantitative Methods
7. The Development of Undergraduate Curricula in Quantitative Methods
8. Integrating Quantitative Methods in the Undergraduate Social Sciences Curricula and
Dissertations
9. Increasing the Use of Large Scale Surveys in Undergraduate Dissertations in the Social
Sciences
10. Statistics for Social Sciences: Enhancing Teaching and Learning
11. Sharing Teaching and Learning Resource
12. The Problem, Strategies and Resources in Teaching Quantitative Methods: The Way
Forward
Paperback: $43.95, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0001-0

Hardcover: $146.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-1803-9
2008, 624 pages
Titles for Purchase
Introduction: Critical Methodologies and Indigenous Inquiry

PART I. LOCATING THE FIELD: PERFORMING THEORIES OF DECOLONIZING INQUIRY
1. Decolonizing Performances: Deconstructing the Global Postcolonial
2. Feminisms From Unthought Locations: Indigenous Worldviews, Marginalized Feminisms
and Revisioning an Anticolonial Social Science
3. Waiting for the Call: The Moral Activist Role of Critical Race Theory Scholarship
4. Critical Race Theory and Indigenous Methodologies
5. Queer(y)ing the Postcolonial Through the West(ern)
6. Indigenous Knowledges in Education: Complexities, Dangers, and Profound Benefits
7. Do You Believe in Geneva?: Methods and Ethics at the Global Local Nexus
8. Challenging Neoliberalisms New World Order: The Promise of Critical Pedagogy
9. Rethinking Critical Pedagogy: Socialismo Nepantla and the Specter of Che
PART II. CRITICAL AND INDIGENOUS PEDAGOGIES
10. Indigenous and Authentic: Hawaiian Epistemology and the Triangulation of Meaning
11. Red Pedagogy: The Un-Methodology
12. Borderland-Mestizaje Feminism: The New Tribalism
13. When the Ground Is Black, the Ground Is Fertile: Exploring Endarkened Feminist
Epistemology and Healing Methodologies of the Spirit
14. An Islamic Perspective on Knowledge, Knowing, and Methodology
PART III. CRITICAL INTERPRETIVE INDIGENOUS INQUIRY
15. History, Myth, and Identity in the New Indian Story
16. Self and Other: Auto-Reflexive and Indigenous Ethnography
17. Autoethnography Is Queer
18. Narrative Poetics and Performative Interventions
19. Reading the Visual, Tracking the Global: Postcolonial Feminist Methodology and the
Chameleon Codes of Resistance
PART IV. POWER, TRUTH, ETHICS, AND SOCIAL JUSTICE
20. Te Kotahitanga: Kaupapa Maori in Mainstream Classrooms
21. Modern Democracy: The Complexities Behind Appropriating Indigenous Models of
Governance and Implementation
22. Rethinking Collaboration: Working the Indigene-Coloniser Hyphen s
23. Seven Orientations for the Development of Indigenous Science Education
24. Research Ethics for Protecting Indigenous Knowledge and Heritage: Institutional and
Researcher Responsibilities
25. Justice as Healing: Going Outside the Colonizers Cage
26. The South African Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC): Ways of Knowing Mrs
Konile
27. Transnational, National, and Indigenous Racial Subjects: Moving From Critical Discourse
to Praxis
28. Epilogue
29. Feminisms From Unthought Locations: Indigenous Worldviews, Marginalized Feminisms
and Revisioning an Anticolonial Social Science
30. When the Ground Is Black, the Ground Is Fertile: Exploring Endarkened Feminist
Epistemology and Healing Methodologies of the Spirit
31. Modern Democracy: The Complexities Behind Appropriating Indigenous Models of
Governance and Implementation
This Handbook represents an unfolding and

expanding orientation to qualitative social science
research that draws inspiration, concepts,
processes, and representational forms from the
arts. In this defining work, the books editors bring together the top scholars in
qualitative methods to provide a comprehensive overview of the past, present,
and future of arts-based research.

Grounded Theory

Educational Action
Research
Paperback Edition
Antony Bryant, Leeds Metropolitan University, U.K.
Susan E. Noffke, University of Illinois at

Urbana-Champaign
Kathy Charmaz, Sonoma State University, Rohnert Park

Antony Bryant & Kathy Charmaz bring together
leading researchers and practitioners of the
method from the US, the UK, Australia and Europe
to represent all the major standpoints within
Grounded Theory, demonstrating the richness of
the approach. The contributions cover a wide range of perspectives on the method,
covering its features and ramifications, its intricacies in use, its demands on the skills
and capabilities of the researcher and its position in the domain of research methods.
CONTENTS
PART I. ORIGINS AND HISTORY
1. GT in Historical Perspective by Antony Bryant & Kathy Charmaz
2. An Epistemological Account
3. Discovery of GT in Practice by Eleanor Krassner Covan
4. Legacy of Multiple Mentors
5. Living GT by Susan Leigh Star
6. Cognitive & Emotional Forms of Pragmatism
PART II. GTM AND FORMAL GT
7. Doing Formal Theory by Barney Glaser
8. Essential Properties for Growing GT by Phyllis Stern
9. Evolution of Formal GT by Margaret Kearney
10. Orthodoxy versus Power by Jane Hood
11. Grounding Categories by Ian Dey
PART III. GT IN PRACTICE
12. Development of Categories by Udo Kelle
13. Abduction by Jo Reichertz
14. Sampling in GT by Janice Morse
15. Memo-writing in GT by Lora Lempert
16. Coding by Judith Holton
PART IV. PRACTICALITIES
17. Making Teams work in Conducting GT by Carolyn Wiener
18. Teaching GT by Sharlene Hesse-Biber
19. GT as a Tool for IS Research by Cathy Urquhart
PART V. GT IN THE RESEARCH METHODS CONTEXT
20. GT and Situational Analysis by Adele Clarke & Carrie Friese
21. GT and Action Research by Bob Dick
22. Integrating GT and Feminist Methods by Virginia Olesen
23. Accommodating Critical Theory by Barry Gibson
24. GT and the Politics of Interpretation by Norman Denzin
25. GT & Diversity by Denise ONeil Green, John W. Creswell, Ronald J. Shope, & Vicki L.
Plano Clark
26. Ethnography by Stefan Timmermans & Iddo Tavory
PART VI. GT IN THE CONTEXT OF THE SOCIAL SCIENCES
27. GT and Reflexivity by Katja Mruck & Guenter Mey
28. Mediating Structure and Interaction by Bruno Hildenbrand
29. Tensions in Using GT by Karen Locke
30. GT & Pragmatism by Joerg Struebing
Paperback: $55.95, ISBN: 978-1-8492-0478-1
Titles for Purchase
2010, 656 pages
Bridget Somekh, Manchester Metropolitan

University, U.K.
Presenting and critiquing predominant and
emergent traditions of Educational Action
Research internationally, this major work includes
theoretical and practical chapters by highly respected scholars whose work has
been seminal in building knowledge and expertise in the field. It also contains
chapters exemplifying the work of prominent practitioner and community groups
working outside universities. The editors provide an introduction and conclusion,
as well as an opening chapter which charts the historical development of action
research and provides an analysis of its underlying theories.
CONTENTS
Introduction by Susan E. Noffke and Bridget Somekh
1. Revisiting the Professional, Personal and Political Dimensions of Action Research by
Susan E. Noffke
PART I. ACTION RESEARCH METHODOLOGY: DIVERSITY OF RATIONALES AND PRACTICES
PART II. PROFESSIONAL: KNOWLEDGE PRODUCTION, STAFF DEVELOPMENT, AND THE
STATUS OF EDUCATORS
PART III. PERSONAL: SELF-AWARENESS, DEVELOPMENT AND IDENTITY
PART IV. POLITICAL: POPULAR KNOWLEDGE, DIFFERENCE, AND FRAMEWORKS FOR
CHANGE
Hardcover: $150.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4708-4

2009, 568 pages
Handbook of Narrative
Inquiry
Mapping a Methodology
D. Jean Clandinin, University of Alberta, Canada
Composed by international researchers, this
Handbook is the first comprehensive and
interdisciplinary overview of the developing
methodology of narrative inquiry. The one-of-akind volume outlines the historical development
and philosophical underpinnings of narrative
inquiry as well as describes different forms of
narrative inquiry.
CONTENTS
PART I. SITUATING NARRATIVE INQUIRY
PART II. STARTING WITH TELLING STORIES
PART III. STARTING WITH LIVING STORIES
PART IV. NARRATIVE INQUIRY IN THE PROFESSIONS
PART V. COMPLEXITIES IN NARRATIVE INQUIRY
PART VI. NARRATING PERSISTING ISSUES IN NARRATIVE INQUIRY
PART VII. FUTURE POSSIBILITIES
Hardcover: $146.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-1562-5

2007, 720 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291

Case-Based Methods
The Survey Kit

Second Edition

David Byrne, University of Durham, U.K.

This easy-to-understand, easy-to-follow,

comprehensive guide for the novice survey
researcher provides useful information about
some qualitative research techniques such as
interviews, focus groups, observational analysis,
and content analysis.
This book provides a comprehensive, critical

examination of case-oriented research. It offers
concrete proposals about the best research
methods and provides an unparalleled guide to
the emergence and complexity of the field.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Introduction: Case-Based Methods: Why We Need Them; What They Are; How to Do Them by
David Byrne
PART I. THE METHODOLOGICAL CONTEXT OF CASE-BASED METHODS
1. Complexity and Case by David L. Harvey
2. The Contextualist Approach to Social Science Methodology by Lars Mjset
3. Reflexivity, Realism and the Process of Casing by Bob Carter and Alison Sealey
4. Single-Case Probabilities by Malcolm Williams and Wendy Dyer
5. Complex Realist and Configurational Approaches to Cases: A Radical Synthesis by David
Byrne
PART II. METHODS AND TECHNIQUES OF CASE-BASED RESEARCH
6. Explanatory Typologies in Qualitative Analysis by Colin Elman
7. Introducing Cluster Analysis: What can it teach us about the Case? by Emma Uprichard
8. Visualising Types: The Potential of Correspondence Analysis by Dianne Phillips and John
Phillips
9. How Classification Works, Or Doesnt: The Case of Chronic Pain by Emma Whelan
10. Quantitative Approaches to Case Based Methods
11. Case-Centred Methods and Quantitative Analysis by Ray Kent
12. The Logic and Assumptions of MDSO - MSDO Designs by Gisle De Meur and Alain
Gottcheiner
13. The Case for Qualitative Comparative Analysis (QCA): Adding Leverage for Thick CrossCase Comparison by Benot Rihoux and Bojana Lobe
14. On the Duality of Cases and Variables: Correspondence Analysis (CA) and Qualitative
Comparative Analysis (QCA) by Ronald L. Breiger
15. Using Cluster Analysis, Qualitative Comparative Analysis and NVivo in Relation to the
Establishment of Causal Configurations with Pre-existing Large N Datasets: Machining
Hermeneutics by David Byrne
16. Qualitative Approaches to Case-Based Research
17. Computer-Based Qualitative Methods in Case-Study Research by Nigel Fielding and
Richard Warnes
18. Extending the Ethnographic Case Study by Sen Riain
19. Scope in Case-Study Research by Gary Goertz and James Mahoney
20. Small-N Access Cases to Refine Theories of Social Exclusion and Access to Socially
Excluded Individuals and Groups by Nick Emmel and Kahryn Hughes
21. Using Comparative Data: A Systems Approach to a Multiple Case Study by Fred Carden
PART III. CASE-BASED METHODS IN DISCIPLINES AND FIELDS
22. Making the Most of an Historical Case Study: Configuration, Sequence, Casing, and the
US Old-Age Pension Movement by Edwin Amenta
23. Poetry and History: The Case for Literary Evidence by John Walton
24. Social Interactions and the Demand for Sport: Cluster Analysis in Economics by Paul
Downward and Joseph Riordan
25. The Proper Relationship of Comparative-historical Analysis to Statistical Analysis:
Subordination, Integration or Separation? by James Mahoney and P. Larkin Terrie
26. Case Studies and the Configurational Analysis of Organizational Phenomena by Peer C. Fiss
27. The Case in Medicine by Frances Griffiths
28. Team-based Aggregation of Qualitative Case Study Data in Health Care Contexts:
Challenges and Learning by Sue Dopson, Ewan Ferlie, Louise Fitzgerald and Louise Locock
29. Working with Cases in Development Contexts: Some Insights from an Outlier by Pip Bevan
30. Non-Nested and Nested Cases in a Socioeconomic Village Study by Wendy Olsen
31. Causality and Interpretation in Qualitative Policy-Related Research by David Byrne,
Wendy Olsen and Sandra Duggan
32. Reflections on Casing and Case-oriented Research by Charles C. Ragin
VOLUME 1. THE SURVEY HANDBOOK, 2ND.

VOLUME 2. HOW TO ASK SURVEY QUESTIONS, 2ND.
VOLUME 3. HOW TO CONDUCT SELF-ADMINISTERED AND MAIL SURVEYS, 2ND.
VOLUME 4. HOW TO CONDUCT TELEPHONE SURVEYS, 2ND.
VOLUME 5. HOW TO CONDUCT IN-PERSON INTERVIEWS FOR SURVEYS, 2ND.
VOLUME 6. HOW TO DESIGN SURVEY STUDIES, 2ND.
VOLUME 7. HOW TO SAMPLE IN SURVEYS, 2ND.
VOLUME 8. HOW TO ASSESS AND INTERPRET SURVEY PSYCHOMETRICS, 2ND.
VOLUME 9. HOW TO MANAGE, ANALYZE AND INTERPRET SURVEY DATA, 2ND.
VOLUME 10. HOW TO REPORT ON SURVEYS, 2ND.
Kit Print: $175.00, ISBN: 978-0-7619-2510-1

2002, 1434 pages
The SAGE International

Handbook of
Educational Evaluation
Katherine Ryan, University of Illinois at
Urbana-Champaign
J. Bradley Cousins, University of Ottawa, Canada
Bringing together the expertise of top evaluation
leaders from around the world, this volume
addresses methods and applications in the
field, particularly as they relate to policy- and
decision-making in an era of globalization. The comprehensive collection of
articles in thisHandbookcompels readers to consider globalization influences on
educational evaluation within distinct genres or families of evaluation approaches.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION CONTEXT
PART II. THE ROLE OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION
PART III. EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION, CAPACITY BUILDING, AND MONITORING
PART IV. EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION AS LEARNING AND DISCOVERY
PART V. EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION IN A POLITICAL WORLD
PART VI. EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION: OPPORTUNITIES AND NEW DILEMMAS
2009, 608 pages

Hardcover: $150.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3051-2
2010, 560 pages
Titles for Purchase
Hardcover: $130.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4068-9
SAGE Handbook of
Mixed Methods in
Social & Behavioral
Research

Qualitative Geography
Second Edition
Stuart Aitken, San Diego State University
Abbas Tashakkori, University of North Texas
Mike Crang, University of Durham, U.K.
Charles Teddlie, Louisiana State University,

Baton Rouge
Linda McDowell, University of Oxford, U.K.
Dydia DeLyser, Louisiana State University

Steve Herbert, University of Washington
Surveying the differing viewpoints and

disciplinary approaches to using mixed methods, this volume helps readers
explore the answers to a wide range of key questions in the field, including Can
using mixed methods offset the disadvantages that certain of the methods have
by themselves? What criteria can a researcher use to select the best mixed
methods design for his or her project? and What are the points of agreement
and controversy regarding design issues in mixed methods research? This
breakthrough Second Edition, containing all new chapters, examines mixed
methods research from the research enterprise to paradigmatic issues through to
application of mixed methods research in the major disciplinary fields.
Titles for Purchase
CONTENTS
1. Overview of Contemporary Issues in Mixed Methods Research
PART I. CONCEPTUAL ISSUES: PHILOSOPHICAL, THEORETICAL, SOCIOPOLITICAL
2. Mapping the Developing Landscape of Mixed Methods Research
3. A History of Philosophical and Theoretical Issues for Mixed Methods Research
4. Pragmatism and the Philosophical Foundations of Mixed Methods Research
5. Dialectics and Pragmatism: Being of Consequence
6. Realism as a Stance for Mixed Method Research
7. Feminist Approaches to Mixed Methods Research: Linking Theory and Praxis
8. Utilization of Mixed Methods for Transformative Purposes
9. The Multidimensional Model of Research Methodology: An Integrated Set of Continua
10. Research Design, As Independent of Methods
11. Interviews with the Early Developers of Mixed Methods Research
PART II. ISSUES REGARDING METHODS AND METHODOLOGY
12. Research Questions in Mixed Methods Research
13. An Inclusive Framework for Conceptualizing Mixed Methods Design Typologies: Moving
Toward Fully Integrated Synergistic Research Models
14. Procedures and Practice of Mixed Method Design: Maintaining Control, Rigor, and
Complexity
15. Advanced Sampling Designs in Mixed Research: Current Practices and Emerging Trends
in the Social and Behavioral Sciences
16. Hermeneutic Content Analysis: Textual and Audiovisual Analyses within a Mixed Methods
Framework
17. Emergent Data Analysis Techniques in Mixed Methods Research: A Synthesis
18. Computer Assisted Integration of Mixed Methods Data Sources and Analysis
19. Visual Displays for Mixed Methods Findings
20. Using Q Methodology and Q Factor Analysis in Mixed Methods Research
21. Assessing the Quality of Mixed Methods Research: Towards a Comprehensive Framework
PART III. CONTEMPORARY APPLICATIONS OF MIXED METHODS RESEARCH
22. Meeting the Practical Challenges of Mixed Methods Research
23. Emerging Trends in the Utilization of Integrated Designs in the Social, Behavioral, and
Health Sciences
24. Using Mixed Methods in Monitoring and Evaluation: Experiences from International
Development Evaluation
25. Teaching Mixed Methods and Action Research: Pedagogical, Practical, and Evaluative
Considerations
26. The Use of Mixed Methods in Biographical Research
27. The Contribution of Mixed Methods to Recent Research on Educational Effectiveness
28. Current Practices and Emerging Trends in Conducting Mixed Methods Intervention
Studies in the Health Sciences
29. Mixed Methods and Systematic Reviews: Examples and Emerging Issues
30. Funding and Publishing Integrated Studies: Writing Effective Mixed Methods Manuscripts
and Grant Proposals
31. Current Developments and Emerging Trends in Integrated Research Methodology
The process of learning qualitative research has

altered dramatically and this Handbook explores
the growth, change, and complexity within the topic and looks back over its history
to assess the current state of the art, and indicate possible future directions.
Moving beyond textbook rehearsals of standard issues, the book examines key
methodological debates and conflicts, approaching them in a critical, discursive
manner.
CONTENTS
Introduction: Engaging Qualitative Geography by Dydia DeLyser, Stuart C. Aitken, Steve
Herbert, Mike Crang and Linda McDowell
PART I. OPENINGS
PART II. ENCOUNTERS AND COLLABORATIONS
PART III. MAKING SENSE
Hardcover: $150.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-1991-3

2010, 448 pages

Remote Sensing
Timothy A. Warner, West Virginia University
M. Duane Nellis, Kansas State University
Giles M. Foody, University of Nottingham, U.K.
A magnificent achievement. A whos who of
contemporary remote sensing have produced an
engaging, wide-ranging and scholarly review of the
field in just one volume.
Professor Paul Curran
Vice-Chancellor, Bournemouth University
Using a wide range of spatial, spectral, temporal, and radiometric scales, remote
sensing is a large and diverse field for which this Handbook will be the key
research reference. Illustrated throughout, The SAGE Handbook of Remote
Sensing provides researchers with a definitive statement of the core concepts and
methodologies in the discipline.
CONTENTS
PART II. ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION & THE TERRESTRIAL ENVIRONMENT
PART III. DIGITAL SENSORS AND IMAGE CHARACTERISTICS
PART IV. REMOTE SENSING ANALYSIS: DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION
PART V. REMOTE SENSING ANALYSIS: APPLICATIONS
PART VI. CONCLUSIONS
Hardcover: $150.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3616-3

Hardcover: $135.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7266-6
2010, 568 pages
2010, 912 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291

Spatial Analysis
Handbook of
Probability
A. Stewart Fotheringham, National University of

Ireland, Maynooth, Ireland
Theory and Applications

Tams Rudas, Eotvos Lorand University, Budapest
Peter A. Rogerson, University of Buffalo

The use of Geographical Information Systems
(GIS) has increased the demand for knowledge
about spatial analytical techniques across a
range of disciplines. Responding to this demand,
this handbook offers a comprehensive and
authoritative discussion of issues and techniques in the field of spatial data analysis.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction by Stewart Fotheringham and Peter A. Rogerson
2. The Special Nature of Spatial Data by Robert Haining
3. The Role of GIS by David Martin
4. Geovisualisation and Geovisual Analytics by Urka Demar
5. Availability of Spatial Data Mining Techniques by Shashi Shekhar et al
6. Spatial Autocorrelation by Marie-Jos Fortin and Mark R. T. Dale
7. The Modifiable Areal Unit Problem (MAUP) by David Wong
8. Spatial Weights by Robin Dubin
9. Geostatistics and Spatial Interpolation by Peter M. Atkinson and Christopher D. Lloyd
10. Spatial Sampling by Eric Delmelle
11. Statistical Inference for Geographical Processes by Chris Brunsdon
12. Fuzzy Sets in Spatial Analysis by Vincent B. Robinson
13. Geographically Weighted Regression by Stewart Fotheringham
14. Spatial Regression by Luc Anselin
15. Spatial Microsimulation by D. Ballas and G. P. Clarke
16. Detection of Clustering in Spatial Data by Lance Waller
17. Bayesian Spatial Analysis by Andrew B. Lawson and Sudipto Banerjee
18. Monitoring Changes in Spatial Patterns by Peter A. Rogerson
19. Case-Control Clustering for Mobile Populations by Geoffrey M. Jacquez and Jaymie R.
Meliker
20. Neural Networks for Spatial Data Analysis by Manfred M. Fischer
21. Geocomputation by Harvey J. Miller
22. Applied Retail Location Models Using Spatial Interaction Tools by Morton E. OKelly
23. Spatial Analysis on a Network by Atsuyuki Okabe and Toshiaki Satoh
24. Challenges in Spatial Analysis by Michael F. Goodchild
25. The Future for Spatial Analysis by Reginald G. Golledge
This is a valuable reference guide for readers

interested in gaining a basic understanding of
probability theory or its applications in problem
solving in the other disciplines.
CHOICE
Providing cutting-edge perspectives and real-world insights into the greater utility
of probability and its applications, this handbook offers an equal balance of theory
and direct applications in a non-technical, yet comprehensive, format.
CONTENTS
PART I. BACKGROUND AND THEORY OF PROBABILITY
PART II. PROBABILITY THEORY IN RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
PART III. APPLICATIONS
Hardcover: $146.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-2714-7

2008, 488 pages
New!

Qualitative Methods in
Health Research
Ivy Bourgeault, University of Ottawa, Canada
Robert Dingwall, University of Nottingham, U.K.
Ray de Vries, University of Michigan
Hardcover: $150.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-1082-8

2010, 528 pages
A comprehensive and authoritative source, this

Handbook compiles accessible yet vigorous
academic contributions by respected academics
from the fast-growing field of qualitative methods in health research.
CONTENTS
PART II. CONTRIBUTIONS OF QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
PART III. THEORY
PART IV. COLLECTING & ANALYSING DATA
PART V. ISSUES IN QUALITATIVE HEALTH RESEARCH
PART VI. APPLYING QUALITATIVE METHODS
2011, 786 pages
Titles for Purchase
Hardcover: $140.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7292-0

Quantitative Methods
in Psychology

Applied Social
Research Methods
Roger E. Millsap, Arizona State University
Second Edition
Alberto Maydeu-Olivares, University of

Barcelona, Spain
Leonard Bickman, Vanderbilt University

Debra J. Rog, Westat
Authoritative and forward thinking, this

Handbook presents an overview of the field and
outlines the directions for future developments
and the challenges facing methodologists.
CONTENTS
PART I. DESIGN AND INFERENCE
PART II. MEASUREMENT THEORY
PART III. SCALING
PART IV. DATA ANALYSIS
PART V. STRUCTURAL EQUATION MODELS
PART VI. LONGITUDINAL MODELS
PART VII. SPECIALIZED METHODS
The Second Edition of The SAGE Handbook

of Applied Social Research Methods provides
students and researchers with the most
comprehensive resource covering core methods, research designs, and data
collection, management, and analysis issues. This thoroughly revised edition
continues to place critical emphasis on finding the tools that best fit the research
question given the constraints of deadlines, budget, and available staff. Each
chapter offers guidance on how to make intelligent and conscious tradeoffs so
that one can refine and hone the research question as new knowledge is gained,
unanticipated obstacles are encountered, or contextual shifts take place.
CONTENTS
WHY A HANDBOOK OF APPLIED SOCIAL RESEARCH? by Leonard Bickman & Debra J. Rog
PART I. APPROACHES TO APPLIED RESEARCH
PART II. APPLIED RESEARCH DESIGNS
PART III. PRACTICAL DATA COLLECTION
Hardcover: $150.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3091-8

2010, 800 pages
Hardcover: $146.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5031-2
The Handbook of
Social Research Ethics
2009, 680 pages
Donna M. Mertens, Gallaudet University
The SAGE Handbook of Social

Network Analysis
Pauline E. Ginsberg, Utica College

The Handbook of Social Research Ethics is the
first comprehensive volume of its kind to offer
a deeper understanding of the history, theory,
philosophy, and implementation of applied social
research ethics. Editors Donna M. Mertens
and Pauline Ginsberg bring together eminent,
international scholars across the social and behavioral sciences and education to
address the ethical issues that arise in the theory and practice of research within
the technologically advancing and culturally complex world in which we live. In
addition, this volume examines the ethical dilemmas that arise in the relationship
between research practice and social justice issues.
CONTENTS
Titles for Purchase
PART I. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY

PART II. PERSPECTIVES ON ETHICAL REGULATION
PART III. ETHICS AND RESEARCH METHODS
PART IV. ETHICAL ISSUES IN RESEARCH PRACTICE
PART V. ETHICS WITHIN DIVERSE CULTURAL GROUPS
PART VI. FUTURE DIRECTIONS
John Scott, University of Essex

Peter Carrington, University of Waterloo, Canada
Social network analysis has been one of the fastest growing and most influential
areas of recent times. Why has this happened? What are the key features of
social network analysis? This sparkling Handbook offers an unrivalled resource.
Systematically, it introduces readers to the key concepts, substantive topics,
central methods and prime debates. Among the specific areas covered are network
theory, interdisciplinary applications, online networks, corporate networks, lobbying
networks, deviant networks, measuring devices, key methodologies, and software
applications.
CONTENTS
PART I. GENERAL ISSUES
PART II. SUBSTANTIVE TOPICS
PART III. CONCEPTS AND METHODS
Hardcover: $140.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7395-8

May 2011, 712 pages
Hardcover: $146.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4918-7
2009, 688 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
The SAGE Handbook of the Philosophy

of Social Sciences
The SAGE Handbook of Visual

Research Methods
Ian C. Jarvie, York University, Toronto, Ontario, Canada
Eric Margolis, Arizona State University
Jesus Zamora-Bonilla, UNED, Madrid, Spain
Luc Pauwels, University of Antwerp, Belgium
In this exciting handbook, Ian Jarvie and Jess Zamora-Bonilla have put together
a wide-ranging and authoritative overview of the main philosophical currents
and traditions at work in the social sciences today. Starting with the history of
social scientific thought, this handbook sets out to explore that core fundamentals
of social science practice, from issues of ontology and epistemology to issues
of practical method. Along the way it investigates such notions as paradigm,
empiricism, postmodernism, naturalism, language, agency, power, culture, and
causality.
This 42-chapter volume represents the state of the art in visual research. It
provides an introduction to the field for a variety of visual researchers: scholars
and graduate students in art, sociology, anthropology, communication, education,
cultural studies, womens studies, ethnic studies, global studies and related social
science and humanities disciplines. The SAGE Handbook of Visual Research
Methods encompasses the breadth and depth of the field, and points the way to
future research possibilities. It illustrates cutting edge as well as long-standing
and recognized practices. This text is not only about research, it is also an
example of the way that the visual can be incorporated in data collection and
the presentation of research findings. Contributors to the book are from diverse
backgrounds and include both established names in the field and rising stars.
Chapters describe a methodology or analytical framework, its strengths and
limitations, possible fields of application and practical guidelines on how to apply
the method or technique.
CONTENTS
PART I. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PHILOSOPHY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
PART II. CENTRAL ISSUES IN SOCIAL ONTOLOGY
PART III. A PHILOSOPHERS GUIDE TO SOCIAL SCIENCE PARADIGMS
PART IV. METHODOLOGY: ASSESSING AND USING SOCIAL THEORIES
CONTENTS
Hardcover: $140.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7400-9

Social Research
Methods
Pertti Alasuutari, University of Tampere, Finland
PART I. FRAMING THE FIELD OF VISUAL RESEARCH

PART II. PRODUCING VISUAL DATA AND INSIGHT
PART III. PARTICIPATORY AND SUBJECT-CENTERED APPROACHES
PART IV. ANALYTICAL FRAMEWORKS AND APPROACHES
PART V. VISUALIZATION TECHNOLOGIES AND PRACTICES
PART VI. MOVING BEYOND THE VISUAL
PART VII. OPTIONS AND ISSUES FOR USING AND PRESENTING VISUAL RESEARCH
Hardcover: $140.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7556-3

Leonard Bickman, Vanderbilt University

Julia Brannen, Institute of Education, University of
London, U.K.
The SAGE Handbook for Social Research
Methods is a must for every social-science
researcher. It charts the new and evolving terrain of social research methodology,
covering qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods in one volume.
CONTENTS
PART I. DIRECTIONS IN SOCIAL RESEARCH

PART II. RESEARCH DESIGNS
PART III. DATA COLLECTION AND FIELDWORK
PART IV. TYPES OF ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF EVIDENCE
Paperback: $53.95, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0730-9

2008, 648 pages
Titles for Purchase
84 Titles to Recommend to Your Students
The Adjunct Faculty

Handbook
Titles to Recommend
to Your Students
Second Edition
Lorri E. Cooper, Marymount University
The Art of Funding and

Implementing Ideas
A Guide to Proposal Development and Project
Management
Arnold R. Shore, Boston College
John M. Carfora, Loyola Marymount University,
Los Angeles
This resource provides a step-by-step approach
to turning a research idea into a proposal worthy
of funding, demystifying the process as a result.
The authors present a proven approach to the development of research ideas
alongside a systematic treatment of proposals section-by-section and project
management function-by-function. Highly accessible, this book gives examples for
each aspect of the proposal development and works through sketches of ideas to
fully developed
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Idea Development
3. Funding
4. Proposals
5. Managing a Funded Project
6. Looking Backward and Forward
Bryan A. Booth, University of Maryland University

College
Since the First Edition of The Adjunct Faculty
Handbook was published in 1996, the number
of adjunct faculty members in colleges and
universities has increased to the point that most
of those institutions could not function efficiently without them. This Second
Edition addresses changes in todays higher education environment and their
impact on the role of adjunct instructors. At a time when many adjuncts may be
given little more than a start date, room number, and brief course description to
prepare them for teaching a course, the Handbook provides administrators as well
as part- and full-time faculty members with the resources they need to empower
adjunct staff.
CONTENTS
1. Preparing to Teach: Considerations of Administration, Students, Technology, and
Educational Results
2. Technology in Education
3. Environment of Learning: Connecting with Students
4. Teaching Methods: Preparation and Application
5. Professional Development of the Adjunct Faulty
6. Evaluation of Student Performance
7. Future Trends: Network Technologies and Adjunct Faculty
Paperback: $24.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7519-3
Paperback: $39.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-8042-5
2010, 160 pages
2010, 112 pages
Introduction to Online
Learning
New EDITION!
Writing the NIH Grant

Proposal
A Guide for Students

Julie L. Globokar, Kaplan University
A Step-by-Step Guide
Second Edition
William Gerin, Columbia University Medical Center
Written by an author with proven success in
obtaining NIH grants and in developing grant
application workshops for university and
convention settings, this book features actual
forms from NIH grant applications - including
the brand new SF 424 forms - which have been annotated so as to guide readers
step-by-step, highlighting unexpected nuances that can make all the difference
between winning and losing a grant.
Titles for Purchase
CONTENTS
1. The National Institutes of Heath and Biomedical Funding
2. Mentoring and Collaborative Relationships
3. Types of Award Mechanisms
4. Preparation and Preliminary Steps
5. Writing The Application, Part I
6. Writing The Application, Part II
7. Writing The Application, Part III
8. Submitting the Application
9. The Grant Review and Award Process
10. Be Careful What You Wish For...
This text introduces first-time distance learners to

the realities of Web-based education and serves
as the most comprehensive, practical guide to
achieving success when facing online-specific
barriers as well as common academic hurdles.
Students learn to take advantage of the unique
resources available for those enrolled in internet-based programs and to make the
most of their Web-based educational experience by tailoring it to their personal
strengths, needs, and learning styles.
CONTENTS
1. Debunking the Myths of Online Education
2. Where Do I Start?
3. Getting Organized
4. Where Do I Turn for Help? Knowing Your Resources
Paperback: $24.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7822-4
2010, 136 pages
Student Study Site, www.sagepub.com/globokarestudy3
Paperback: $49.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7516-2

2011, 304 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Titles to Recommend to Your Students 85
Reading and
Understanding
Research
Third Edition
Lawrence F. Locke, University of Massachusetts

at Amherst
Stephen J. Silverman, Teachers College, Columbia
University
Waneen Wyrick Spirduso, University of Texas at
Austin
Ideal for students, novice researchers, or professionals, this indispensable resource
serves as a road map for readers who need to analyze and apply research findings.
It helps them think critically about the credibility of what they are reading by
showing them how to identify problems and develop constructive questions.
CONTENTS
1. The Research Report
2. When to Believe What You Read: The Sources of Credibility
3. How to Select and Read Research Reports
4. The Use, Misuse, and Misunderstanding of Research
5. Types of Research: An Overview of Variety
6. Quantitative Research Designs
7. Staying Organized When Reading a Quantitative Report
8. Explaining as a Tool for Learning to Read Reports
9. Reading Reports of Quantitative Research-Critically: Things to Notice and Questions to
Ask
10. The Paradigms for Qualitative Research
11. Staying Organized When Reading a Qualitative Report
12. Reading Reports of Qualitative Research-Critically: Things the Reader Should Expect
13. Staying Organized When Reading Research Reviews
The Essential Guide to Using the Web

for Research
Nigel Ford, Sheffield University
In recent years, the internet has provided students and researchers with fantastic
opportunities and a distinct set of challenges. In his new book, Nigel Ford shows
how these opportunities and challenges impact on student research projects and
explains the skills needed to navigate the web and use it effectively, emphasizing
independent learning and the ability to critically assess information and transform
it into effective evidence.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. Learning and Critical Thinking - The Essentials
3. Information, Evidence, Claims and Argument
4. Types of Information Source and Search Tool
5. Mapping Search Approaches and Techniques to Information Needs
6. Search Tools in Detail
7. Other Search Tools
8. Information Intelligence
9. Organizing, Storing, Retrieving and Sharing Your Information
10. Transforming Information into Quality Evidence
11. From Quality Evidence to Convincing Arguments
12. Expressing and Presenting Your Arguments
13. Where Do I Go from Here?
14. Future Developments in Web Search, Teaching and Research
Paperback: $37.95, ISBN: 978-0-8570-2365-0
How to Write a
Masters Thesis
Paperback: $57.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7574-2

2010, 312 pages
Yvonne N. Bui, University of San Francisco
Proposals That Work

A Guide for Planning Dissertations and Grant
Proposals
Fifth Edition
Lawrence F. Locke, University of Massachusetts
at Amherst
Waneen Wyrick Spirduso, University of Texas at
Austin
Stephen J. Silverman, Teachers College, Columbia
University
Covering all aspects of the proposal process, from the most basic questions
about form and style to the task of seeking funding, this Fifth Editionhas been
completely updated and revised to offer clear advice backed up with excellent
examples.
CONTENTS
1. Overview of the Masters Degree and Thesis
2. Selecting a Research Topic
3. Using the Literature to Research Your Problem
4. Conducting Ethical Research
5. How to Write Chapter One, Introduction
6. How to Write Chapter Two, Review of the Literature
7. How to Write Chapter Three, Methods
8. How to Write Chapter Four, Results
9. How to Write Chapter Five, Discussion
10. Final Formatting, APA Style
Paperback: $30.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5710-6

2009, 320 pages
Paperback: $61.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-2423-8

2007, 376 pages
Titles for Purchase
CONTENTS
PART I. WRITING THE PROPOSAL
PART II. MONEY FOR RESEARCH
PART III. Specimen Proposals
This step-by-step guidebook demystifies a

process that can often prove to be overwhelming
and confusing to graduate students. The tone and
format of the book is reader-friendly and includes
practical suggestions that go beyond informing
what should be done. It is chock full of detailed
explanations, examples, and supplemental
materials that have been used successfully in advising students in completing their
masters theses.
Conducting Research
Literature Reviews
Completing Your
Qualitative
Dissertation
From the Internet to Paper

Third Edition
A Roadmap From Beginning to End

Providing readers with an accessible but in-depth
look at how to synthesize research literature,
bestselling author Arlene Fink shows researchers
how to justify the need for and significance of
research, and explain a studys findings.
CONTENTS
1. Reviewing the Literature: Why? For Whom? How?
2. Searching and Screening: The Practical Screen and Methodological Quality (Part 1:
Research Design and Sampling)
3. Searching and Screening: Methodological Quality (Part 2: Collection, Interventions,
Analysis, Results, and Conclusions)
4. Doing the ReviewA Readers Guide Chapter
5. What Did You Find? Synthesizing Results
Linda Dale Bloomberg and Marie Volpe, Teachers

College, Columbia University
Distilling decades of experience into a first-of-itskind, highly practical reference for any student
contemplating a dissertation, this accessible
guideexplains how to deal with the obstacles
and pitfalls that confront researchers as they struggle with writing a qualitative
dissertation.
CONTENTS
PART I. TAKING CHARGE OF YOURSELF AND YOUR WORK
PART II. CONTENT AND PROCESS: A CHAPTER-BY-CHAPTER ROADMAP
PART III. NEARING COMPLETION: SOME FINAL CONSIDERATIONS
Paperback: $53.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7189-8
Paperback: $38.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5651-2
2010, 272 pages
2008, 264 pages
Instructor Teaching Site, www.sagepub.com/fink3einstr
Surviving Your
Dissertation
Writing Your Journal

Article in 12 Weeks
A Comprehensive Guide to Content and Process

Third Edition
A Guide to Academic Publishing Success

Wendy Laura Belcher, Princeton University
Kjell Erik Rudestam, Fielding Graduate University
The only book on publishing journal articles in the

humanities and social sciences, this text, based
on a legendary writing course, is field-tested,
research-based, pragmatic, and written by a
true insider. This book provides the instruction,
exercises, deadlines, and structure needed to
revise a classroom or conference paper into a journal article.
Titles for Purchase
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Using This Workbook
2. Week 1: Designing Your Plan for Writing
3. Week 2: Starting Your Article
4. Week 3: Advancing Your Argument
5. Week 4: Selecting a Journal
6. Week 5: Reviewing the Related Literature
7. Week 6: Strengthening Your Structure
8. Week 7: Presenting Your Evidence
9. Week 8: Opening and Concluding Your Article
10. Week 9: Giving, Getting, and Using Others Feedback
11. Week 10: Editing Your Sentences
12. Week 11: Wrapping Up Your Article
13. Week 12: Sending Your Article!
14. Week X: Responding to Journal Decisions
Rae R. Newton, California State University,

Fullerton
Like previous editions of this best-selling text,
the Third Edition offers readers guidance that
other dissertation guides often miss, from ways
to improve ones writing, to identifying ones learning preferences, to dealing with
emotional blocks. Updated with fresh examples from a wide range of disciplines,
the authors give readers expert advice on the entire dissertation process.
CONTENTS
1. The Research Process
2. Selecting a Suitable Topic
3. Methods of Inquiry: Quantitative and Qualitative Approaches
4. Review of the Literature and Statement of the Problem
5. The Method Chapter: Describing Your Research Plan
6. Presenting the Results of Quantitative Studies
7. Presenting the Results of Qualitative Studies
8. Discussion
9. Overcoming Barriers: Becoming an Expert While Controlling Your Own Destiny
10. Writing
11. How to Complete Your Dissertation Using Online Data Access and Collection
12. Guidelines for the Presentation of Numbers in the Dissertation
13. Informed Consent and Other Ethical Concerns
Paperback: $49.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5701-4

2009, 376 pages
Paperback: $48.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-1679-0

2007, 328 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
How To Do Your Case

Study
Doing Your Literature

Review
A Guide for Students and Researchers
Traditional and Systematic Techniques
Nigel Ford, Sheffield University, U.K.
Jill Jesson and Lydia Matheson, Aston University
In this lucid, accessible and often witty new

text, Gary Thomas introduces students and
researchers to the basics of case study research.
Using a wide range of real-life examples, this
book sets how best to design and carry out case
studies in the social sciences and humanities for
those new to the method. How To Do Your Case Study deals with the core issues
and methods that anyone new to case study will need to understand.
CONTENTS
PART I. GETTING YOUR BEARINGS
1. What Is a Case Study?
2. Case Study and Research Design
3. Models of the Whole
4. Ensuring Quality in Your Case Study: Whats Important?
PART II. GETTING DOWN TO DOING IT
5. Kinds of Case Studies: Finding Your Case
6. Your Purpose
7. Your Approach
8. Your Process
PART III. GETTING ON WITH IT AND FINISHING
9. Out in the Field: Some Ways to Collect Data and Evidence
10. A Toolkit for Analyzing and Thinking
11. Writing Your Study
12. The Fancy Stuff: Generalization, Induction, Abduction, Phronesis and Theory
Paperback: $42.95, ISBN: 978-0-8570-2563-0
Many of the standard social science methodology

texts do not cover the literature review as
a method in itself, yet it is a compulsory
part of doing research. Although it is fairly
straightforward to teach social science research
methodology, the process of research and
techniques for quantitative and qualitative design, the part of research most
students find difficult is writing a critical review of existing knowledge - the
literature review. This is an accessible and practical introduction for students on
how to conduct both traditional and systematic literature reviews and incorporate
them into their research. This book is ideal for any health, business or social
science student looking to embark upon their own project.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction and Overview, What This Text Adds to Existing Sources
2. Searching: The Library as Resource
3. Reading Different Types of Literature
4. Being Critical and Evaluating the Literature
5. The Traditional Review
6. Writing up Your Review
7. Systematic Review
8. Undertaking Meta-Analysis
9. Referencing Styles
Paperback: $38.95, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0154-3
The Dissertation
Journey
The Qualitative
Dissertation
A Practical and Comprehensive Guide to Planning,

Writing, and Defending Your Dissertation
Second Edition
A Guide for Students and Faculty

Second Edition
Maria Piantanida and Noreen B. Garman,
University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine
This book guides students through the issues
and questions that may arise as they conduct
qualitative research, taking a reflective,
experiential approach to turn studentresearchers into instruments of inquiry. The authors show readers how to integrate
themselves into the research and writing process by using their own beliefs,
experiences, interests, and strengths. Updated with new examples and cases,
this comprehensive resource guides readers through the process of preparing
for the dissertation journey; rethinking the concepts of method and data; working
through the proposal process; defending the dissertation; and living life after the
dissertation.
Paperback: $38.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5108-1

2009, 328 pages
This comprehensive, user-friendly guide to

planning, writing, and defending, a dissertation,
thesis, or other research project. It contains
clear directions, practical examples, checklists,
and up-to-date resources for every phase of
the dissertation process such as selecting the committee, choosing a topic,
support groups, academic writing, the oral defense, and publishing the research.
Additionally, the book addresses the psychological and emotional hurdles involved
in dissertating. The style is personal, informal, and conversational like a coach
talking one-on-one with a student. The major revisions of this new edition include
the addition of clear, detailed directions for conducting and writing a literature
review, how to develop a theoretical or conceptual framework, insights into
the ethical issues of conducting research, and a revised and updated chapter
entitledUsing the Internet and Technology to Conduct Research.
CONTENTS
PART I. QUESTS AND QUESTIONS
PART II. PREPARING FOR THE CLIMB
PART III. BEGINNING THE CLIMB
PART IV. CLIMBING TO BASE CAMP
PART V. FINAL PREPARATIONS FOR THE PEAK
PART VI: FINAL ASCENT AND VIEW FROM THE TOP & BEYOND
Paperback: $33.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-7798-2
2010, 248 pages
Titles for Purchase
CONTENTS
PART I. FACING THE DISSERTATION JOURNEY
PART II. PREPARING FOR THE DISSERTATION JOURNEY
PART III. ENTERING INTO AND LIVING THROUGH THE DISSERTATION JOURNEY
PART IV. CASE EXAMPLES OF INTERPRETIVE DISSERTATIONS
Carol M. Roberts, University of La Verne
Doing Essays and Assignments
New Edition!
This Book Is Not

Required
Essential Tips for Students

Pete Greasley, University of Bradford
This book gives students an insiders view of what lecturers and professors are
looking for when they set essays and assignments. Both lively and authoritative in
equal measure, Doing Essays and Assignments leads its readers through all of
the skills which are required for the process of essay and assignment writing at a
number of levels.
A Success Manual for First-Year Students

Fourth Edition
Inge Bell
Bernard McGrane and John Gunderson, Chapman
University
CONTENTS
Terri L. Anderson
1. Introduction: Why You Should Read This Book (and Keep It to Yourself)
2. An Insight into the Marking Process
3. How to Impress and Distress Markers
4. Before You Start: Some Rules of the Game
5. One Thing Leads to Another: Reading and Researching the Literature
6. Getting Startedand Getting Finished
7. Introductions, Conclusions and Structure
8. What Was the Question Again?
9. Critical Analysis, Perspective and Argument
10. The Greatest Source of Marker Distress: Language, Grammar and Expression
11. Referencing - An Academic Fetish?
12. Plagiarism: How Many Words and When Do You Need It by?
13. How Not to Present Graphs and Charts
14. Presenting Your Assignment: First Impressions Count
15. When the Cook Tastes the Soup: Formative Feedback and Feed-Forward
The Fourth Edition marks out new territory

in participatory university education, offering
insight and inspiration to help new undergraduates make the most of their
college years. This edition continues to teach about the university experience
as a wholelooking at the personal, social, intellectual, and spiritual demands
and opportunitieswhile incorporating new material highly relevant to todays
students.
CONTENTS
Paperback: $19.95, ISBN: 978-1-8492-0203-9

Your Research Project

Designing and Planning Your Work
Third Edition
Nicholas Walliman, Oxford Brookes University
In the third edition of this bestselling book, youll find everything you need to
embark upon your research project with confidence. Written with the needs of
students at undergraduate, Masters and postgraduate level in mind, this text will
guide you through the process of formulating a research question, choosing your
research methods, planning your research, and getting started.
1. Welcome to College
2. Grades
3. Technology
4. Everybody Hates to Write
5. Support Your Local Prof
6. An Academic Question
7. Questions of Academic Integrity
8. Wisdom and Knowledge
9. Pursuing Wisdom in the Academy
10. Adventures in Desocialization
11. Media Me
12. Survival Skills
13. Love
14. Trouble with Parents
15. The Painful Avenues of Upward Mobility
16. Graduation: What They Forgot to Tell You
17. The Career: Friend or Foe?
18. Directing Your Own Development
Paperback: $49.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-8038-8
2011, 320 pages
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Who Is This Book For, Aims of the Book, How It Should Be Used
2. Research and the Research Problem
3. Research Theory and the Nature of Knowledge
4. Information and How to Deal with It
5. Overview of Research Methods
6. Honesty and Research Ethics
7. Preparing the Research Proposal
Paperback: $39.95, ISBN: 978-1-8492-0462-0
Titles for Purchase
May 2011, 360 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Making Supervision
Work for You
Essay Writing
A Students Guide
MunLing Shields, University of Central Lancashire,
U.K.
A Students Guide
Jerry J. Wellington, University of Sheffield, U.K.
This text offers bothstaff and students a solid

reference for one of the main methods used for
assessing knowledge and understanding the
written essay.
The book brings a wide range of themes under

one cover, offering up-to-date information
regarding codes of conduct, supervisory practice
and student needs.
CONTENTS
1. Opening Up the Supervision Process
2. The Changing Context for Postgraduates and Why it Matters
3. Getting Started and Setting the Ground Rules
4. Dealing with the Complexity of the Supervision Process: Striking the Right Balance
5. What Could Possibly Go Wrong?
6. The Ultimate Goal: Achieving A Doctorate
7. Getting the Thesis Written
8. Choosing Your Examiners
9. Submitting Your Dissertation and Preparing for Assessment
10. Preparing for the Live Event - the Viva Voce
11. After the Viva: Recovering, Publishing, and Disseminating
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: How to Use this Book
2. Learning and Writing at University
3. Answering the Essay Question
4. Planning Different Types of Essay
5. Acquiring Information
6. Assessing Information Critically
7. Managing Information
8. Citing Information
9. Paragraphing: the Introduction and Conclusion
10. Paragraphing: the Body of the Essay
11. Making it Flow
12. The Finishing Touches
13. Writing Exam Essays
Paperback: $38.95, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0618-0

2010, 176 pages
Paperback: $23.95, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7090-2

2010, 240 pages
Study Skills for Health

and Social Care
Students
The Essential Guide to

Doing Your Research
Project
Claire Craig
This text will not only equip readers with the skills
to study and to practice effectively, but will also
form a tool for personal development.
Zina OLeary, University of Western Sydney,

Australia
This highly readable text guides the reader
through each stage of their research project, from
getting started to writing up, with each chapter
clearly explaining a step along the way.
CONTENTS
Paperback: $43.95, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7389-7

2010, 328 pages
CONTENTS
PART I. TAKING THE LEAP INTO THE RESEARCH WORLD
PART II. GETTING STARTED
PART III. STRIVING FOR INTEGRITY IN THE RESEARCH PROCESS
PART IV. DEVELOPING YOUR RESEARCH QUESTION
PART V. CRAFTING A RESEARCH PROPOSAL
PART VI. WORKING WITH LITERATURE
PART VII. DESIGNING A RESEARCH PLAN
PART VIII. UNDERSTANDING METHODOLOGIES: QUANTITATIVE, QUALITATIVE AND MIXED
APPROACHES
PART IX. UNDERSTANDING METHODOLOGIES: EVALUATIVE, ACTION-ORIENTED AND
EMANCIPATORY STRATEGIES
PART X. SEEKING RESPONDENTS
PART XI. DIRECT DATA COLLECTION - SURVEYS AND INTERVIEWS
PART XII. INDIRECT DATA COLLECTION: WORKING WITH OBSERVATIONS AND EXISTING
TEXT
PART XIII. ANALYSING QUANTITATIVE DATA
PART XIV. ANALYZING QUALITATIVE DATA
PART XV. THE CHALLENGE OF WRITING UP
Paperback: $43.95, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0011-9
2010, 320 pages
Titles for Purchase
1. Introduction
2. Envisioning the Journey
3. Organising Your Learning
4. Managing Anxiety
5. Accessing Support
6. Learning about Learning
7. Thinking and Reflecting In the Classroom and the Workplace
8. Setting and Achieving Goals
9. Researching Ideas and Information
10. Listening For Information
11. Recording Ideas and Information
12. Expressing Ideas Verbally
13. Expressing Ideas in Writing
14. Preparing For and Performing Well in Pressurised Situations
15. Working with Others
16. Entering into a Digital World
17. Bringing it all Together
How to do Your
Research Project
A Guide to Conducting
Online Research
A Guide for Students in Education and Applied

Social Sciences
Ted J. Gaiser
Anthony E. Schreiner, Boston College
Gary Thomas, University of Birmingham, U.K.
This book is designed to support students,

academics, and practitioner researchers in using
technology as part of their research. The author
walks through the process of conducting online
research and offers practical advice on common
issues and problems.
In this text, the author walks you through each

stage of doing a research project in a funny and
easy to understand format - perfect for students
new to doing research.
CONTENTS
1. Your Introduction: Starting with a Question
2. Project Management
3. The Literature Review
4. Decide on Your Question - Again
5. Deciding on an Approach: Methodology and Research Design
6. The Design Frame
7. Practical Matters
8. The Right Tools for the job: Data-Gathering
9. How to Analyse the Information You Gather
10. Concluding
Paperback: $37.95, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7443-6
Paperback: $46.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-2290-6
2010, 272 pages
2010, 184 pages
Doing Your Social

Science Dissertation
How to Publish Your

PhD
Judith Burnett, University of East London, U.K.
Sarah Caro, Oxford University Press, U.K.
This book takes students through the process

of doing a dissertation from turning the raw
ideas into a research question, designing the
research project, choosing appropriate methods,
developing a research proposal, planning and
executing the project, working with data, writing
up, and preparing the work for presentation.
This is the first book to provide students with

a comprehensive and authoritative guide to
publishing their research. Drawing on nearly
twenty years in the book business Sarah Caro
explains in a clear and accessible way the key
issues facing the would-be author.
CONTENTS
Titles for Purchase
CONTENTS
1. Designing an Online Study
2. Research Standards and Ethical Considerations
3. Using Email for Data Collection
4. Researching Using Instant Messaging and Chat
5. Survey Research on the Internet
6. The World of Web 2.0: Blogs, Wikis and Websites
7. Accessing and Using Web-based Data
8. Analyzing the Data
9. Emerging Research Opportunities
10. Presenting Your Results
11. Some Additional Challenges for Online Researchers
1. Ready to Research?
2. What is Expected in Your Dissertation?
3. How do I Define a Research Question?
4. What Kind of Researcher am I?
5. How do I Write the Research Proposal?
6. Finding Sources and Doing the Literature Review
7. What are the Problems of Real World Research?
8. The Research Design
9. Carrying out the Research
10. What do I do With all of This Data?
11. Drawing Conclusions and Coming Up With Theories
12. Writing Up
13. Troubleshooting: What to do if it all Goes Wrong
CONTENTS
1. The Ever-Changing World of Academic Publishing
2. Books or Articles?
3. Revising Your PhD
4. Choosing a Publisher
5. Preparing and Presenting a Proposal
6. Surviving the Reviews
7. Negotiating a Contract
8. Marketing Yourself and Your Book
Paperback: $37.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-0791-0

2009, 144 pages
Paperback: $37.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3113-7

2010, 280 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Titles to Recommend to Your Students | Recommend to your Library 91
Read, Research and

Write
Good Essay Writing

A Social Sciences Guide
Fourth Edition
Academic Skills for ESL Students in Higher

Education
Peter Redman and Wendy Maples, The Open

University
Caroline Brandt
This book is for students who have learned
English as a second (or third, or fourth) language
and are studying at an institution where English is
the medium of instruction. Each of the books 10
chapters focus on a reproduced academic article
in which students can learn about language skills,
as well as develop those skills inassociated activities and tasks.
This book sets out proven approaches and

techniques which can help everyone write good
essays. Encapsulated in easy-to-digest summaries,
this new edition shows you how to approach
different types of essay questions, addresses
common worries, and provides extensive use of
worked examples including complete essays which are fully analyzed and discussed.
Each chapter also includes suggested further reading and an extensive glossary.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. Introducing Read, Research, Write
2. Understanding EAP
3. Entering Higher Education
4. Reading in Higher Education
5. Writing in Higher Education
6. Documenting Skills
7. Researching Skills
8. Making Reasonable Claims
9. Thinking Critically
10. Finding Your Voice
1. Introduction
2. What Is a Social Science Essay?
3. Stages of Writing, from Preparation to Final Version
4. Matching the Answer to the Question
5. Reading, Note-Taking and Literature Searches
6. Thinking Critically and Formulating an Argument
7. Writing Introductions
8. Writing the Main Section
9. Writing Conclusions
10. Referencing
11. Some Common Worries
12. What Tutors Look for When Marking Essays
13. Examples of Student Essays
Paperback: $46.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4737-4

2009, 248 pages
Paperback: $19.95, ISBN: 978-0-8570-2371-1

May 2011, 160 pages
The Literature Review

A Step-by-Step Guide for Students
Diana Ridley, Sheffield University
This book is a concise step-by-step guide to
conducting a literature search and writing up the
literature review chapter in graduate dissertations
and in professional doctorate theses. The author
describes how to carry out a literature review in
a systematic way, providing useful strategies for
efficient reading, conducting searches, organizing
information, and writing the review itself.
CONTENTS
1. The Multiple Purposes of a Literature Review
2. Sources of Information and Conducting Searches
3. Reading and Note Taking Strategies
4. Reference Management
5. Structuring the literature Review
6. In-text Citations
7. Being Critical
8. Foregrounding Writer Voice
9. The Continuing Process
2009, 184 pages
Encyclopedia of
Research Design
Three-Volume Set

Comprising more than 500 entries, the
Encyclopedia of Research Design elucidates
how to make decisions about research design,
undertake research projects in an ethical manner,
interpret and draw valid inferences from data,
and evaluate experiment design strategies
and results. Two additional features carry this
encyclopedia far above other works in the field: bibliographic entries devoted to
significant articles in the history of research design and reviews of contemporary
tools, such as software and statistical procedures, used to analyze results.
Key Features
Covers the spectrum of research design strategies, from material presented in
introductory classes to topics necessary in graduate research
Addresses cross- and multidisciplinary research needs, with many examples
drawn from the social and behavioral sciences, neurosciences, and biomedical
and life sciences
Provides summaries of advantages and disadvantages of often-used strategies
Hardcover: $425.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-6127-1

2010, 1776 pages
Titles for Purchase
Paperback: $36.95, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3426-8
Recommend to your Library
92 Recommend to your Library
Life Story Research
Selecting Research
Methods
Four-Volume Set
Barbara Harrison, University of East London, U.K.

This book gathers together articles on a number
of methodological approaches within the social
sciences that focus on research where the
individual and his or her life, experiences, and
thinking is the core focus of study. This four
volume set covers an extensive time period, with
classic pieces providing an important context for
much of the later work.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1
PART I. HISTORICAL ORIGINS AND TRAJECTORIES
PART II. THEORETICAL AND CONCEPTUAL ISSUES IN LIFE STORY RESEARCH
VOLUME 2
PART II. THEORETICAL AND CONCEPTUAL ISSUES IN LIFE STRORY RESEARCH
(CONTINUED)
PART III. TYPES OF LIFE STORY RESEARCH - TRADITIONAL AND NEW SOURCES OF LIFE
STORY DATA
VOLUME 3
PART III. TYPES OF LIFE STORY RESEARCH - TRADITIONAL AND NEW SOURCES OF LIFE
STORY DATA (CONTINUED)
PART IV. DOING LIFE STORY RESEARCH
VOLUME 4
PART IV. DOING LIFE STORY RESEARCH (CONTINUED)
PART V. RESEARCH CONTEXTS AND LIFE STORIES
Four-Volume Set
W. Paul Vogt, Illinois State University

Selecting Research Methods provides advice
from prominent social scientists concerning the
most crucial steps for planning and undertaking
meaningful research: selecting the methods to
be used. Contributors to the collection address
methodological choices in four stages: design,
sampling, coding and measurement, and analysis. The four volumes provide an
integrated approach to methodological choice in two ways.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. SELECTING DESIGNS FOR GATHERING EVIDENCE
VOLUME 2. METHODS TO SAMPLE, RECRUIT, AND ASSIGN CASES
VOLUME 3. METHODS FOR CODING & MEASURING DATA
VOLUME 4. METHODS FOR ANALYSING AND REPORTING RESULTS
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7180-0

2008, 1640 pages
New!
Computational Social
Science
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3588-3

2009, 1712 pages
Four-Volume Set
Nigel Gilbert, University of Surrey, U.K.
Realist Methodology
Four-Volume Set
Wendy Olsen, University of Manchester, U.K.

Addressing four key elements of Realist
Methodology, this set widens the access to the
ideas of realism which make the philosophy and
its applications more accessible to lay readers.
Computational Social Science, afour-volume

set, republishes the key articles in the emerging
field of computational social science. Because of
the widespread use of computational approaches
throughout the social sciences, the literature
is very widely dispersed. Many papers are of
interest far outside their original disciplines, because of the methods they use and
the theories they develop have broad-ranging application.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Titles for Purchase
VOLUME 1. PRACTICAL REALIST ONTOLOGY

VOLUME 2. REALIST METHODS
VOLUME 3. REALIST EMPIRICAL RESEARCH
VOLUME 4. KNOWLEDGE AND META-KNOWLEDGE IN REALISM
VOLUME 1.
1. Introduction
2. Precursors and Early Work
3. Agent-Based Computational
Economics
VOLUME 2.
1. Modelling Sociality
2. Groups
3. Organisations
4. Societies
5. Networks
VOLUME 3.
1. Social Dilemmas
2. Cognition and Norms
3. Methodology
VOLUME 4.
1. Emergence
2. Tools and Techniques
3. Validation
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4863-0

2010, 1544 pages
Hardcover: $1664.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7171-8
2010, 1880 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Recommend to your Library 93
Social Statistics
The SAGE
Encyclopedia of
Methods
Four-Volume Set
Roger Penn and Damon Berridge, University of

Lancsaster
This major reference collection brings together
the classic pieces that have framed the often
controversial debates of using statistics as a
social research method.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. THE STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF AGGREGATE CATEGORICAL DATA
VOLUME 2. STATISTICAL MODELLING OF CATEGORICAL DATA
VOLUME 3. THE ANALYSIS OF LONGITUDINAL DATA
VOLUME 4. THE STATISTICAL MODELLING OF ORDINAL DATA AND MULTI-LEVEL
ANALYSIS
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7356-9

2010, 1642 pages
Causality
Four-Volume Set
Stephen Turner, University of South Florida

This four-volume major reference work covers
the main issues, methods of analysis, and
alternatives, of causality, including the classic
texts applying these alternative concepts and
methods to empirical cases. As a whole, the
volumes represent a complete guide to the
literature on social science causality from the
beginning to the present.
Volume 1 explores the history and meaning of key terms: secular, secularism,
secularity, secularization and laicity. It is primarily concerned with the philosophy
and theology of the secular and examines the evolution of the debate from St
Augustines two cities to contemporary writings and is not confined to Christian
debate.
Volume 2 deals with the sociology of secularization and contains the classic
statements by sociologists such as Max Weber, Georg Simmel, Bryan Wilson, David
Martin, and Thomas Luckmann.
Volume 3 considers American exceptionalism. Much the debate in sociology has
centered on the question of Americas differences from secular Europe. Religion
and politics have been significantly interconnected in American history; America is
a very special but influential case of secularization.
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7933-2

2010, 1704 pages
Lisa M. Given, University of Alberta, Canada

The SAGE Encyclopedia of Qualitative
Research Methods presents current and
complete information as well as ready-to-use
techniques, facts, and examples from the field of qualitative research in a very
accessible style. In taking an interdisciplinary approach, these two volumes target
a broad audience and fill a gap in the existing reference literature for a general
guide to the core concepts that inform qualitative research practices. The entries
cover every major facet of qualitative methods, including access to research
participants, data coding, research ethics, the role of theory in qualitative research,
and much moreall without overwhelming the informed reader.
Key Features
Defines and explains core concepts, describes the techniques involved in the
implementation of qualitative methods, and presents an overview of qualitative
approaches to research
Offers many entries that point to substantive debates among qualitative
researchers regarding how concepts are labeled and the implications of such
labels for how qualitative research is valued
Guides readers through the complex landscape of the language of qualitative
inquiry
Includes contributors from various countries and disciplines that reflect a diverse
spectrum of research approaches from more traditional, positivist approaches,
through postmodern, constructionist ones
Presents some entries written in first-person voice and others in third-person
voice to reflect the diversity of approaches that define qualitative work
Key Themes
Approaches and Methodologies
Arts-Based Research, Ties to
Computer Software
Data Analysis
Data Collection
Data Types and Characteristics
Dissemination
History of Qualitative Research
Participants
Quantitative Research, Ties to
Research Ethics
Rigor
Textual Analysis, Ties to
Theoretical and Philosophical Frameworks
Hardcover: $350.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4163-1

2008, 1072 pages
Titles for Purchase
Volume 4 involves the comparative sociology of modern religious revivalism and

the notion that we are in a post-secular society. The manifestations of religious
revival in post-secular societies are truly global. This volume looks at the revival
of world religions and popular religions such as spirit possession in the postcommunist societies.
Two-Volume Set
The SAGE Qualitative

Research Kit
Encyclopedia of Case
Study Research

Sciences, Berlin, Germany
Albert J. Mills, St. Marys University, Halifax,

Nova Scotia, Canada
Eight-Volume Set
Two-Volume Set
This kit comprises eight quality volumes that

provide practical and accessible advice on how
to conduct state-of-the-art qualitative research.It
is an ideal toolkit for students and researchers
for use in planning and carrying out research
in a variety of academic and professional
environments.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. DESIGNING QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
VOLUME 2. DOING INTERVIEWS
VOLUME 3. DOING ETHNOGRAPHIC AND OBSERVATIONAL RESEARCH
VOLUME 4. DOING FOCUS GROUPS
VOLUME 5. USING VISUAL DATA IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
VOLUME 6. ANALYSING QUALITATIVE DATA
VOLUME 7. DOING CONVERSATION, DISCOURSE AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
VOLUME 8. MANAGING QUALITY IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
Gabrielle Durepos, St. Francis Xavier University,

Antigonish, Nova Scotia, Canada
Elden Wiebe, Kings University College, Edmonton,
Alberta, Canada
The Encyclopedia of Case Study Research provides a compendium on the
important methodological issues in conducting case study research and explores
both the strengths and weaknesses of different paradigmatic approaches. These
two volumes focus on the distinctive characteristics of case study research and its
place within and alongside other research methodologies.
Key Features
Presents a definition of case study research that can be used in different fields
of study
Describes case study as a research strategy rather than as a single tool for
decision making and inquiry
Guides rather than dictates, readers understanding and applications of case
study research
Includes a critical summary in each entry, which raises additional matters for
reflection
Makes case study relevant to researchers at various stages of their careers,
across philosophic divides, and throughout diverse disciplines
Paperback: $224.00, ISBN: 978-0-7619-4974-9

2009, 1320 pages
Action Research in
Education
Three-Volume Set
Anne Campbell, Leeds Metropolitan University, U.K.

Susan Groundwater-Smith, University of Sydney,
Australia
This three-volume set traces the evolution of
classroom research as it connects to curriculum,
pedagogy, and professional practice in schools.
It includes an original introduction by the editors
that makes the argument for the selection of each piece and shows where each
sits in the field.
Key Themes
Academic Disciplines
Case Study Research Design
Conceptual Issues
Data Analysis
Data Collection
Methodological Approaches
Theoretical Traditions
Theory Development and Contributions
Hardcover: $350.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-5670-3

2010, 1152 pages
CONTENTS
Titles for Purchase
VOLUME 1. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES IN ACTION RESEARCH IN SCHOOLS: FROM

CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT TO ENHANCING TEACHER PROFESSIONAL LEARNING
VOLUME 2. DISTINCTIVE METHODOLOGIES EMPLOYED IN ACTION RESEARCH IN SCHOOLS
VOLUME 3. KEY EXAMPLES OF ACTION RESEARCH IN SCHOOLS WITHIN DIFFERENT
NATIONAL SETTINGS
Hardcover: $825.00, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0683-8

2010, 1240 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Representing
Ethnography
Encyclopedia of
Survey Research
Methods
Reading, Writing and Rhetoric in Qualitative

Research
Four-Volume Set
Two-Volume Set
Paul Atkinson and Sara Delamont, Cardiff

University, U.K.
Qualitative research, especially ethnography,
has seen a paradigm shift since 1968. This
so-called Third Moment was concerned with
the critical issue of the textual representation
of ethnographic work. There was a call for a turn towards texts that mirrored the
messiness of social life, that were faithful to the many voices of social worlds,
in which the artfulness of ethnographic writing was manifest and in which the
ethnographer was visibly present in the text.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. CONTEXTS AND CONTROVERSIES
VOLUME 2. READING QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
VOLUME 3. ANALYSIS AND VOICE IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
VOLUME 4. WRITING AND REPRESENTATION
Paul J. Lavrakas, Independent Consultant and

Former Chief Research Methodologist for The
Nielsen Company
In conjunction with top survey researchers
around the world and with Nielsen Media
Research serving as the corporate sponsor, the
Encyclopedia of Survey Research Methods presents state-of-the-art information
and methodological examples from the field of survey research. Although there
are other how-to guides and references texts on survey research, noneis as
comprehensive as this Encyclopedia, and none presents the material in such a
focused and approachable manner. With more than 600 entries, this resource uses
a Total Survey Error perspectivethat considers all aspects of possible survey error
from a cost-benefit standpoint.
Hardcover: $350.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-1808-4

2008, 1072 pages
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4598-1
2009, 1824 pages
New!
Ethnomethodology
BESTSELLER!
Four-Volume Set
The Focus Group Kit
Wes Sharrock, University of Manchester,

Manchester, U.K.
Six-Volume Set
David L. Morgan, Portland State University
Michael Lynch, Cornell University
Richard A. Krueger, University of Minnesota, Professor Emeritus and Senior Fellow

Dick Krueger and David L. Morgan have done the research community a great service
in their writing of this kit. They have brought together the most recent thinking on focus
groups and the best of present practices and applications. They are experienced in this
area and know of which they write. From novice to skilled practitioner, everyone will
benefit from working through six volumes. They make clear the when, why, and how
of focus groups.
Ray C. Rist
The World Bank, Washington, DC
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. THE FOCUS GROUP GUIDEBOOK by David L. Morgan
VOLUME 2. PLANNING FOCUS GROUPS by David L. Morgan
VOLUME 3. DEVELOPING QUESTIONS FOR FOCUS GROUPS by Richard A. Krueger
VOLUME 4. MODERATING FOCUS GROUPS by Richard A. Krueger
VOLUME 5. INVOLVING COMMUNITY MEMBERS IN FOCUS GROUPS by Richard A.
Krueger & Jean A. King
VOLUME 6. ANALYZING & REPORTING FOCUS GROUP RESULTS by Richard A. Krueger
This four-volume set includes selections that

discuss and exemplify how conversations,
experiments, and observations are used to gain
insight into larger questions of social order and
social change.
CONTENTS
PART I. BACKGROUND ON SOCIAL SCIENTIFIC AND EVERYDAY METHODS
PART II.. ETHNOMETHODOLOGY AND THE PRACTICAL RESOLUTION OF METHODOLOGICAL
PROBLEMS
PART III. INDEXICAL EXPRESSIONS - TOPIC, RESOURCE OR NUISANCE?
PART IV. OBJECTIFICATION IN DISCOURSE
PART V. LANGUAGE, CATEGORIES AND MEMBERSHIP
PART VI. STUDIES OF WORK
PART VII. ACTION AS ALGORITHM - COMPUTER SUPPORTED COOPERATIVE WORK
PART VIII. ETHNOMETHODOLOGY AND SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS
PART IX. LANGUAGE, INTERACTION, EMBODIED CONDUCT
Hardcover: $251.00, ISBN: 978-0-7619-0760-2

1997, 692 pages
2011, 1656 pages
Titles for Purchase
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0441-4
The Secondary
Analysis of Survey
Data
Mass Communication
Research Methods
Four-Volume Set
Four-Volume Set
Anders Hansen, University of Leicester, U.K.
Martin Bulmer, University of Surrey, U.K.
This work combines methods articles or

discussions with a range of exemplary
applications within particular theoretical
frameworks of each method or approach.
Patrick J. Sturgis, University of Southampton

Nick Allum, Essex University, U.K.
This four-volume collection brings together the
key publications on the secondary analysis of
data and embraces many aspects of how to analyze quantitative survey data,
whether primary or secondary.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. ISSUES IN THE ANALYSIS OF SURVEY DATA
VOLUME 2. MEASUREMENT AND INFERENCE
VOLUME 3. SUMMARIZING AND MODELLING SURVEY DATA
VOLUME 4. SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS, HIERARCHICAL AND LONGITUDINAL MODELS
CONTENTS
PART I. ASKING THE RIGHT QUESTIONS (THEORY, HISTORY, TRADITIONS, CONTEXT IN
MASS COMMUNICATION RESEARCH)
PART II. RESEARCHING MEDIA INSTITUTIONS, ORGANISATIONS, PROFESSIONALS AND
PRODUCTION
PART III. RESEARCHING MEDIA CONTENT AND REPRESENTATION
PART IV. RESEARCHING MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION IN SOCIETY: CONSUMPTION,
AUDIENCES, POLITICS, PROBLEMS AND PLEASURES
PART V. DOING COMMUNICATION RESEARCH: SOURCES AND RESOURCES, THE
RESEARCH PROCESS
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-0384-4

2009, 1664 pages
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-3004-8

2009, 1592 pages
Multilevel Modelling
Four-Volume Set
New!
Anders Skrondal, Norwegian Institute of Public

Health, Norway
Methods in Education
Sophia Rabe-Hesketh, University of California and

the University of London, U.K.
Data collected in the social sciences often have
a multilevel or clustered structure. The editors
of this essential four-volume set are among
the leading figures of multilevel modeling, an
approach which is at once cutting-edge and well
established within research methods and the social sciences.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. LINEAR MULTILEVEL MODELS: MODEL FORMULATION AND INTERPRETATION
VOLUME 2. LINEAR MULTILEVEL MODELS: INFERENCE, DIAGNOSTICS AND DESIGN
VOLUME 3. MULTILEVEL GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS
VOLUME 4. COMPLEX MODELS AND ISSUES
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7273-9
Titles for Purchase
2010, 1608 pages
Four-Volume Set
Harry Torrance, Manchester Metropolitan University

This four-volume set is part of the Fundamentals
of Applied Research series and sits alongside
Stephen Gorards major reference collection
Quantitative Research Methods in Education. It
brings together seminal and cutting edge articles
on qualitative research internationally, and shows
how the field has developed in influence in recent years. The use of qualitative
research methods in educational research has a long and distinguished history,
both in the UK and internationally. Importantly, this major reference collection
reviews the ongoing debates and various issues about qualitative methods and
the contribution they make to understanding educational issues. The set also
comprises a timely analysis of the contribution which qualitative methods have
made and can continue to make to understanding educational issues.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. THEORETICAL ORIGINS OF QUALITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS IN EDUCATION
VOLUME 2. LANGUAGE, PHILOSOPHY AND POLITICS - ADDITIONAL THEORETICAL
TRIBUTARIES AND METHODOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH IN
EDUCATION
VOLUME 3. KEY SUBSTANTIVE FIELDS AND TOPICS OF INQUIRY IN QUALITATIVE
RESEARCH IN EDUCATION
VOLUME 4. CONTEMPORARY METHODS, ISSUES AND DEBATES IN QUALITATIVE
RESEARCH IN EDUCATION - ETHICS, SCIENCE, POLICY AND POLITICS
Hardcover: $950.00, ISBN: 978-1-8486-0207-6

2011, 1680 pages
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Nursing Research
Methods
Gender and Research

Four-Volume Set
Sara Delamont and Paul Atkinson,

Cardiff University, U.K.
Three-Volume Set
Peter Griffiths, Kings College, U.K.

Jackie Bridges, City University, U.K.
This three-volume set brings together seminal
sources that illustrate both the origins and the
state of the art of research in nursing. The editors
draw on methodological sources from outside the
discipline that are influential and have shaped
nursing research as well as discussions and debates about the application of
particular methods within the field.
CONTENTS
For the past thirty years there have been vigorous

debates about the roles played by gender,
sexuality, and sexual orientation in research. This
collection brings together the debates together,
set them into their historical and theoretical
context, and deal with the major criticisms and
refutations. A particular strength of this collection
is makes available key sources otherwise scattered and hard to obtain.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1. QUANTITATIVE APPROACHES

VOLUME 2. QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
VOLUME 3. MIXED METHODS, INTEGRATION AND SYNTHESIS
VOLUME 1. CONTEXTS AND THEORY

VOLUME 2. GENDER ROLES IN RESEARCH
VOLUME 3. FEMINIST METHODS
VOLUME 4. MENS STUDIES, QUEER THEORY, POLYVOCALITY
Hardcover: $825.00, ISBN: 978-1-8478-7946-2
Hardcover: $1050.00, ISBN: 978-1-4129-4597-4
2010, 1288 pages
2009, 1592 pages
Titles for Purchase
98 Index
Alasuutari The SAGE Handbook of Social Research Methods.................................................................... 83
Alderson/Morrow The Ethics of Research with Children and Young People.............................................. 54
Alkin Evaluation Roots................................................................................................................................ 44
Allison Multiple Regression......................................................................................................................... 13
Altschuld Needs Assessment Phase II........................................................................................................ 74
Altschuld The Needs Assessment Kit......................................................................................................... 74
Altschuld/Eastmond Needs Assessment Phase I...................................................................................... 74
Altschuld/Kumar Needs Assessment: An Overview................................................................................... 74
Altschuld/White Needs Assessment: Analysis and Prioritization................................................................ 74
Alvesson Interpreting Interviews................................................................................................................ 35
Alvesson/Karreman Qualitative Research and Theory Development........................................................ 25
Alvesson/Skldberg Reflexive Methodology, 2e....................................................................................... 23
Argyrous Statistics for Research, 2e.......................................................................................................... 10
Atkinson/Delamont Representing Ethnography........................................................................................ 95
Babbie/Halley/Wagner/Zaino Adventures in Social Research, 7e............................................................ 64
Bachman/Schutt Fundamentals of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice, 2e............................. 50
Bachman/Schutt The Practice of Research in Criminology and Criminal Justice, 4e................................ 50
Bailey/Burch Research Methods in Applied Behavior Analysis.................................................................. 61
Bamberger/Rugh/Mabry RealWorld Evaluation........................................................................................ 40
Bandyopadhyay/Rao/Sinha Models for Social Networks With Statistical Applications............................. 11
Barone/Eisner Arts Based Research.......................................................................................................... 20
Bazeley Qualitative Data Analysis with NVivo............................................................................................. 27
Belcher Writing Your Journal Article in Twelve Weeks................................................................................. 86
Bell/McGrane/Gunderson/Anderson This Book Is Not Required, 4e....................................................... 88
Belli/Stafford/Alwin Calendar and Time Diary Methods in Life Course Research....................................... 5
Berger Media and Communication Research Methods, 2e......................................................................... 47
Bergman Advances in Mixed Methods Research....................................................................................... 39
Berkman/Reise A Conceptual Guide to Statistics Using SPSS................................................................... 10
Bernard Social Research Methods, 2e........................................................................................................ 69
Bernard/Ryan Analyzing Qualitative Data.................................................................................................. 24
Bickman/Rog The SAGE Handbook of Applied Social Research Methods, 2e........................................... 82
Birks/Mills Grounded Theory...................................................................................................................... 18
Bloomberg/Volpe Completing Your Qualitative Dissertation...................................................................... 86
Boeije Analysis in Qualitative Research...................................................................................................... 26
Boudah Conducting Educational Research................................................................................................. 52
Bourgeault/Dingwall/de Vries The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Methods in Health Research............. 81
Brandt Read, Research and Write............................................................................................................... 91
Brown/Liebovitch Fractal Analysis............................................................................................................. 72
Brummett Techniques of Close Reading.................................................................................................... 48
Bryant/Charmaz The SAGE Handbook of Grounded Theory...................................................................... 78
Bui How to Write a Masters Thesis............................................................................................................. 85
Bull Technology-Based Health Promotion................................................................................................... 55
Bulmer/Shurgis/Allum The Secondary Analysis of Survey Data............................................................... 96
Burdess Starting Statistics.......................................................................................................................... 10
Burnett Doing Your Social Science Dissertation.......................................................................................... 90
Burton/Bartlett Key Issues for Education Researchers.............................................................................. 54
Butler-Kisber Qualitative Inquiry................................................................................................................ 26
Buttolph/Reynolds/Mycoff Political Science Research Methods, 6e........................................................ 57
Byrne/Ragin The SAGE Handbook of Case-Based Methods...................................................................... 79
Calley Program Development in the 21st Century...................................................................................... 41
Campbell/Groundwater-Smith Action Research in Education.................................................................. 94
Caro How to Publish Your PhD..................................................................................................................... 90
Chambliss/Schutt Making Sense of the Social World, 3e.......................................................................... 66
Charmaz Constructing Grounded Theory.................................................................................................... 27
Chilisa Indigenous Research Methodologies.............................................................................................. 22
Clandinin Handbook of Narrative Inquiry.................................................................................................... 78
Coghlan/Brannick Doing Action Research in Your Own Organization, 3e.................................................. 29
Collier Using SPSS Syntax.......................................................................................................................... 15
Cooper Research Synthesis and Meta-Analysis, 4e...................................................................................... 5
Cooper/Booth The Adjunct Faculty Handbook, 2e...................................................................................... 84
Cope/Elwood Qualitative GIS...................................................................................................................... 24
Corbin/Strauss Basics of Qualitative Research, 3e.................................................................................... 20
Costley/Elliott/Gibbs Doing Work Based Research...................................................................................... 6
Craig Study Skills for Health and Social Care Students............................................................................... 89
Creswell Qualitative Inquiry and Research Design, 2e............................................................................... 21
Creswell Research Design, 3e...................................................................................................................... 3
Creswell/Plano Clark Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods Research, 2e...................................... 38
Crotty The Foundations of Social Research................................................................................................ 71
Dahlberg/McCaig Practical Research and Evaluation................................................................................ 41
Dane Evaluating Research............................................................................................................................ 3
Daniel Sampling Essentials........................................................................................................................... 8
David/Sutton Social Research, 2e.............................................................................................................. 68
Davidson Evaluation Methodology Basics.................................................................................................. 44
Davies/Francis/Jupp Doing Criminological Research, 2e......................................................................... 49
Delamont/Atkinson Gender and Research................................................................................................ 97
DeLyser/Herbert/Aitken/Crang/McDowell The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Geography.................... 80
Denzin/Lincoln Collecting and Interpreting Qualitative Materials, 3e......................................................... 19
Denzin/Lincoln Strategies of Qualitative Inquiry, 3e................................................................................... 19
Denzin/Lincoln The Landscape of Qualitative Research, 3e...................................................................... 19
Denzin/Lincoln The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Research, 4e.............................................................. 75
Denzin/Lincoln/Smith Handbook of Critical and Indigenous Methodologies............................................. 77
DeVellis Scale Development, 3e................................................................................................................. 67
Index
Donaldson/Christie/Mark What Counts as Credible Evidence in Applied Research and

Evaluation Practice?................................................................................................................................. 43
Ellingson Engaging Crystallization in Qualitative Research........................................................................ 18
Engel/Schutt Fundamentals of Social Work Research............................................................................... 63
Engel/Schutt The Practice of Research in Social Work, 2e........................................................................ 63
Evans/Rooney Methods in Psychological Research, 2e............................................................................. 59
Faherty Wordcraft: Applied Qualitative Data Analysis (QDA):....................................................................... 24
Fetterman Ethnography, 3e........................................................................................................................ 32
Field Discovering Statistics Using SPSS, 3e................................................................................................ 14
Field/Miles Discovering Statistics Using SAS............................................................................................. 14
Fink Conducting Research Literature Reviews, 3e...................................................................................... 86
Fink How to Conduct Surveys, 4e............................................................................................................... 37
Fink The Survey Kit, 2e............................................................................................................................... 79
Fitzpatrick/Christie/Mark Evaluation in Action......................................................................................... 43
Flick An Introduction to Qualitative Research, 4e........................................................................................ 22
Flick Introducing Research Methodology...................................................................................................... 6
Flick The SAGE Qualitative Research Kit..................................................................................................... 94
Ford How to Do Your Case Study................................................................................................................. 87
Ford The Essential Guide to Using the Web for Research............................................................................ 85
Forrester Doing Qualitative Research in Psychology.................................................................................. 61
Fotheringham/Rogerson The SAGE Handbook of Spatial Analysis........................................................... 81
Fowler Improving Survey Questions........................................................................................................... 37
Fowler Survey Research Methods, 4e........................................................................................................ 37
Fox Applied Regression Analysis and Generalized Linear Models, 2e......................................................... 12
Fox/Weisberg An R Companion to Applied Regression, 2e........................................................................ 12
Franzosi Quantitative Narrative Analysis..................................................................................................... 73
Furr/Bacharach Psychometrics................................................................................................................. 15
Gaiser/Schreiner A Guide to Conducting Online Research........................................................................ 90
Gamst/Liang/Der-Karabetian Handbook of Multicultural Measures......................................................... 76
Gerin Writing the NIH Grant Proposal, 2e.................................................................................................... 84
Gibson/Brown Working with Qualitative Data............................................................................................ 21
Gilbert Computational Social Science......................................................................................................... 92
Gill Developing a Learning Culture in Nonprofit Organizations.................................................................... 62
Girden/Kabacoff Evaluating Research Articles From Start to Finish, 3e....................................................... 3
Given The SAGE Encyclopedia of Qualitative Research Methods................................................................ 93
Globokar Introduction to Online Learning................................................................................................... 84
Gray Doing Research in the Real World, 2e................................................................................................. 70
Grbich Qualitative Data Analysis................................................................................................................. 27
Greasley Doing Essays and Assignments................................................................................................... 88
Green/Thorogood Qualitative Methods for Health Research, 2e................................................................ 56
Greener Designing Social Research............................................................................................................ 67
Grembowski The Practice of Health Program Evaluation........................................................................... 55
Griffiths Research Methods for Health Care Practice................................................................................. 56
Griffiths/Bridges Nursing Research Methods............................................................................................ 97
Gubrium/Holstein Analyzing Narrative Reality........................................................................................... 31
Guest/MacQueen Applied Thematic Analysis............................................................................................. 23
Guo/Fraser Propensity Score Analysis........................................................................................................ 13
Ha/Ha Integrative Statistics for the Social and Behavioral Sciences............................................................. 7
Haase Multivariate General Linear Models.................................................................................................. 72
Hammersley Methodology: Who Needs It?................................................................................................. 69
Hansen Mass Communication Research Methods..................................................................................... 96
Hao/Naiman Assessing Inequality.............................................................................................................. 72
Hardy/Bryman Handbook of Data Analysis................................................................................................ 15
Harrison Diagnosing Organizations, 3e...................................................................................................... 46
Harrison Life Story Research...................................................................................................................... 92
Hartley Snapshots of Research................................................................................................................... 49
Healey/Boli/Babbie/Halley Exploring Social Issues, 3e............................................................................. 68
Heath/Brooks/Cleaver/Ireland Researching Young Peoples Lives........................................................... 70
Heath/Hindmarsh/Luff Video in Qualitative Research............................................................................... 26
Henn/Weinstein/Foard A Critical Introduction to Social Research, 2e....................................................... 69
Hennink/Hutter/Bailey Qualitative Research Methods.............................................................................. 21
Herr/Anderson The Action Research Dissertation...................................................................................... 28
Hesse-Biber/Leavy Feminist Research Practice........................................................................................ 67
Hesse-Biber/Leavy The Practice of Qualitative Research, 2e.................................................................... 17
Hogan Bare-Bones R.................................................................................................................................. 12
Holden/Zimmerman A Practical Guide to Program Evaluation Planning.................................................... 42
Holosko/Thyer Glossary of 1,001 Commonly Used Research Terms........................................................... 4
Holstein/Gubruim Varieties of Narrative Analysis....................................................................................... 31
Houser Counseling and Educational Research, 2e...................................................................................... 49
Hoy Quantitative Research in Education...................................................................................................... 53
Israel Data Analysis in Business Research.................................................................................................. 46
James/Busher Online Interviewing............................................................................................................ 36
Janesick Stretching Exercises for Qualitative Researchers, 3e............................................................... 23
Jarvie/Zamora-Bonilla The SAGE Handbook of the Philosophy of Social Sciences.................................. 83
Jesson/Matheson Doing Your Literature Review....................................................................................... 87
Johnson/Christensen Educational Research, 4e....................................................................................... 51
Johnson/Reynolds Working with Political Science Research Methods, 2e............................................... 57
Kapp/Anderson Agency-Based Program Evaluation.................................................................................. 62
Keller/Casadevall-Kellar The Tao of Research............................................................................................ 5
Kettner/Moroney/Martin Designing and Managing Programs, 3e............................................................ 41
Khamis The Association Graph and the Multigraph for Loglinear Models.................................................. 72
King/Horrocks Interviews in Qualitative Research..................................................................................... 36
Knowles/Cole Handbook of the Arts in Qualitative Research..................................................................... 77
Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt
fax: 805.375.5291
Index 99
Kozinets Netnography................................................................................................................................ 33
Kremelberg Practical Statistics.................................................................................................................. 12
Krippendorff Content Analysis, 2e.............................................................................................................. 48
Krueger/Casey Focus Groups, 4e............................................................................................................... 34
Kumar Research Methodology, 3e................................................................................................................ 6
Kvale InterViews, 2e.................................................................................................................................... 35
Lavrakas Encyclopedia of Survey Research Methods................................................................................ 95
Le Roux/Rouanet Multiple Correspondence Analysis................................................................................ 73
Leong/Austin The Psychology Research Handbook................................................................................... 61
Levin/McEwan Cost-Effectiveness Analysis, 2e......................................................................................... 46
Liamputtong Focus Group Methodology.................................................................................................... 34
Lichtman Qualitative Research in Education, 2e........................................................................................ 53
Lichtman Understanding and Evaluating Qualitative Educational Research............................................... 53
Lindlof/Taylor Qualitative Communication Research Methods, 3e............................................................. 48
Locke/Silverman/Spirduso Reading and Understanding Research, 3e.................................................... 85
Locke/Spirduso/Silverman Proposals That Work, 5e................................................................................ 85
Long Regression Models for Categorical and Limited Dependent Variables............................................... 16
Lune/Pumar/Koppel Perspectives in Social Research Methods and Analysis........................................... 66
Madden Being Ethnographic....................................................................................................................... 33
Madison Critical Ethnography, 2e............................................................................................................... 32
Makagon/Neumann Recording Culture..................................................................................................... 18
Margolis/Pauwels The SAGE Handbook of Visual Research Methods....................................................... 83
Mariampolski Qualitative Market Research............................................................................................... 45
Marshall/Rossman Designing Qualitative Research, 5e............................................................................ 16
Marston Introductory Statistics for Health and Nursing Using SPSS.......................................................... 55
Martin/Kettner Measuring the Performance of Human Service Programs, 2e........................................... 62
Mason/Dale Understanding Social Research............................................................................................. 71
Maxwell Qualitative Research Design, 2e................................................................................................... 23
Maxwell/Rossman/Rallis A Realist Approach to Qualitative Research..................................................... 18
May/Perry Social Research and Reflexivity................................................................................................ 68
McBride The Process of Research in Psychology....................................................................................... 60
McBride/Cutting Lab Manual for Psychological Research, 2e................................................................... 60
McDavid/Hawthorn Program Evaluation and Performance Measurement................................................ 44
McLeod/Thomson Researching Social Change......................................................................................... 70
McNiff/Whitehead All You Need To Know About Action Research.............................................................. 29
Merrill/West Using Biographical Methods in Social Research.................................................................... 69
Mertens Research and Evaluation in Education and Psychology, 3e.......................................................... 52
Mertens/Ginsberg The Handbook of Social Research Ethics..................................................................... 82
Mertler Action Research, 3e....................................................................................................................... 28
Meyers/Gamst/Guarino Applied Multivariate Research............................................................................ 13
Miles/Huberman Qualitative Data Analysis, 2e.......................................................................................... 25
Miller Developmental Research Methods, 3e............................................................................................. 61
Miller/McIntire/Lovler Foundations of Psychological Testing, 3e.............................................................. 59
Mills Introducing Survival and Event History Analysis................................................................................. 12
Mills/Durepos/Wiebe Encyclopedia of Case Study Research.................................................................... 94
Millsap/Maydeu-Olivares The SAGE Handbook of Quantitative Methods in Psychology.......................... 82
Mitchell Doing Visual Research.................................................................................................................. 22
Morgan Focus Groups as Qualitative Research.......................................................................................... 34
Morgan/Krueger The Focus Group Kit....................................................................................................... 95
Muijs Doing Quantitative Research in Education........................................................................................ 52
Muncey Creating Autoethnographies.......................................................................................................... 33
Nestor/Schutt Research Methods in Psychology....................................................................................... 58
Neuendorf The Content Analysis Guidebook............................................................................................... 48
Neugebauer/Evans-Brain Making the Most of Your Placement................................................................ 45
Noffke/Somekh The SAGE Handbook of Educational Action Research...................................................... 78
Nyerges/Couclelis/McMasters The SAGE Handbook of GIS and Society................................................. 76
OLeary The Essential Guide to Doing Your Research Project..................................................................... 89
Oliffe/Greaves Designing and Conducting Gender, Sex, and Health Research........................................... 55
Oliver Understanding the Research Process................................................................................................. 5
Olsen Realist Methodology.......................................................................................................................... 92
Osterlind/Everson Differential Item Functioning, 2e.................................................................................. 73
Padgett Qualitative Methods in Social Work Research, 2e.......................................................................... 64
Pascale Cartographies of Knowledge......................................................................................................... 24
Patton Qualitative Research & Evaluation Methods, 3e.............................................................................. 42
Patton Utilization-Focused Evaluation, 4e................................................................................................... 42
Paxton/Hipp/Marquart-Pyatt Nonrecursive Models................................................................................. 72
Payne/Williams Teaching Quantitative Methods........................................................................................ 77
Pearson Statistical Persuasion...................................................................................................................... 8
Penn/Berridge Social Statistics.................................................................................................................. 93
Piantanida/Garman The Qualitative Dissertation, 2e................................................................................. 87
Pink Doing Sensory Ethnography................................................................................................................ 34
Plano Clark/Creswell The Mixed Methods Reader.................................................................................... 38
Plowright Using Mixed Methods................................................................................................................. 39
Pollock A Stata Companion to Political Analysis, 2e................................................................................... 56
Pollock An SPSS Companion to Political Analysis, 3e................................................................................. 57
Pollock The Essentials of Political Analysis, 3e........................................................................................... 57
Polonsky/Waller Designing and Managing a Research Project, 2e........................................................... 45
Preskill/Catsambas Reframing Evaluation Through Appreciative Inquiry.................................................. 43
Priest Doing Media Research, 2e................................................................................................................ 47
Punch Introduction to Research Methods in Education.............................................................................. 54
Ragin/Amoroso Constructing Social Research, 2e.................................................................................... 68
Raudenbush/Bryk Hierarchical Linear Models, 2e.................................................................................... 16
Redman/Maples Good Essay Writing, 4e................................................................................................... 91

Remler/Van Ryzin Research Methods in Practice........................................................................................ 2
Repko Interdisciplinary Research.................................................................................................................. 4
Repko/Newell/Szostak Case Studies in Interdisciplinary Research............................................................ 4
Richards Handling Qualitative Data, 2e...................................................................................................... 21
Richards/Morse README FIRST for a Users Guide to Qualitative Methods, 2e........................................ 25
Ridley The Literature Review...................................................................................................................... 91
Riessman Narrative Methods for the Human Sciences.............................................................................. 29
Rihoux/Ragin Configurational Comparative Methods................................................................................ 66
Roberts The Dissertation Journey, 2e......................................................................................................... 87
Rossi/Lipsey/Freeman Evaluation, 7e....................................................................................................... 44
Rossman/Rallis Learning in the Field, 3e................................................................................................... 17
Roulston Reflective Interviewing................................................................................................................ 36
Rubin/Rubin Qualitative Interviewing, 2e................................................................................................... 36
Rudas Handbook of Probability................................................................................................................... 81
Rudestam/Newton Surviving Your Dissertation, 3e................................................................................... 86
Ryan/Cousins The SAGE International Handbook of Educational Evaluation............................................. 79
Sagor The Action Research Guidebook, 2e................................................................................................. 28
Saldana The Coding Manual for Qualitative Researchers........................................................................... 22
Salkind Encyclopedia of Research Design.................................................................................................. 91
Salkind Excel Statistics................................................................................................................................. 9
Salkind Statistics for People Who (Think They) Hate Statistics, 2e............................................................... 9
Salkind Statistics for People Who (Think They) Hate Statistics, 4e............................................................... 9
Salkind Tests & Measurement for People Who (Think They) Hate Tests & Measurement, 2e....................... 9
Salmons Cases in Online Interview Research............................................................................................. 35
Salmons Online Interviews in Real Time..................................................................................................... 35
Samaras Self-Study Teacher Research...................................................................................................... 52
Schutt Investigating the Social World, 6e.................................................................................................... 65
Schwandt The SAGE Dictionary of Qualitative Inquiry, 3e.......................................................................... 20
Schwartz/Landrum/Gurung An EasyGuide to APA Style........................................................................... 60
Scott Social Network Analysis, 2e............................................................................................................... 70
Scott/Carrington The SAGE Handbook of Social Network Analysis........................................................... 82
Sharrock/Lynch Ethnomethodology........................................................................................................... 95
Shields Essay Writing.................................................................................................................................. 89
Shore/Carfora The Art of Funding and Implementing Ideas....................................................................... 84
Silverman Doing Qualitative Research, 3e.................................................................................................. 25
Silverman Qualitative Research, 3e............................................................................................................ 17
Simons Case Study Research in Practice................................................................................................... 32
Skrondal/Rabe-Hesketh Multilevel Modelling........................................................................................... 96
Smith/Flowers/Larkin Interpretative Phenomenological Analysis............................................................. 26
Somekh/Lewin Theory and Methods in Social Research, 2e..................................................................... 67
Soriano Conducting Needs Assessments, 2e............................................................................................. 41
Stake The Art of Case Study Research....................................................................................................... 29
Steinberg Statistics Alive!, 2e....................................................................................................................... 8
Stevahn/King Needs Assessment Phase III................................................................................................ 74
Stringer Action Research, 3e...................................................................................................................... 28
Sue/Ritter Conducting Online Surveys....................................................................................................... 37
Sullivan Art Practice as Research, 2e......................................................................................................... 53
Suter Introduction to Educational Research................................................................................................ 54
Swanborn Case Study Research................................................................................................................ 32
Tashakkori/Teddlie SAGE Handbook of Mixed Methods in Social & Behavioral Research, 2e.................. 80
Teddlie/Tashakkori Foundations of Mixed Methods Research.................................................................. 39
Thomas How to do Your Research Project.................................................................................................. 90
Thyer The Handbook of Social Work Research Methods, 2e....................................................................... 62
Torrance Qualitative Research Methods in Education................................................................................ 96
Treadwell Introducing Communication Research....................................................................................... 47
Turner Causality.......................................................................................................................................... 93
Van Schuur Ordinal Item Response Theory................................................................................................ 72
Vogt Selecting Research Methods.............................................................................................................. 92
Vogt/Johnson Dictionary of Statistics & Methodology, 4e.......................................................................... 11
Wagner Using IBM SPSS Statistics for Social Statistics and Research Methods, 3e........................... 11
Walford/Tucker/Viswanathan The SAGE Handbook of Measurement...................................................... 76
Walliman Your Research Project, 2e........................................................................................................... 88
Walliman/Appleton Your Undergraduate Dissertation in Health and Social Care...................................... 56
Warner Applied Statistics............................................................................................................................ 13
Warner/Nellis/Foody The SAGE Handbook of Remote Sensing................................................................. 80
Wellington Making Supervision Work for You............................................................................................. 89
Wheeldon/Ahlberg Visualizing Social Science Research............................................................................. 4
Williams/Vogt The SAGE Handbook of Innovation in Social Research Methods........................................ 76
Willis Foundations of Qualitative Research................................................................................................. 20
Wilson Essentials of Business Research..................................................................................................... 45
Wodak/Meyer Methods for Critical Discourse Analysis, 2e........................................................................ 27
Wolcott Writing Up Qualitative Research, 3e............................................................................................... 19
Wong Association Models........................................................................................................................... 73
Wright/London First (and Second) Steps in Statistics, 2e.......................................................................... 11
Wright/London Modern Regression Techniques Using R........................................................................... 15
Wyatt Knowlton/Phillips The Logic Model Guidebook.............................................................................. 42
Yang Making Sense of Statistical Methods in Social Research................................................................... 10
Yarbrough/Shulha/Hopson/Caruthers The Program Evaluation Standards, 3e....................................... 40
Ybema/Yanow/Wels/Kamsteeg Organizational Ethnography................................................................... 33
Yin Applications of Case Study Research, 3e.............................................................................................. 30
Yin Case Study Research, 4e...................................................................................................................... 30
Index
SAGE Reseller Information

For questions pertaining to title availability, pricing, ordering, account information, and shipping, please
contact SAGE Customer Care. We gladly accept orders and inquiries via phone, fax, e-mail and regular mail.
Phone: 1-800-818-7243, Press 1 then 1 again for Books Customer Care
Fax: 1-800-583-2665
E-mail: order@sagepub.com
Mailing address: SAGE Publications

Customer Care

2455 Teller Road

Thousand Oaks, CA 91320
SAGE is a trading partner with Pubnet. Please contact our electronic data interchange
department at EDI.custsvc@sagepub.com for further information. Pubnet orders
may be processed once SAN (standard address numbers) are in place for new or existing customers. New
customer records will receive expedited attention. Please note the SAN for SAGE is 204-7217.
SAGE Returns Policy

No prior authorization is required.
All returns must be in their original and/or unopened sealed condition and damage free.
Returns will be accepted for 15 months from original invoice date and up to 180 days after declared
out of print.
The original invoice number on which the products were purchased must accompany all returns.
Video-audio tapes, opened (broken seal) multimedia, including software in the form of diskettes,
CD-ROMs, or purchases made on a nonreturnable basis are nonreturnable.
Customers will be notified of damaged returns and have the option of requesting that the damaged
product be returned to them, at their expense.
Return freight charges are the responsibility of the customer. Freight collect shipments will not be
accepted. For your protection, we recommend using a traceable shipping method or insured Parcel Post.
Returns address:

SAGE Publications
Attn: Returns Department
2590 Conejo Spectrum Street
Thousand Oaks, CA 91320
Claims
Prices displayed are in US Dollars and are subject to change.
Purchases that are received damaged must be reported to SAGE within 30 days of delivery.
Phone: 1-800-818-7243, extension 7278
Fax: 1-805-498-9456
E-mail: books.claims@sagepub.com
For additional information including

current Price Lists and information
on Out of Print editions, please visit
www.sagepub.com and navigate
to Resources For... Booksellers
along the top right of the page.
www.sagepub.com
Customer Care Contact Information
2455 Teller Road

Thousand Oaks, California
91320-2218 USA
SAGE Research
Methods Online
The essential tool
for researchers
Visit www.srmo.sagepub.com to purchase
or recommend to your library today!
An expert
research tool
An expertly designed taxonomy
with over 1400 unique terms for social and
behavioral science research methods
Visual and hierarchical search tools to help
discover material and link through
to related methods
For FASTEST delivery, go to: www.sagepub.com
ONLINE
CALL
(800) 818-7243 or (805) 499-9774
New
for
2011
Priority Code: A1111497 For internal use only: 10026
Regularly updated content and features
Monday-Friday: 6 am-5 pm PT
Please mention priority code A1111497 when you place your order
Content organized by complexity

Cite, print, and download content with ease
User-friendly
features
Canadian Customers: Please contact canadatextsales@sagepub.com. Prices

displayed are in US Dollars.
More than 600

books available online
through SRMO
Outside the U.S. and Canada? Call: +44 (0)20-7324-8500
More than 100,000 pages of SAGE book and

reference material on research methods as well
as editorially selected material from
SAGE journals
SAGE texts now comply with the Higher Education Opportunity Act (HEOA).
Find HEOA information for each title at www.sagepub.com or by emailing
sageheoa@sagepub.com or calling (800) 818-7243.
The most comprehensive picture

available today of quantitative, qualitative,
and mixed methods
PAID
A wealth of
essential content
PRSRT STD
U.S. POSTAGE
OXNARD, CA.
PERMIT NO. 9090
Easy-to-use
navigation tools

Spring RM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spring RM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Research Methods,

Statistics, & Evaluation

SAGE is revolutionizing statistics!

Students and instructors are able to track and

How will your students

How can you be among the

titles for purchase 72

60-day examination COPIES

purchase only COPIES

Titles displaying this symbol are available online through

Two easy ways to order!

SAGE texts now comply with the Higher Education

General Research Methods / Research Design

Two easy ways to order!

ONLINE: For FASTEST delivery, go to: www.sagepub.com

Research Methods in Practice

Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-6467-8

About the Authors

Gregg G. Van Ryzin, PhD, is an Associate

Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt

General Research Methods / Research Design

Methodology for People Who Need to Read

Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods

Designed for anyone who needs to learn to read

John W. Creswell, University of Nebraska-Lincoln

Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7853-8

Ellen R. Girden, Nova University, Miami

8. Discriminant Analysis Studies

Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-7446-2

To review our complete catalog, please visit www.sagepub.com

Also from John W. Creswell...

General Research Methods / Research Design

Visualizing Social Science Research

Allen F. Repko, The University of Texas at Arlington

Glossary of 1001 Commonly Used

Paperback ISBN: 978-1-4129-8248-1

A Pocket Guide for Social and Behavioral Sciences

Michael J. Holosko, University of Georgia College of Social Work

Process and Theory

Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt

General Research Methods / Research Design

Robert F. Belli, University of Nebraska

Offering practical advice on how to conduct a

Frank P. Stafford, University of Michigan

2010, 280 pages

2009, 360 pages

The Tao of Research

Paul Oliver, University of Huddersfield, U.K.

Dana K. Keller and Mary Lou Casadevall-Keller

This text fills the gap in most research

To review our complete catalog, please visit www.sagepub.com

Calendar and Time

General Research Methods / Research Design

Doing Work Based

Approaches to Enquiry for Insider-Researchers

Ranjit Kumar, University of Western Australia,

Geoffrey C. Elliott, University of Worcester, U.K.

Written specifically for students with no

2010, 224 pages

Sage 800.818.7243 or 805.499.9774 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. pt

Introduction to Statistics / Quantitative Methods

Introduction to Statistics / Quantitative Methods

Integrative Statistics for the Social and Behavioral Sciences